JP6500836B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game ball will win on the basis of winning in the winning opening, and when the win is won, a game in which a specific game is executed A machine has been proposed.

JP 2012-147965 A

  However, further improvement of interest is required.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player in the game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is capable of flowing the first flow path through which the gaming ball can flow down, and the gaming ball configured such that the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow A game ball launcher capable of striking and firing the game ball in the first channel and the second channel by varying the second channel and the launch intensity of the game ball; First ball entering means capable of entering game balls having flowed down two flow paths, and second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means capable of entering game balls having flowed down the second flow path Providing a first benefit based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means, and providing a second benefit based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means It has a privilege granting means capable, and be capable of receiving the upper surface of the game ball with above said second ball entrance means game balls, the lower A restricting member capable of restricting the flow-down, a variable control means capable of changing the restricting member between a restricted state capable of restricting the game ball on the upper surface and a released state in which the restricted state is released; The gaming machine has a plurality of gaming balls that have been restricted by causing the game ball to be restricted by the restriction member to flow when the restriction member is changed from the restriction state to the release state. It is configured to be allowed to flow into a specific area, and when the restriction member is in the release state, the game ball is dropped one by one when the game ball flows down without being restricted by the restriction member. If it is configured to be allowed to flow into and the variable state is changed from the restricted state to the released state, the game ball previously restricted by the restriction member is restricted by the restriction member. More than a sphere The one in which towards the game balls, which is regulated the regulating member is configured easily ball entrance to the second ball entrance means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game ball emission means is such that the emission intensity is varied by operating an operation means operable by the player. .

According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the first flow path through which the game ball can flow down, and the second flow path through which the game ball configured to make it difficult for the game ball flowing down the first flow path to flow down And game ball firing means capable of striking and firing the game ball in the first flow path and the second flow path by varying the firing strength of the game ball, and flowing down the second flow path First ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball having flowed down the second flow path, and the first ball entering A privilege giving means capable of providing a first benefit based on the game ball entering the ball means, and providing a second benefit based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means When have, there may be received by the upper surface of the game ball with above said second ball entrance means game balls, to flow down the downward And a variable control means capable of changing the restricting member between a restricted state capable of restricting the game ball on the upper surface and a released state in which the restricted state is released, In the gaming machine, when the regulating member is changed from the regulating state to the releasing state, a plurality of gaming spheres regulated by causing the gaming ball regulated by the regulating member to flow down to a specific area It is configured to be able to flow in, and when the restriction member is in the release state, the game ball is made to flow one ball at a time into the specific area when the gaming ball flows down without being restricted by the restriction member. When it is configured to be able to be changed from the restricted state to the released state, the gaming balls previously restricted by the restriction member are later than the gaming balls previously restricted by the restriction member. To the control member Since towards game balls that had been braking is one that is configured easily ball entrance to the second ball entrance means, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest in the game of the player.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect, the gaming ball emission means is operated by the operating means operable by the player, whereby the emission intensity is increased. Since it is variable, there is an effect that the player can easily launch the game ball .

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right side area | region of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the schematic diagram which showed the ball flow in the right side area | region of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the operation | movement relationship between the storage apparatus provided in the game board of the pachinko machine, and a non-electric role thing. (A), (b) is a schematic diagram showing the internal structure of the second variable winning device 650. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. (A) is a figure which showed typically area | region division setting of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus, (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small hitting type B small hitting game which is executed based on the ball entering the first entering ball, (b) is a first hitting ball It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the small hitting game of the small hitting type A which is executed on the basis of the entry of the ball. (A) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small hit game executed based on the ball entering the second ball entrance, and (b) is based on the ball entering the second ball entrance It is a timing chart showing the flow of the jackpot game to be executed. It is the model which showed the game flow in 1st Embodiment typically. It is a timing chart (the first half) which shows a relation between a game state and an effect state in the first embodiment. It is a timing chart (the second half) which shows a relation between a game state and an effect state in the first embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device at the time when the gaming state is short and the variation of the first special symbol is started, (b) is a game It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in a state which is a short time state, and when 40 seconds have passed since the fluctuation | variation of a 1st special symbol was started. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device after the ball enters the second entrance while the gaming state is short and the first special symbol is fluctuating (B) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is short and the variation period of the first special symbol is one second. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device at the time of the change of the 1st special symbol performed during time saving state stopping, and (b) is after time saving state end It is a figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in a normal state and the time of the fluctuation | variation of a 2nd special symbol being started. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in the time of a normal state after the time saving state end, and the change of the 2nd special symbol which small hit was elected being stopped and displayed, (B) is a figure showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a big hit game is started based on the small hit game displayed in FIG. 18 (a). (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the case where the second jackpot game is started by the time variation performed after the jackpot game by V winning is over, (A) b) is a view showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when the gaming state is short and the variation period of the first special symbol is 10 seconds. (A) is a display of the third symbol display device in the case where the game storage state is a short time state and the second special symbol is caused to be stored due to the ball entering the second ball entry port during the battle effect It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a screen, and (b) is a game state is a short time state, and a ball does not enter into the 2nd ball entrance during battle production, and the 3rd symbol display device of It is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen. (A) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the case where the gaming state is the short time state and the holding ball of the second special symbol is acquired up to the upper limit during the time variation of the first special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, (b) is a short game state, and during the time change of the first special symbol, the bonus special effect being executed is obtained by acquiring the holding ball of the second special symbol up to the upper limit. It is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device when the small hitting game based on the first special symbol is executed while the gaming state is normal, (b) FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device in the small hitting game shown in FIG. 22 (a). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen of the third symbol display device when a right-handed game is played while the gaming state is a normal state (left-handed state), and (b) is an electric motor It is the schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in the state in which the character is open | released. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the first embodiment FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which shows typically the content of the 1st random number table in 1st Embodiment, (b) has shown typically the content of the special symbol 1 random number table in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol 2 random number table in 1st Embodiment, (d) is the content of the 2nd hit random number table in 1st Embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram shown to (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol 2 big hit selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically showing the contents of the special symbol 1 small hitting selection table in the first embodiment It is a schematic diagram shown to (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the special symbol 2 small hit selection table in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table in the first embodiment, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for the special figure 1 jackpot in the first embodiment. It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for Sig 1 off in the first embodiment, and (d) is the special diagram in the first embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for 1 small hits. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 shift pattern table for short time in the first embodiment, and (b) is the contents of a variation pattern table for the special figure 2 in the first embodiment It is the schematic diagram which showed typically. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment It is a block diagram shown. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table, and (b) is each effect state selected by the effect state selection table and the third displayed on the third symbol display device Fig. 3 is a schematic view showing a relationship between three symbols and a holding symbol. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically an example of the display data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in 1st Embodiment. It is the model which showed typically an example of the drawing list in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the special symbol fluctuation start processing which is executed by MPU inside the main control unit in 1st execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the normal fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the short-time fluctuation | variation start process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven accessory control process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the common drawing prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V entrance passage processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the small hitting end processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the electrically-driven combination thing opening-and-closing process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the storage apparatus control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the fluctuation | variation pattern related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the number-of-holding-balls relevant processing performed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the winning a prize information related processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice lamp control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flow chart which showed change display setting processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the common drawing fluctuation display setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the production | presentation state setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the specific production setting processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio lamp control control equipment in 1st execution form. It is the flowchart which showed the counter update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment Is a flow chart showing the V interrupt process. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment Is a flow chart showing stop type command processing. (A) is the flowchart which showed the back image change command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment, (b) is performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. Is a flow chart showing an error command process to be performed. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing jackpot start command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment It is a flowchart which shows round number command processing. It is the flowchart which showed the display setting process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the warning picture setting processing which is executed by MPU in the display control in a 1st embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the pointer update process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first embodiment It is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the second embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the second embodiment FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the fluctuation pattern table for special figure 1 in 2nd Embodiment typically. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the short-time end discrimination | determination process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows time short change start processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 2nd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment, (b) shows an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display device in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device in the third embodiment, (b) is a block showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device in the third embodiment FIG. It is the model which showed typically the content of the time saving state selection table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol variation processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control device in a 3rd embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation time setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is the flowchart which showed the command determination processing 3 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view showing modification 1 of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the modification 2 of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows another example of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is the model which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electrically-driven combination thing. It is the model which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electrically-driven combination thing. It is the model which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electrically-driven combination thing. It is the model which showed the operation | movement of the modification of an electrically-driven combination thing. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other effect example 1, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other effect example 1. FIG. (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other effect example 2, and (b) shows an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device in the other effect example 2. FIG. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for common drawing in the other production example 2, and (b) schematically shows the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for normal use in the other reproduction example 2. It is the schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the contents of the fluctuation pattern table for time reduction A in the other production example 2, and (d) is the fluctuation for time reduction B in the other production example 2 It is the model which showed the content of the pattern table typically. 60 is a flowchart showing a normal symbol variation process 4 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the other effect example 2. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment. It is the model which showed the structure of the right side area | region of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A)-(d) is the schematic diagram which showed typically the structure of the distribution apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the ball | bowl flow in the flow-path unit of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display screen in a 3rd symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of RAM in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus of the pachinko machine in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 5 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo rendering process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the pseudo-effect second half process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the counter update process 5 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 5th embodiment. It is the model which showed the structure of the right side area | region of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (A), (b) is the schematic diagram which showed the ball | bowl flow in the flow-path unit of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is the model which showed the ball | bowl flow in the flow-path unit of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing 6 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in 5th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows big hit operation start processing performed by MPU in the main control device in a 5th embodiment, and (b) is performed by MPU in a main control device in a 5th embodiment It is a flow chart which shows big hit operation end processing. It is the model which showed the structure of the right side area | region of the pachinko machine in the modification of 5th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 6th embodiment. It is the model which showed the structure of the right side area | region of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the 1st contact classification selection table in 6th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the specification of each attacker in 6th Embodiment, c) is a figure which shows the attacker operation of each jackpot type in 6th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are right side regions of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the ball flow of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 5 is a schematic view showing the operation of the non-electric role piece 710 provided on the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing an internal structure of a second variable winning device 650 provided in FIG. 7, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side in front view (see FIG. 1) to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side.

  The inner frame 12 has a large number of nails, a first left ball entry 64a, a first right ball entry 64b (hereinafter referred to as the first left ball entry 64a and the first right ball entry 64b). Is referred to as the first ball entrance 64), the second ball entrance 640, the through gate 67, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), etc. 2) is detachably mounted from the front side. Balls are played by balls flowing down the front surface (game area) of the game board 13. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 8) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, a metal hinge 19 is attached on the left side in a front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 19 is provided is used as an open / close shaft. The unit 15 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is an assembly of a resin part for decoration, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be viewed on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box-like shape with the upper surface opened and protruding upward, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination causes the ball inserted into the upper plate 17 to be guided to the ball firing unit 112a.

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot or the predetermined reach, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. The electric decoration parts 29-33 which incorporated light emission means, such as LED, are provided in the periphery of the window part 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Further, at the upper left portion of the front surface frame 14 in a front view (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying a payout ball and an error occurrence time.

  A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the right side of the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen. 2), and the like can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

  Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated with a bill, a card, etc. being inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is A loan will be made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. The return button 43 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface on the left side thereof. . On the other hand, on the right side of the lower tray unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by the player for driving a ball into the front of the game board 13 is disposed. Inside the operation handle 51, the ball launch unit 112a is driven. The touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, the push button stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 are detected by the change of the electric resistance. A variable resistor (not shown) is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of operation, and the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, and the ball is then driven to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are off.

  In addition, although it was set as the above-mentioned structure in this embodiment, not only it but the structure from which the main control apparatus 110 or another control apparatus detects the ball | bowl emitted by the ball emission unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball emission unit 112a It may be configured to detect that a ball has been fired. Alternatively, the number of detected balls may be counted and stored until processing such as RAM clear is executed.

  A frame button 22 is provided on the upper portion of the lower tray unit 15. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, in the case of changing the effect or the background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later. Thus, by arranging the frame button 22 which can be operated by the player on the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to arbitrarily select the effect to be executed by the pachinko machine 10, and the player's willingness to participate in the game It can be enhanced.

  In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 that the player can press and operate is provided as the operation means that can be operated by the player, but other configurations may be used. For example, the player can Or sensor-type operation means for detecting that the player has approached, lever-type operation means that can be operated by the player in the left-right (or front-back) direction, and handle-type operation means that the player can rotate Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the number of operation means is one, but may be more than that, or a plurality of operation means of different operation methods may be provided. By configuring in this manner, the player can execute more various operations, and the types of effects to be executed based on the player's operation on the operation means can be increased.

  In addition, the operation means (frame button 22) is disposed at a position (upper left side of the lower tray unit 15) where the player can operate even while playing a game (while operating the operation handle 51 with the right hand) Therefore, even while the player is playing a game, the frame button 22 can be easily operated.

  At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming board 13 is made of a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view, a large number of nails for guiding balls, windmills and rails 61, 62, general ball entrance 63, 1 ball slot 64, second ball socket 640, variable winning device (first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650), variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is an inner frame It is attached to the back side of 12. The general ball entrance 63, the first ball entrance 64, the second ball entrance 640, the variable winning device (the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650), the variable display device unit 80 is based on router processing It is disposed in a through hole formed in the board 60, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a wood screw or the like. The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a belt-like metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front of the game board 13, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, a belt-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is formed. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in the above is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front surface of the game board 13 and is formed by dividing two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 into a substantially circular area (a start opening is disposed, and a shot ball is (Flowing down area). Further, the game area includes all areas where the ball having passed through the return ball preventing member 68 flows down before passing through the out port 66 and the winning opening (ball entrance).

  In this pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display unit 80 (left side in a front view of the game board 13) is formed as a left gaming area, the right side is formed as a right gaming area, and a ball is launched to aim at the left gaming area In the left-handed game, a game in which a ball is made to enter the general entrance 63 and the left first entrance 64a is played, and a game in which the ball is shot at the right game area (hereinafter referred to as the right-handed game) ), The fired ball passes above the variable display unit 80, and the first right entrance 64b, the second entrance 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second provided in the right game area A game aiming at the variable winning device 650 and the like is performed. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this manner, the game is prevented from becoming monotonous by causing the player to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state.

  Further, although the details will be described later, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) which is advantageous to the player according to various gaming states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state etc.) set in the pachinko machine 10 The game is configured to be different. As a result, it is possible to change the contents of the game while grasping the current game state for the player, and it is possible to suppress the game from becoming more monotonous.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 is continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 8) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the end portion (upper left part in FIG. 2) of the inner rail 61, and the situation in which the ball guided to the upper part of the game board 13 once comes back into the ball guide passage is prevented. Be done. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated. In addition, a resin-made arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62 is a base. It is driven in and fixed to the plate 60.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, a drawing of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball is a through gate (normally When the ball passes through the ball entrance 67, a lottery of a normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed. In the drawing of the special symbol performed for entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is judged whether the special symbol is a big hit or not, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit If it is determined, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 is shifted to the special game state, and the first specified winning opening 65a which is normally closed is normally closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or 10 balls are won ) And the release is repeated the number of times (the number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the first specified winning combination opening 65a, and therefore, a large number of prize balls are paid out from the normal time.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that a small hit where a bonus different from the special gaming state is given to the player is determined in a part of the cases where it is determined other than the big hit (off) by lottery of special symbol. Is configured. When the special symbol lottery wins a small hit, the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 for a predetermined period (for example, until a total of 1.8 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls are won) A small hit game to be released is executed. Although details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, a part of the ball that has won the second specified winning opening 650a during this small hitting game has passed the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 6)) In the case, the above-mentioned jackpot game is configured to be executed after the small hitting game is over. As a result, the jackpot is executed based on the game result of the small hit game executed by winning the small hit in the special symbol lottery and the game aiming to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery. It is possible to carry out both the game aiming at the Therefore, since the player can execute various games, it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In addition, although the details will be described later, the present pachinko machine 10 is provided with seven types of "big hit A" to "big hit G" as big hit types of special symbols. In addition, two kinds of "big hit A, B" are the big hit types that can be determined when it becomes a big hit in the lottery that is triggered by the ball entering the first entrance 64, " The two types of jackpots C and D will be small wins in the lottery that is triggered by the ball entering the first entrance ball slot 64, and if the ball passes a specific area during the small win game Jackpot type that can be determined, and “jackpot E” is a jackpot in the lottery that is triggered by the ball entering the second entrance 640, or the ball enters the second entrance It is a jackpot type that can be determined when the ball passes a specific area during the small hitting game, which is a jackpot type, which is a jackpot F, G. , The ball entered the second entrance ball entrance 640 Becomes small prize in the lottery is executed bets triggered a jackpot sphere can be determined if having passed through the specific area classification in the small win game. A plurality of jackpot types provided in this way are the jackpot game benefits (eg, number of rounds, opening time, opening operation pattern), jackpots, and the like as a bonus given to the player when the jackpot game is executed. The benefits provided after the game (for example, the benefits for providing the gaming state in which the player can easily obtain the next jackpot) are set to be different. In this way, in the jackpot game executed at various timings to the player, it is possible to increase the gaming intention to acquire the jackpot game to which more advantageous benefits are given, and to provide various game characteristics. be able to.

  When a lottery of a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variation display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds to 90 seconds, etc.) elapses, the lottery result The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. When the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times of entering the ball is for each type of entrance. The number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81, up to four times each. When the variation display is finished in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of holding balls for the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 remains, a lottery for the next special symbol is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

  On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol performed for the passage of the ball in the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, the success or failure judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is performed. When the normal symbol comes into contact, the second ball entry port 640 is changed by changing the motorized part 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 3 seconds). It is released. In the normal state, the second ball entry port 640 is closed because the motorized control article 640a is disposed at the closing position. Therefore, when it becomes a hit of an ordinary symbol, it becomes easy for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the drawing of the special symbol becomes easy to be performed.

  In addition, when the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is performed, the variation display of the normal symbol is started in the second symbol display device 83, and the lottery is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds or 4 seconds) has elapsed. The normal symbol showing the result is stopped and displayed. If the ball passes through the through gate (normal ball entry port) 67 while the variable display is being performed in the second symbol display device 83, the number of times of passage is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is the first symbol While being displayed by the display device 37, it is also shown in the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variation display is finished in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of holding balls for the through gate (normal ball entry port) 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed, and according to the lottery The variable display is started.

  As described above, seven types of "big hit A" to "big hit G" are provided as jackpot types of special symbols. When it comes to "big hit A-C", the number of rounds is 7 rounds special gaming state (7 rounds big hit), and when it becomes "big hit D" it becomes 2 rounds special gaming state (2 round big hits), " When it becomes a jackpot E, the number of rounds becomes a special game state of 15 rounds (15 round jackpots). When it becomes "big hit F", the number of rounds becomes 5 rounds of special gaming state (5 rounds big hit), and when it becomes "big hit G", the number of rounds becomes 10 rounds special gaming state (10 rounds big hit).

  In addition, when it becomes “big hit A”, “big hit C”, and “big hit E to G”, after the big hit ends, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes short, and the second symbol is more normal than the normal condition when the normal symbol is won. The time saving state in which the electric character 640a is in the game state in which the opening control is performed so that the ball easily enters the ball entrance 640 is given until the variation of the special symbol is completed once (time reduction 1 time) . When it becomes "big hit B" and "big hit D", it will be in a normal state without being given the short time state mentioned above after the big hit end.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment has a function (so-called, time saving function) of shifting the gaming state to the short time state in which the ball is more easily inserted into the second entrance 640 than the normal state. Although it does not have the function (so-called, probability fluctuation function) which changes the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the normal symbol having, it is not limited to this, using the pachinko machine which has the probability fluctuation function It is also good.

  As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is varied according to the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be common (for example, all eight rounds) for all jackpot types. Further, for example, the period in which the "time saving state of the normal symbol" is changed may be changed according to the type of the jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period when the "time symbol of the normal pattern" is changed, open the motorized symbol 640a at the time of opening the motorized symbol 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 or at the time of one hit of the ordinary symbol. It is good also as what changes the frequency of doing. Further, in the present embodiment, the type of jackpot determines the benefit to be awarded after the jackpot end, for example, the jackpot end on condition that the ball has passed a specific area (V prize switch 650 e 3) during the jackpot. It may be made to give the time variation state of a special symbol or the regular symbol after a while. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is configured to be continued until the number of times of variation of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times (one time), but the time saving number is multiple times in advance (for example, The time saving state may be configured to be set to 10 times, and when the number of times of special symbol variation has reached the time reduction number, or when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result. In addition, a lottery different from the lottery of special symbols (a lottery for determining whether or not the time saving state continues) is executed, and the time saving state is ended when the result of the lottery results in not continuing the time saving state May be Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the time saving state is always provided after the end of the jackpot game according to a specific jackpot type (jackpot A, jackpot C, jackpot E to G), but other configurations may be used For example, there is provided a time reduction frequency measuring means for measuring the number of times the time reduction state is continuously applied, and when the measurement result by the time reduction frequency measuring means is a predetermined number of times (for example, 10), which jackpot Even if the jackpot game according to the type is executed, the time saving state may not be provided after the jackpot game is over. Thereby, the upper limit of the game period in which the player is advantageous can be set, and it is possible to suppress the provision of excessive gambling to the player. Moreover, although the example which set the upper limit to the frequency | count in which the time saving state is continuously given was shown as an example which suppresses excessive euphoria, the period (time saving) in which the time saving state is continuously given An upper limit may be provided to the number of times of variation of the special symbol to be executed during the consecutive period). Even in the case of such a configuration, since the upper limit can be set to the short-running period, it is possible to suppress excessive euphoria. In this case, since the upper limit is not set to the number of times the time saving state is given (that is, the number of big hits during the short run period), the limited period (time short run period with the upper limit set) During the game, the player can be motivated to play a game to win a large number of jackpots.

  A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, at the upper right side upper part (right upper part of FIG. 2) of the game area. A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 performs display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform fluctuation display by indicating whether or not the drawing of the special symbol performed in conjunction with the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) is being executed, or performing fluctuation display or fluctuation A special symbol (first symbol) according to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighted state as a stop symbol after termination, or a ball entered into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 The number of holding balls, which is the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

  When a ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 while the variable display of the special symbol (first design) is being performed in the first symbol display device 37, the entrance of the ball The number of times is suspended up to four times for each entrance, and the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also indicated by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, ball entry into the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be suspended up to four times each, but the maximum number of times is limited to four times It may be set to three or less times, or five or more times (for example, eight times). Moreover, you may set so that it may be hold | maintained until the number which totaled the ball | bowl number of ball | bowls with several ball entrances becomes the upper limit number (for example, 8 times).

  The 7-segment display 37b is for displaying the number of rounds in a big hit, error display, and the like. In addition, LED37a is comprised so that the luminescent color (for example, red, green, blue) of each LED may differ, The various game states (high probability state of special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 with few LED by the combination of the luminescent color Or, it can display the time of the normal pattern, etc.). In addition, LED 37a not only indicates whether the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the change, but if it is a big hit, the special according to the big hit type (big hit A to G) A symbol (first symbol) is shown.

  Further, in the game area, a plurality of general entrance ports 63 are arranged, in which a predetermined number (for example, five) of balls are paid out as winning balls when balls enter the ball. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is disposed on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

  The third symbol display device 81 displays the decorative third symbol (decorative symbol) according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. For example, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning combination), the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 is triggered by it. To be executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed. In addition, when the ball passes through gate 67, with that as a trigger, fluctuation display of normal design (the 2nd design) is executed in 2nd design display 83. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the normal symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the normal symbol.

  Although details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the target of the symbol (main symbol) for informing the player of the fluctuation display in an easy-to-understand manner to the player using the third symbol display device 81 is changed according to the gaming state or the like. Is configured as. In this pachinko machine 10, it is determined based on the lottery result of the special symbol in one gaming state (for example, the normal state) whether or not the privilege to be advantageous to the player is given in the pachinko machine 10 This is because in the gaming state (for example, the time saving state), it is configured to be determined based on the lottery result of the normal symbol. Thus, even with the pachinko machine 10 having complicated playability, the player can change the target of the symbol (main symbol) mainly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the special symbol or the normal symbol. It is sufficient to watch only the variation display of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  The third symbol display device 81 is configured of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114 described later, so that, for example, three symbol rows on the left, middle and right are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, among the displays of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control unit 110, the display regarding the special symbol is performed by the first symbol display device 37, and the display regarding the normal symbol is performed by the second symbol display device 83. On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the display of the second symbol display device 83. Note that, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 9 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 9 (a) is a view schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG. 9B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the first display area Dm shows a first special symbol, one of a second special symbol, or a normal symbol (which varies depending on the game state), which is one of the third symbols. Three symbol rows are displayed: area Dm1), middle (middle display area Dm2), and right (right display area Dm3). Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol (first special symbol, second special) is displayed on the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 A symbol or a normal symbol) is to be variably displayed (dynamically displayed).

  The third symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the ordinary symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is composed of the main symbols with numerals from "0" to "9". ing. Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the lottery result by the main control unit 110 described later is a specific lottery result (in the case of a special symbol, a large hit or a part of a small hit, in the case of an ordinary symbol). In this case, the same third symbol (main symbol) is aligned (for example, "777"), and a variation display is performed, and a jackpot is generated after the variation display is finished.

  Specifically, in the first display area Dm, three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 for left, middle and right are displayed. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  In the first display area Dm, the third symbol is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1. If the third symbol is stopped on the effective line by the combination of the big hit symbols (in this embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols), the big hit moving image is displayed as the big hit.

  Second display areas Dn (Dn1 to Dn6) are formed in the upper right area of the first display area Dm. In the second display area Dn, a first special symbol, a second special symbol, and a symbol row indicating a normal symbol are displayed. Specifically, the second display area Dn1 is an area where a symbol row indicating the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display region Dn2 is an area where a symbol row indicating the second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Dn3 is formed as an area in which a symbol row indicating a normal symbol is displayed, and a variable display corresponding to the variable display of each symbol is displayed.

  Further, in the second display area Dn, the numbers of reserved storages of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are also displayed. Specifically, the second display area Ds4 is an area where the number of pending storages of the first special symbol is displayed, and the second display area Ds5 is an area where the number of pending storages of the second special symbol is displayed. The 2 display area Ds6 is an area in which the number of reserved storages of normal symbols is displayed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the display corresponding to the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the display corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol, and the display corresponding to the number of pending storage of each symbol is the second of the third symbol display device 81. Among them, one symbol (a symbol to be notified to the player) is selected as a main symbol, and the other symbols are less noticeable than the main symbol. It is displayed in the second display area Dn as a symbol. Thereby, the player can execute the optimal game only by confirming the display content of the main symbol.

  In the present embodiment, by making the display mode of the subordinate symbol smaller than the main symbol, the display mode is less prominent than the main symbol, but other configurations may be used, for example, the display of the main symbol The slave symbol may be configured to be more difficult to distinguish than the main symbol by increasing the transmittance of the slave symbol display aspect or moving the slave symbol display area than the aspect.

  Moreover, as a symbol row | line | column aspect of each symbol displayed by this 2nd display area Dn, you may display the symbol row displayed as a main symbol as it is, as shown in FIG.9 (b) "○ "," "X" two types of symbol rows are displayed side by side in two rows, and when "O" symbols are displayed in two right and left rows, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol hits It may be configured to notify the player that it was.

  Furthermore, the slave symbol corresponding to the symbol displayed as the main symbol may be configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or the slave symbol display may be displayed in places other than the third symbol display device 81. May be

  In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (FIG. 9 (b When the gaming state is short, the main symbol (common figure main symbol Dmc) corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 16A). Furthermore, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the first display area Dm regardless of the gaming state (see FIG. 17 (b)).

  Further, although detailed description will be described later, in each gaming state, when predetermined gaming conditions are satisfied (for example, when the normal symbol whose fluctuation is started during the time reduction state stops changing after the time reduction state ends), A combination different from the combination of the main symbol and the subordinate symbol described above is displayed. As a result, the display of the third symbol display device 81 can be executed without giving a sense of incongruity to the player against symbol variations executed across different gaming states. Furthermore, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol are all displayed as the slave symbol in the second display area Dn, and the pseudo symbol for effect is variably displayed as the main symbol (see FIG. 22A). It is configured as follows. Thereby, it is possible to make the player think that symbol variation is being executed in a period (for example, a small hit period) in which each symbol is not variably displayed (i.e., small hit period), and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  The main symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 is configured in a display mode consisting of the numbers from "0" to "9", but other main symbols and identification As long as the display mode is possible, a display mode other than the numbers may be used. For example, a display mode imitating a character or a display mode combining a character and a number may be used. In addition, as symbols displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the first display area Dm, symbols other than the main symbols (that is, even if the same symbol is aligned on the effective line L1 and stopped, the bonus is not given to the player A series of symbols including a secondary symbol may be used as a symbol).

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol or the normal symbol performed by the main controller 110 (refer to FIG. 8) described later is a win, the variation display in which the same main symbol is aligned And is configured to generate a jackpot after the variable display is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  The main symbol (third symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1, and the stopped display state is held for at least one second. In this way, by displaying the stopped third symbol for a predetermined period (one second or more), it is determined whether or not the player is a combination of the third symbol corresponding to the hit (special symbol, a result of drawing the ordinary symbol) It can be suppressed that the player misses the game. In addition, in the stop display state mentioned above, only the main symbol stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 is displayed, and the other main symbols (the main symbols set in each symbol row and other than the effective line L1 It is good to make the main symbol stopped and displayed in the place not be displayed (it makes it display so as not to be conspicuous). This makes it possible to notify the player of the stop display result of the main symbol more clearly.

  In addition, when the combination of the 3rd symbol which is stopped and displayed is the combination which corresponds to the disassembly and there is a holding ball, the fluctuation display corresponding to the lottery based on the holding ball is started after 1 second of stop display . In addition, when several holding balls exist, a lottery is performed based on the holding ball corresponding to the oldest entering ball in time.

  On the other hand, if the main symbol (the third symbol) for the special symbol or the combination corresponding to the detachment of the normal symbol is stopped for 1 second in the absence of the holding ball, then the third symbol is also stopped and displayed. Will continue. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new main symbol fluctuation starts. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the main symbol (the third symbol) is stopped and displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not executed is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. Do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being performed or not based on the display of the demonstration effect.

  In this embodiment, the demonstration effect starts when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses after the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) corresponding to the main symbol are stopped and displayed. However, regardless of the main symbol and the subordinate symbol, the demonstration effect may be configured to be started based on the elapsed time after all symbols are stopped and displayed, or The display mode of the effect may be different between the demonstration effect in the case where only the symbol is stopped and the demonstration effect in the case where both the main symbol and the subordinate symbol are stopped and displayed. In this case, for example, in the demonstration effect executed when only the main symbol is stopped and displayed, a notification that promotes the progress of the game is executed, and in the demonstration effect when both the main symbol and the subordinate symbol are stopped and displayed, It is preferable to execute a notification for promoting a game played by a game player. This makes it possible to play the game smoothly.

  Next, the sub display area Ds provided below the first display area Dm will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, the sub display area Ds is formed below the first display area Dm. The sub display area Ds is an area in which an auxiliary display mode for assisting the player's game, such as a game situation or a game description, is displayed corresponding to each game state or game result. Specifically, the number of reserved symbols corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed (see FIG. 9 (b)), or the content of the variation effect of the main symbol being executed in the first display area Dm is assisted. (See FIG. 22 (a)), show the contents of the game to be played (see FIG. 22 (b)), or display the remaining period of a specific period (short period of time) that is advantageous to the player (see FIG. 15 (a)). This makes it possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 is continued. Below the variable display unit 80, a left first ball inlet 64a through which a ball can enter is disposed. When the ball enters the first left ball entrance 64a, the first ball entrance switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball entrance switch is turned on. A lottery of special symbols is made by the main controller 110, and a display according to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first left ball entrance 64a is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls enter. The left first ball entrance 64a performs a right-handed game in the case where the ball is hit to the path on the left side in a front view with respect to the variable display unit 80 (when so-called left-handed game is performed). It is configured to be easier to enter than in the case.

  A storage device 750 and a specific general ball entry port 630 are disposed below the left first ball entry port 64a. Although the detailed description of the storage device 750 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, when the storage device 750 is capable of variably operating between the closed state and the open state, and the storage valve 750 a is in the closed state, It is comprised from the side wall for forming the storage area which can store one ball. The storage valve 750a is variably controlled so as to change from a closed state capable of storing a ball to an open state when a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery, and a storage area when variably operated to an open state. The ball stored in the (or the ball that has flowed into the storage device 750 while the storage valve 750a is variable) is configured to flow downward to the storage device 750. In addition, the storage device 750 is disposed at a location where it is possible to store a ball, even when a left-handed game is performed or when a right-handed game is performed.

  Below the storage device 750, a specific general ball entry port 630 is disposed so that the ball having passed the storage device 750 can enter the ball. The specific general entrance 630 is a winning opening where ten balls are paid out as a winning ball when the ball enters, and is used as a trigger for operating the non-electric role product 710. Although a detailed description of the non-motor-operated part 710 will be described later with reference to FIG. 5, the non-electric mechanism 710 a is activated by the weight of the ball entering the specified general entrance 630 and A non-motorized accessory 710 provided is configured to be variable to a position where the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

  On the other hand, in the right area of the game board 13, two flow paths through which the ball played by the right-handed game flows down, and the distributing member 700 for distributing the balls fired by the right-handed game into the two paths described above; The non-electric role product 710, the first right ball entry port 65b, the through gate 67, the second ball entry port 640 and the electric service item 640a, the first variable winning device 65, and the second variable winning device 650 It is arranged. Next, with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the configuration of the right side area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  The balls fired by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the first flow channel 701 and the second flow channel 702 by the distribution member 700. The balls distributed to the first channel 701 pass through the bending path 701a (see FIG. 3), pass through the through gate 67 and the second inlet port 640, and flow out to the lower right region. Further, the balls distributed to the second flow path 702 flow down the third flow path 703a when the non-motor-operated part 710 provided on the downstream side is in the closed state (see FIG. 5A). Flow into the inflow port 704a and flow down the fifth flow path 704b provided on the back side (the back side in the viewpoint of FIG. 2) of the first flow path 701, and the right area on the game board 13 from the outflow port 704c. It flows downward. On the other hand, when the non-motor-operated part 710 is in the open state (see FIG. 5B), the fourth flow path 703b is caused to flow down to enter the right first ball inlet 64b. When a ball enters the first right ball entrance 64b, three balls are paid out as winning balls.

  In addition, although the detailed description of the non-electric role thing 710 is later mentioned with reference to FIG. 5, in this embodiment, in the open state of the non-electric role thing 710, the ball which entered the right first ball entrance 64b The non-electric item 710 is configured to be changed to the closed state by its own weight.

  The balls distributed to the two flow paths (the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702) by the distribution member 700 join below the right area, and the second variable winning device 650 and the first variable winning device 65 are located. To the outlet port 66 while flowing down the flow path which can flow into the storage device 750.

  Here, the flow of the balls distributed by the distribution member 700 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a schematic view showing a ball flow when a ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the first channel 701, and FIG. 4 is a second channel after the ball fired by the right-handed game It is the model which showed the ball | bowl flow in the case of flowing down 702. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3, in the case where the sorting member 700 shoots 100 balls in one minute to alternately distribute the balls fired by the right-handed game to the first flow path 701 and the second flow path 702. In the first flow path 701, 50 pieces flow at intervals of 1.2 seconds and 50 pieces flow into the second flow path 702 at intervals of 1.2 seconds. The first flow path 701 is formed of a ball passage formed by a passage width (about 15 mm) for one ball, and the flow-down speed of the ball is reduced by a bending path 701a provided in the middle thereof The sphere passage time until the sphere which has flowed into the first flow path 701 flows out from the first flow path 701 is configured to be about 2 seconds.

  A through gate 67 is disposed at a downstream position (downstream side of the bending path 701 a) of the first flow passage 701, and a second inlet port 640 is disposed downstream of the through gate 67. . The second ball entry port 640 allows the ball to pass through the first channel 701 when the motorized accessory 640a is in the closed state, and passes through the first channel 701 when the motorized accessory 640a is in the open state. The ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640.

  In addition, the ball passing through the through gate 67 is configured to reach the second entrance 640 after 0.2 seconds. Although the details will be described later, since the variation time of the ordinary symbol executed upon the passage of the ball through the through gate 67 is 3 seconds at the shortest, the sphere passing through the through gate 67 is the through gate 67 It is configured such that the second ball entry port 640 will not enter the ball by the opening operation of the motorized role piece 640a that is executed based on the lottery of the normal symbol that is executed with the passage of. That is, the period from passing through the through gate 67 to reaching the second ball entry port 640 (electric combination 640 a) is configured to be shorter than the period required for the lottery of the normal symbols. In this way, it is possible to execute the lottery of the normal symbol and to physically disable the action of causing the second entry port 640 to enter the ball only by firing one ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of an inappropriate game. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the ball emitted by the right-handed game is divided by the distributing member 700 into the first flow path 701 (the flow path in which the through gate 67 and the second ball entrance 640 are disposed), and the second flow Because it is distributed to the road 702 alternately, the lottery of the normal symbol is executed (the ball is made to pass through the through gate 67), and the winning is won by the lottery of the normal symbol, the electric role object 640a is opened, and the second entry ball opening Since it is necessary to fire at least three balls in order to cause the ball to enter the ball 640, it is possible to suppress that a game (for example, a single shot) that is less appropriate is performed.

  In the present embodiment, the through gate 67 and the second ball inlet 640 are disposed in one of the two channels distributed by the distribution member 700, but the through gate is disposed in one of the channels. 67 may be disposed, and the second ball inlet 640 may be disposed in the other flow path. By this configuration, for example, when a malicious player destroys the distributing member 700 and creates a state in which the ball flows down only in one of the flow paths, the ball passes through the through gate 67. It becomes possible to regulate the game in which the ball is allowed to enter the second ball entry port 640 when the normal symbol is won, and it is possible to suppress the unfair game from being performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the case where the ball flows down the second flow channel 702 will be described. The second flow path 702 is configured such that the period in which the ball flows down is shorter than the first flow path 701 described above. Specifically, the time required for the sphere flowing into the second flow path 702 to flow out from the outlet 704 c is configured to be about 1.5 seconds. By configuring in this way, when 100 spheres are fired toward the right side area in 1 minute, the sphere that has flowed into the first flow path 701 and the sphere are fired next, and the second flow path 702 Flowing down the lower right area (the area in which the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 are disposed) of the game board 13 at approximately the same time (about 0.1 second difference) as the ball flowing into the Become. Therefore, in the gaming state (big hit state or small hit state) in which each variable winning device is opened, it is possible to easily make a plurality of balls win at one time.

  In addition, a part of the second flow path 702 (fifth flow path 704b) is provided on the back side of the first flow path 701 (the back side in the viewpoint of FIG. 4), and the front view (the front view in FIG. 4) A plurality of flow paths are configured to overlap. Thus, by forming a plurality of ball flow paths using the depth direction of the game board 13, it is possible to reduce the space (the area where the game flow path occupies the game board 13) that forms the ball flow path. it can.

  Furthermore, the ball outlet (outlet 704 c) of the second flow channel 702 is located below the flow outlet of the first flow channel 701 (downstream of the second ball inlet 640), and the right of the game board 13 In the lower region, the spheres are configured to flow out more downstream than the spheres flowing out of the first flow path 701. As a result, the ball vigorously discharged from the outlet 704 c (the ball discharged at a higher speed than the ball flowing down the first channel 701) directly collides with the ball flowing out of the first channel 701, which is irregular. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball flow.

  In the present embodiment, although the configuration in which the balls fired by the right-handed game are alternately distributed to the two flow paths by the distribution member 700 is used, other configurations may be used, for example, two Instead of alternating (1: 1) to the flow paths, balls may be distributed at different rates, or may be distributed to three or more flow paths. Further, in the present embodiment, the distributing member 700 is used in which the distribution destination of the next passing sphere is changed by the weight of the passing sphere, but, for example, the vibration is electrically driven according to a predetermined rule. A dividing member may be used.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 5, the flow of the operation of the storage device 750 and the non-motor-operated part 710 used in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 5 (a) is a schematic view showing that both the storage device 750 and the non-motorized part 710 are in the closed state (closed state), and FIG. 5 (b) is a storage device 750 and the non-motorized part. It is a schematic diagram which shows that thing 710 and all are open states (open state).

  As shown in FIG. 5 (a), when the non-electric accessory 710 is in the closed state (closed state), it is impossible (hard) to cause the ball to enter the right first ball entrance 64b. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to perform a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the gaming board 13 and prevent the ball from entering the right first ball entrance 64b.

  This non-electric accessory 710 has an operating portion that abuts when the ball passes a specific location, and the operating portion is actuated by the weight of the abutted ball and is released based on the actuation. Is configured. Specifically, the ball entering the specified general ball entry port 630 abuts on the above-described action portion, and the action connection portion 710a operates in conjunction with the action, and the non-electric accessory 710 is released. As a result, the ball can enter the right first ball entrance 64b.

  Furthermore, the right first ball entry port 64b is provided with a second action portion capable of contacting the ball that has entered the ball, and the ball's own weight comes into contact when the ball abuts on the second action portion. Causes the second action part to operate and the non-electric accessory 710 is closed. As described above, the non-motor-controlled part 710 is configured to switch the variable state based on the operation of the member acting by the weight of the ball without using the electric drive source. The configuration of the non-motor-operated part 710 may be other than the above-described configuration, and a known configuration may be used as a configuration that operates based on the weight of the ball.

  The ball entering the specific general entrance 630, which triggers the non-motor-operated part 710 to operate (open), is the storage device 750 provided above the specific general entrance 630 as described above. The ball is allowed to enter the specified general ball entry port 630 when the storage device 750 is in the released state. Then, as described above, when the predetermined cancellation condition (for example, the start of the big hit game) is satisfied as described above, the storage device 750 is in the cancellation state until the predetermined closing condition (for example, 10 seconds elapses) is satisfied. Is variably controlled to be

  That is, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the big hit game is started and the first variable winning device 65 is opened, the storage device 750 is released. And the storage apparatus 750 will be in a cancellation | release state, and the non-electric role thing 710 will be open | released based on the ball having entered the specific general ball entrance 630. In the first embodiment, since the storage device 750 is disposed at a position where the balls fired by any of the left-handed game and the right-handed game can pass through the storage device 750, the right-handed game The ball that did not win the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game in which the second variable winning device is temporarily closed (the ball passed over the first variable winning device 65 during the interval between rounds when the first variable winning device is temporarily closed) ) Can be entered into the specified general entrance 630.

  Therefore, it is possible to obtain both the payout of the winning balls based on entering the first variable winning device 65 and the payout of the winning balls based on entering the specific general entrance 630 during the jackpot game. be able to. Furthermore, since the ball which can not be won in the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be able to enter the specified general entrance slot 630, the first variable can be made during the big hit game which has conventionally been a wasted ball It is possible to add an added value that is advantageous to the player to a ball that has not won a prize to the prize device 65.

  In the first embodiment, the storage valve 750 a is set to release the storage device 750 for 10 seconds after the jackpot game is started (after the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 is performed for the first time). It is configured to be variably operated. Therefore, by establishing the end condition of the first round (for example, winning 10 balls) in the jackpot game within 10 seconds, an interval from the end of the first round to the start of the second round (interval between rounds) ) And the period during which the storage device 750 is released can be matched.

  This makes it possible to cause the ball that has passed over the first variable winning device 65 to enter the specified general entrance 630 during the inter-round interval period, so the first round in the jackpot game is quicker (within 10 seconds) ) Can be motivated to play the game.

  In addition, as a release timing of storage device 750 executed during the big hit game, the above-mentioned release timing (after the big hit game is started (after the opening operation of the first variable winning device 65 for the first time is executed) for 10 seconds A release timing other than the above may be set, and the storage device 750 may be set to be released for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) at a predetermined interval (for example, an interval of 10 seconds). By configuring in this way, when the end timing of each round of the jackpot game (the timing at which the interval between rounds is set) and the timing at which the storage device 750 is released coincide with each other, there are many during the jackpot game. A ball can be entered into the specified general entrance 630.

  In addition, in the case of using the configuration described above, by adjusting the timing at which the end condition of each round in the jackpot game is satisfied (for example, winning the tenth ball which is the end condition of the round to the first variable winning device (By adjusting the timing of operation by operating the operation handle 51), it is possible to vary the number of balls to be entered into the specified general entrance 630 during the big hit game, so the player can receive a big hit game. A new game characteristic can be provided in which the end timing of each round in the game is adjusted to the predetermined timing (the timing when the storage device 750 is in the released state), and the player can play the game eagerly.

  In addition, the display mode for notifying the third symbol display device 81 of the release timing of the storage device 750 or the display mode that allows the player to predict the timing at which the interval between rounds is executed may be displayed. As a result, the player can execute the jackpot game while grasping the contents displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the first embodiment described above, since the non-electric role product 710 is in the open state (open state) when the big hit game is executed, by performing the right-handed game during the big hit game, the first right A ball can be reliably made to enter the ball entrance 64b. Thereby, it is possible to reliably execute the variation of the first special symbol in the time-shortened state (time-shortened at the start of the continuous state mode transitioning from the normal state jackpot (initial time short)) to shift after the end of the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in response to the ball entering the right first ball entrance 64b, the non-electric accessory 710 operates so as to shift to the closed state (closed state). It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the right first ball entrance 64b excessively during the game.

  Next, referring to FIG. 6, the configuration is such that the game balls guided to the distribution channel of back cover body 650e in second variable winning device 650 are distributed to normal discharge channel 650e1 and special discharge channel 650e2 described later. Will be explained.

  FIG. 6 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which the balls winning the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the normal discharge flow channel 650e1, and FIG. 6 (b) is a diagram showing the second variable winning device 650. It is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a winning ball is distributed to the special discharge flow channel 650e2.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, when the switching member 650h is activated, the gaming balls having passed the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 are distributed to the special discharge flow channel 650e2. In the present embodiment, the retention member 650 n is provided in the special discharge flow channel 650 e 2. Only one ball can be held in the distribution destination area 650h3, which is an area to which the game ball is distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2 side by the switching member 650h, by the holding member 650n. Thus, when one game ball is staying in the distribution destination area 650h3, the game ball having passed the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not distributed to the special discharge flow path 650e2, It usually flows down to the discharge flow path 650e1.

  The retention member 650 n is configured of a shutter mechanism that can be inserted and retracted from the game board 13 side. The retaining member 650 n operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of the retaining solenoid 209 b (see FIG. 8). The staying member 650 n can hold one game ball in the distribution destination area 650 h 3 by advancing operation (closing operation) forward. On the other hand, by retreating backward (opening operation), the gaming balls staying in the distribution destination region 650h3 flow down to the special discharge flow channel 650e2.

  Here, the second variable winning device 650 is capable of entering the game ball by opening the open / close door 650f1 during the small hit game. In addition, the staying member 650n becomes a closing operation during small hitting game (when it is possible to enter the second variable winning device 650), and after the open / close door 650f1 is closed (new to the second variable winning device 650) After the predetermined time has elapsed since the ball can not be hit, the opening operation is performed. That is, in the present control example, the gaming balls entering the second variable winning device 650 are limited to one playing ball flowing into the special discharge flow path 650e2 even if the switching member 650h is operating. Thereby, it can be suppressed that the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow channel 650 e 2 become excessive.

  The gaming ball having flowed into the special discharge flow path 650e2 passes through the V winning switch 650e3. In the first embodiment, the jackpot game is provided based on the passage of the game ball to the V prize switch 650 e 3.

  In the first embodiment, the game balls flowing down to the special discharge flow channel 650 e 2 are limited to one ball, but the invention is not limited thereto, and two or more game balls are accumulated in the distribution destination region 650 h 3 Alternatively, the number of gaming balls to be restricted may be changed as appropriate by operating the staying member a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) during the small hitting game.

  A case where the gaming ball is guided to the normal discharge flow channel 650e1 will be described with reference to FIG. 6 (a). FIG. 6A is a view showing a state in which the flow path solenoid 209c (see FIG. 8) is inoperative and the opening piece of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 is blocked by the induction piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h. .

  In the first embodiment, even when the flow path solenoid 209c is not operated, the retention member 650n provided in the special discharge flow path 650e2 is configured to operate. As a result, it is not necessary to switch the process according to the presence or absence of the operation of the flow path solenoid 9209c, so it is possible to reduce the design cost and the program capacity.

  When the flow path solenoid 650k is inoperative, all gaming balls having passed through the detection port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 flow downward to the normal discharge flow path 650e1. On the other hand, since there is no gaming ball flowing down to the special discharge flow path 650e2, there is no influence by the staying member 650n newly provided in the first embodiment.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 10 and FIG. 11, the flow of the small hitting game in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 10 (a) shows a small hitting type B small hitting game which is executed based on the entering of a ball into the first entering slot 64 (the first left entering slot 64a and the first right entering slot 64b). 10 (b) is executed based on the entering of the ball into the first entrance 64 (the first left entrance 64a and the first right entrance 64b). It is a timing chart showing the flow of small hitting game of small hitting type A. FIG. 11 (a) is a timing chart showing the flow of a small hit game executed based on the entry of a ball into the second entry port 640, and FIG. 11 (b) is the second entry port 640. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the jackpot game performed based on the ball's entry of the ball. The details of the operation control of the various devices shown in FIGS. 10 and 11 will be described later.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when a small winning is won in the first special symbol lottery, a small hitting game for 60 seconds is executed (see FIG. 22). In this small hitting game, the game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened is executed, and the small hitting game ends when the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 passes the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) The jackpot game is configured to be executed later. If you win a small hit in the lottery of this first special symbol, the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game (easy to pass) small hit (small hit type A) , A small hit (small hit type B) in which the ball can not pass (hard to pass) the specific area (V winning switch 650 e 3) is selected.

  First, description will be made with reference to FIG. Based on the winning of the ball to the first entrance 64, the main control unit 110 performs variation control of the first special symbol. At that time, in the display control device 114, a first special symbol variation effect indicating that the first special symbol is in change is executed for the same period (30 seconds) as the variation time of the first special symbol. The time of the first special symbol variation effect performed by the display control device 114 will be described later. Then, when the variation of the first special symbol is stopped and the main controller 110 starts the small hitting control (when the small hitting game is executed), the opening / closing door 650f1 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is opened and closed. The V inlet solenoid 209a for switching, the staying solenoid 209b for variably operating the retaining member 650n, and the flow path solenoid 209c for variably operating the switching member 650h are turned on according to a predetermined opening scenario. Specifically, the V entrance solenoid 209a repeats the opening operation which is turned off for 15 seconds after the small hitting game is executed and turned on for 0.5 seconds twice, and then is turned off for 15 seconds for 0.8 seconds A total of 60 seconds of open scenario is set to be on for 13.2 seconds.

  Next, the staying solenoid 209b is in the on state (the state in which the ball is retained) for 55 seconds after the small hitting game is executed, and then in the off state (the state in which the ball retention is released) for 60 seconds in total. An open scenario of seconds is set. The opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b described above is an opening scenario common to the small hitting types A and B.

  On the other hand, the opening scenario of the flow path solenoid 209c is configured such that an opening scenario different depending on the small hitting type is set, and the ball can not pass through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) (hard to pass) In the small hit type B, which is the type, an open scenario in which the small hit game period continues to be turned off for 60 seconds is set (see FIG. 10A), and the ball passes through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) In the small hit type A, which is a possible (easy to pass) small hit type, an open scenario in which the off state is set for 40 seconds, the on state for 15 seconds, and the off state for 5 seconds after the small hit game is executed (FIG. 10 (B)).

  As described above, the ball easily passes through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) by differentiating only the driving operation of one solenoid among the three solenoids driven while the small hit game is executed. By configuring the small hit game and the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass, the open scenario common to the small hit games executed in different small hit types can be used, thereby reducing the processing load. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is made common, and the opening scenario of the passage solenoid 209c is made different depending on the small hitting type, but even if other configurations are used For example, the opening scenario of the staying solenoid 209b and the passage solenoid 209C may be made common, and the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a may be made different. In this case, a common opening scenario is set such that a period in which the ball can pass and a period in which the ball can not pass through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) are set by the timing of the ball winning in the second variable winning device 650. As an opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a, an opening scenario in which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on corresponding to the period in which the ball can pass is set as the opening scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a; It is preferable to use an open scenario in which the V-inlet solenoid 209a is turned on by making the winning switch 650e3) correspond to a period during which the ball can not pass. Furthermore, it is preferable to unify the period during which the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned on in any open scenario. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the second variable winning device 650 match the number of balls that can be won.

  Also, as in the example described above, the opening scenario is not different only for the V inlet solenoid 209a, and even when the same opening scenario is used, the start position (execution start position) of the opening scenario is different. In the specific area (V prize switch 650e3), a small hit game in which the ball easily passes and a small hit game in which the ball does not easily pass may be executable. In such a configuration, it is not necessary to prepare a different release scenario for each small hit type, so the storage capacity can be reduced.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 11A, the flow of the small hitting game executed based on the ball entering the second entrance 640 will be described. In addition, in this embodiment, the small hitting game executed on the basis of the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 (ie, having won the small winning by the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The small hit game to be executed on the basis is configured to execute the same operation control. Therefore, the small hit type will be described without limitation.

  In FIG. 11A, the entire small hitting control time (small hitting gaming time) is set to 10 seconds for explanation. First, when the set time t1 (6.5 seconds) elapses after the small hitting game (control) is started, the V inlet solenoid 209a is turned off among the plurality of solenoids described above, and the open / close door 650f1 is closed. The closing of the open / close door 650f1 prevents the new ball from winning in the second variable winning device 650. Next, when the set time t2 (9 seconds) elapses, the staying solenoid 209b is turned off and the staying member 650n is opened (retracted), and the ball retained by the staying member 650n flows down to the special discharge path 650e2. To go. The setting time t2 is set to a time sufficient for the balls existing in the second variable winning device 650 to flow down the normal discharge flow channel 650e1 when the setting time t1 has elapsed. 2) Only the ball retained by the retaining member 650n in the variable winning device 650 will flow down the special discharge flow channel 650e2. Next, when the set time t3 (5 seconds) elapses, the flow path solenoid 209c is turned off, and the opening piece of the entrance of the special discharge flow path 650e2 is closed by the induction piece 650h2 of the switching member 650h. The setting time t3 is set to a time sufficient to allow the ball flowing down the special discharge flow channel 650e2 to flow downstream of the movable range of the induction piece 650h2 when the setting time t2 has elapsed.

  By driving the staying solenoid 209b and the flow path solenoid 209c with a time difference as described above, even if the stay member 650n keeps the ball staying in the movable range of the induction piece 650h2, the induction piece 650h2 and the stay member 650n The device can be made compact because the fluid can be reliably made to flow down to the special discharge flow channel 650 e 2 without interference with the staying spheres.

  Finally, the main control device 110 ends the small hitting game control on the basis of the ball having flowed down the special discharge flow path 650e2 passing the V prize switch (specific area) 650e3, and performs the big hit game control, the first The specific winning opening 65 is opened.

  Next, points different from FIG. 11 (a) will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (b). In FIG. 11B, since the lottery result of the second special symbol based on entering the ball into the second entrance 640 is a big hit (per symbol), the operation of the second variable winning device 650 is not performed. That is, after the variation control of the second special symbol by the main control unit 110 ends, the jackpot control is started. In the meantime, the second special symbol variation effect is executed in the display control device 114 to indicate that the second special symbol is in the process of variation.

  Here, the relationship between the effect which the display control apparatus 114 performs in FIG. 11 (a), and the time of the effect which the display control apparatus 114 performs in FIG.11 (b) is demonstrated. In FIG. 11 (a), the sum of the variation time (2 seconds) of the second special symbol and the small hitting presentation time (10 seconds) is set to 12 seconds, and in FIG. 11 (b) the variation time of the second special symbol Is set at 12 seconds. This is the timing at which the jackpot game is started even if the jackpot based on the lottery result of the second special symbol is either the V prize winning mentioned above or the symbol hit, that is, the first variable winning device 65 (first specified prize This is to adjust the timing at which the mouth 65a) opens. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the lottery result of the second special symbol, and to enjoy the effect executed by the display control device to the end.

  Next, the flow of the game according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic view schematically showing the flow of the game in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is divided into normal states, a left-handed game to execute the lottery of the first special symbol (special 1) and aiming at the left first ball entrance 64a and the gaming state is short In the case, aim at the second entrance 640 and execute the lottery of the second special symbol (special 2), or if the gaming state is hit (big hit, small hit) state, the first variable winning device 65, the first 2 is configured to play a right-handed game aiming at the variable winning device 650, and wins a jackpot (big hit or small hit) in the first special symbol lottery executed during the left-handed game, and the game ends When the time saving state is given later, the game mode shifts to the right-handed game (continuous mode), and shifts to the specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. This continuous play mode (specific game state) is ended when a predetermined condition is established (when the game state is shifted to the normal state and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol becomes 0), the normal state It shifts to the left strike game which is. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, during the left-handed game (normal state), a game is performed aiming to shift to the right-handed game (specific game state) which is advantageous to the player, and the right-handed game is performed During the continuous mode (specific game state), a game is performed aiming to continue the continuous mode (specific game state). As described above, in the gaming machine having different playability, the player is made to respond to the game (right-handed play, left-handed play) in which the positions where the player shoots the balls are different. It is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, a symbol of winning the lottery of the first special symbol as a trigger to shift from the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed to the specific gaming state (in-line mode) in which the right-handed game is performed. Hits and, the first special symbol is won in small hits, multiple (two types) of triggers, such as V winning per to make a specific area (V winning switch 650e3) pass during the small hitting game and execute a big hit Since the player has the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game early during the left hitting game, which is a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the normal gaming state where a left strike game is performed, a game aimed at the left first ball entrance 64a is executed. The first special symbol is drawn based on the ball entering the left first ball entrance 64a, and if the jackpot type of the lottery result is the jackpot A (80% at the time of jackpot win), after the end of the jackpot A time saving game state (time saving state) is provided when the winning of the second ball entry port 640 becomes easy. When transitioning to the short time game state (short time state), the right-handed game in which the ball is hit to the right side of the game board 13 in order to aim at the second entrance 640 disposed in the right area of the game board 13 To be done. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is the jackpot B (20% at the time of the jackpot), since the time saving game state (time saving state) is not granted after the end of the jackpot, the normal gaming state Transition to the normal state). Moreover, in this embodiment, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, and there is also a route that becomes a big hit (V winning) when the small hit type is a small hit A (10% at the small hit). . In this case, after the big hit ends, it shifts to the time saving game state. In addition, even if the small hitting type is small hitting A, if you can not pass the ball to the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hitting game, or the small hitting type of the winning small hit In the case of small hit B, there is no transition to the time saving game state (time reduction state), and the state shifts to the normal state in which the left hitting game is executed.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 10, the flow during the right-handed game, which is advantageous to the player, will be described. In the pachinko machine 10, as described with reference to FIG. 2 to FIG. 5, the right first ball entrance 64b is disposed in the right area of the game board 13, and the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is executed At least one ball is configured such that the ball enters the right first ball entrance 64b. In other words, in the normal gaming state (normal state), when winning a big hit is given a time saving state after the end of the big hit game, after the end of the big hit game, at least one pending memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) The time saving state is started in a state in which there is no hold storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the present pachinko machine 10, when both the retention storage of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the retention storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) exist, the second special symbol The lottery (variation) based on the reserve storage of (special figure 2) is configured to be executed with priority (so-called special preference change 2), but the reserve storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is In the absence state, the lottery (variation) based on the retention memory of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed. Here, since the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the time saving state is configured to be set to 150 seconds regardless of the lottery result, after the time saving state is started During 150 seconds, the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is being executed. In addition, when fluctuation (lottery drawing) of any special symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2) is executed once during the time saving state, the ending condition of the time saving state is established ( 1 time reduction)

  During a period in which the first special symbol (special figure 1) is fluctuating in the short time state, a game for acquiring hold storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, and the second special symbol ( It is possible to obtain up to 4 pending storages of Special Figure 2). Here, if it is possible to acquire the retention memory of the second special symbol (special figure 2), the change of the first special symbol is stopped after the time reduction end, and after shifting to the normal state, the second special symbol is for retention memory The lottery based on is executed. As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, the lottery of the second special symbol is set to win the big hit with a probability of 1/300, and win the small hit with a probability of 299/300, and further, 2 small hits won by the special symbol lottery, a small hit game (it is easy to pass the ball) that can pass the ball in the specific area (V winning switch 630e3) is executed, all the jackpots that are executed when winning V A jackpot is set in which a time saving state is given after the jackpot game is over. Thus, in the time-saving game state, as long as the second special symbol hold storage is included, the continuous play mode (specific game state) is continued.

  On the other hand, during the period when the first special symbol is fluctuating in the short time state (during the consecutive preparation period), it is not possible to acquire the reserved memory of the second special symbol, and there is no reserved memory of the second special symbol. When the time saving state ends, the game mode is shifted to the normal gaming state as it is, and the continuous play mode (specific gaming state) is ended.

  In addition, if multiple (for example, three) reserved memories of the second special symbol are acquired during the consecutive preparation period, the second special symbol will start to change when it enters the time saving state again. Become. In the present embodiment, the variation time of the second special symbol (special variation time) in the time saving state is set to 2 seconds regardless of the lottery result, and is shorter than the variation time (3 seconds) of the normal symbol in the time saving state Since it is set to become, it is suppressing newly acquiring pending storage of the 2nd special symbol during the time saving state where the lottery (variation) of the 2nd special symbol is being executed. This makes it possible to suppress the situation where the player is provided with an excessive winning ball. In the present embodiment, once entering the short time state, the short time state is configured to loop with a probability of about 90%.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 13-FIG. 23, the effect display content performed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. First, with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the flow of the effect display content changing corresponding to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 13 is a timing chart (first half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the rendering state in the present embodiment, and FIG. 14 is a timing chart (second half) showing the relationship between the gaming state and the rendering state in the present embodiment.

  Here, the decorative symbol (third symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 used in the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the decorative symbols (third symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the three types of normal symbols can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Among them, it is displayed in the first display area Dm (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device as the main symbol which is the decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the symbol to which the lottery result should be most notified to the player. In addition, it is configured to display a decorative symbol (third symbol) corresponding to the other symbols as a slave symbol in the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9) of the third symbol display device.

  And, according to the transition of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, by switching the symbol to be displayed as the main symbol, the player is only made to recognize the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 In order to comprehend complicated gameplay in an easy-to-understand manner.

  About control to change the symbol displayed as the main symbol mentioned above, although detailed explanation is mentioned later, the value of the production state is set based on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 and the fluctuation situation of each symbol, and the value of the production state The symbol displayed as the main symbol and the symbol displayed as the subordinate symbol are switched and displayed based on the symbol.

  As shown in FIG. 13, in the case of the normal (special 1) state in which the gaming state is the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol, "state 1" is set as the effect state. During this "state 1" is set, the first special symbol is displayed as the main symbol and the normal symbol is the subordinate symbol, and the holding symbol of the first special symbol is displayed as the main holding symbol (Fig. 9 (b)). As described above, in the “normal (special 1)” state in which the first special symbol fluctuation (lottery) is being executed, the player is made to easily recognize the lottery result of the first special symbol. The contents of the game can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Next, in the "big hit" state in which the big hit is won in the first special symbol lottery and the big hit game is being executed, in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9B). The jackpot effect image is displayed. In this case, since the main symbol is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81, "-" is set as the effect state.

  After the jackpot game is over, in the "time-short (special 1)" state in which the gaming state shifts to the short-time state and the change of the first special symbol is executed, "state 3" as the effect state based on the change situation of the normal symbol. Or "state 5" is set. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in the "time-short (special 1)" state will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is "time reduction (special 1)", a game for acquiring the suspension storage of the second special symbol is performed. In order to obtain the reserved memory of the second special symbol, a right-handed game is performed, a ball is passed through the through gate 67 (a lottery of a normal symbol is executed), and a normal symbol is hit (per common figure). It is necessary to make the probability be 1/20) and open the motorized symbol 640a.

  That is, in the case where the gaming state is the "time-saving (special 1)" state, the player plays the game while expecting that the lottery result of the normal symbol will be a hit. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol whose fluctuation has been started during the short time state stops changing during the short time state, and the operation of the motorized steering wheel 640a is started, the opening operation of the motorized steering wheel 640a is Since it is set to be an opening pattern (long opening) which is advantageous to the player, the spread pattern variation is started while the gaming state is not the short time state (for example, the jackpot state), and the electric operation is performed during the short time state. When the movement of the accessory 640a is started, or when the movement of the motorized combination 640a starts after the time reduction state (for example, the normal state) is started. Instead of the opening pattern (long opening) in which the opening operation of the object 640a is advantageous to the player, the normal opening pattern (short opening) will be executed.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, when the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol on condition that the gaming state is shifted to the short time state. The main symbol will be displayed in response to the variation of the normal symbol that the electric character 640a is short-opened despite the short time condition as described above, giving the player a sense of distrust There was a problem of

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the "time saving (special 1)" state is set as the gaming state, the variation condition of the normal symbol is determined, the timing at which the variation of the normal symbol is started, and the variation of the normal symbol When the timing at which the game is stopped (when the winning is won, the timing when the motorized combination 640a is opened) is in the "time-short (special 1)" state, "state 5" as the effect state. Is set, and otherwise “state 3” is set.

  Then, during the period in which "state 5" is set as the effect state, the normal symbol is displayed as the main symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol are subordinate symbols, and the second special symbol as the main hold symbol Is displayed (see FIG. 16 (a)). Thus, in the "time-short (special 1)" state in which the first special symbol variation (lottery) has been executed for a long time (150 seconds), the symbol corresponding to the main symbol is switched from the first special symbol to the normal symbol Thus, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the lottery result of the normal symbol, and to notify the content of the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In addition, during the period when “state 3” is set as the effect state, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the pseudo symbol that does not correspond to any of the ordinary symbols is the main symbol, the first special symbol, the second special symbol The third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a subordinate symbol, and the holding symbol of the second special symbol is displayed as the main holding symbol (see FIG. 16A). By configuring in this manner, the content of the game can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  Further, in the state in which the second special symbol is fluctuating, "state 4" is set as the effect state regardless of the gaming state (regardless of the normal state and the time saving state). During a period in which "state 4" is set as the effect state, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed as a main symbol (see FIG. 17B). Then, as shown in FIG. 14, when “state 5” is set as the effect state, if the lottery result of the first special symbol in fluctuation is a specific result (for example, a big hit), the first When the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 becomes equal to or less than a predetermined period, "state 6" is set as the effect state.

  The period during which "state 6" is set as this effect state is a lottery of the first special symbol from the variation display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol executed in "state 5" is the main symbol. We display the symbol for simulation based on the result as the main symbol. By doing this, it is possible to secure a period for suggesting to the player the lottery result of the first special symbol winning the jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot game of the first special symbol is suddenly started from the state where the "state 5" is set and the variation display mode in which the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is the main symbol is displayed, the game It is possible to suppress the problem that the person is confused.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the effect state shifts from "state 5" to "state 6" is the timing at which the variation of the normal symbol is executed. Thereby, the transition of the rendering state can be performed without discomfort.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, and the lottery result of the first special symbol is a small hit, a specific effect for a small hit is executed (see FIG. 22). When the gaming state is the normal state and the small hitting game based on the first special symbol is executed, "state 2" is set as the effect state.

  During the period when "state 2" is set as this effect state, in the specific effect for small hitting, the first special symbol, the second special symbol, the pseudo symbol which does not correspond to any of the ordinary symbols is displayed as the main symbol and the fluctuation display Be done. The pseudo symbol variably displayed in this case is a pseudo symbol variably displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game. That is, the timing at which the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (for example, all eyes) is displayed a predetermined period before the timing at which the second variable winning device 650 opens, that is, the predetermined stop display mode is displayed. At the timing when the ball fired after it is shot becomes possible to win the second variable 650, the effect is as if the player thinks that the second variable winning device 650 is open based on the fact that the pseudo symbol is stopped and displayed. To be executed.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the small hitting game in which the second variable winning device 650 is opened, the small hitting game which is advantageous to the player (the ball easily passes through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3)) is disadvantageous. The type of stop display mode of the pseudo symbol which is variably displayed during the small hitting game is set according to the type of the small hitting game being executed. For example, as the stop display mode of the pseudo symbol corresponding to the timing when the second variable winning device 650 is opened at the timing when the ball can pass through the specific area, a specific stop display mode (for example, just the specific number (7) The eyes are stopped. By configuring in this way, it is possible to grasp the type of the small hitting game and the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 by the variable display of the pseudo symbol executed during the small hitting game. Small hit games can be enjoyed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 15-23, the display screen displayed on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is demonstrated. In the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 and the fluctuation state and the holding state of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) The display control is executed to make the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol) corresponding to the main symbols displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 different. By configuring in this manner, in the gaming machine designed to be different in the symbol lottery (the first special symbol lottery, the second special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery) to be noted depending on the gaming state It is possible to easily inform the player whether or not the game result is an advantageous result for the player only by having the player grasp the display result of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. An easy-to-understand game machine can be provided.

  FIG. 15A is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the time when the gaming state is short and the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is started. is there. In the present embodiment, during the time saving state, the right-handed game is a game that is advantageous to the player, and therefore, a guide for guiding the game method in the guide display area Dm4 formed on the upper left side of the first display area Dm. The word "right-handed" is displayed as the display. In the central portion of the first display area Dm, a common figure main symbol Dmc having a third symbol corresponding to a normal symbol as a main symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the normal symbol. Further, on the left side of the first display area Dm, a main holding symbol display area Dm5 for forming the number of holding memories of the second special symbol as a main holding symbol is formed. In addition, in the state shown to Fig.15 (a), the number of pending storage of a 2nd special symbol is "0".

  In the second display area Dn1 formed on the upper right side of the first display area Dm, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol, and in the second display area Dn2, the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol However, in the third display area Dn3, the third symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is displayed as a subordinate symbol respectively, and in the second display area Dn1 and the second display area Dn3, it is indicated that the corresponding symbol is changing. For this purpose, the third symbol (the subordinate symbol) is variably displayed, and in the second display area Dn2, the third symbol (the subordinate symbol) for showing that the corresponding symbol is not varied is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, about the display mode of the subordinate symbol displayed on 2nd display area Dn1-Dn3, the display mode corresponding to whether the corresponding symbol (the 1st special symbol, the 2nd special symbol, the normal symbol) is changing. If it is In addition, as a display mode corresponding to a stopped symbol, it is sufficient to grasp that it is not fluctuating (stopped), as shown in the second display area Dn2 of FIG. The display mode may be a display mode in which the stop display mode is displayed, or the display mode in which the stop display mode of the previous variable display may be stopped and displayed.

  Then, in the second display area Dn4, the numeral "3" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved memories (number of balls held) of the first special symbol is three, and in the second display area Dn5 , The number "0" of the number is displayed as a display mode to indicate that the number of pending storages (number of pending balls) of the second special symbol is 0 (the state where the pending storage has not been acquired), and the second display In the area Dn6, the numeral "4" is displayed as a display mode for indicating that the number of reserved storages (the number of reserved balls) of the normal symbol is four.

  As a display mode for indicating the number of pending storages (number of pending balls) of each symbol displayed in the second display areas Dn4 to Dn6, the number of pending storages of each symbol is specifically shown as in the present embodiment You may use the display mode which shows a value with a number, or the display mode which shows only the presence or absence of pending storage of each symbol (for example, "○" when there is pending storage, "-" when there is no pending storage) You may use. In this case, the number of pending storages may be indicated by changing the color of the display mode of “o” indicating that there is a pending storage. Also, a display mode that suggests the number of pending storages in an abstract manner may be used.

  In the state shown in FIG. 15 (a), the first special symbol executes fluctuation for 150 seconds, and the second special symbol does not fluctuate, so the second display area Dn1 The slave symbol corresponding to the special symbol is variably displayed, and "-" indicating that the slave symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is not variably displayed is displayed in the second display area Dn2.

  Furthermore, in the sub display area Ds formed below the first display area Dm, “150 seconds” is displayed in the first sub display area Ds1 as a time display for indicating the remaining period of the time saving state. In the second sub-display area Ds2 on the left side of the display area Ds1, "countdown !!" is displayed as a guidance display for notifying the player that the remaining period of the time saving state is being subtracted. In this embodiment, as the remaining period displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 in the time saving state is calculated, and the calculated value is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to display an accurate period until the end of the time saving state on the third symbol display device 81, and it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind until the period passes. However, different values may be displayed as the remaining period display displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1, for example, a value with the upper limit of the remaining period of the fluctuation period (150 seconds) of the special figure 1 during the time saving state. May be set at random and displayed as the value is subtracted.

  In this case, until the displayed value becomes 0, the difference between the value indicating the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 and the value set at random is added and displayed, or the displayed value is "???" It is good to change to the display of. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp how long the time saving state lasts, and it is possible to play a game while always pounding.

  In FIG. 15 (b), the gaming state is short, and when 40 seconds have elapsed (from the state shown in FIG. 15 (a)) after the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is started It is the model which showed an example of the display screen of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 in a. As shown in FIG. 15 (b), the main drawing symbol Dmc is stopped and displayed in a mode (display mode of "555") informing that the player has won a win by lottery of normal symbols, and the first display area Dm is displayed. On the lower right side of the symbol, the electric winning object 640a is long-opened due to the winning of the normal symbol, and a guidance display for notifying that the ball can enter the ball is displayed at the second ball entry port 640.

  In addition, “110 seconds” is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds as the remaining period of the time saving state, and a second entrance ball 640 is caused to enter a ball in the second sub-display area Ds2. The “charge time” is displayed, which indicates that the state is the easy state (the state in which the motorized accessory 640 a is in the long opening operation). Then, in the second display area Ds3, a stop display mode ("○") for indicating that the normal symbol has been won by a hit is displayed.

  In this way, while the variation in the special figure 1 is being executed while the gaming state is in the short time state, the lottery result of the normal symbol (popular drawing) is the symbol that the player should watch most closely. The lottery result of the common drawing is displayed using the symbol Dmc. Therefore, the display can be made easy for the player to understand.

  In the present embodiment, the display positions and display modes of each main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol, special figure 2 main symbol, common figure main symbol, pseudo main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm are displayed. Because the stop display mode for showing the specific lottery result (for example, winning) which makes the same and the lottery result of the symbol advantageous to the player is also the same stop display mode (for example, all eyes), the main Even if the symbol to be the target of the symbol is changed according to the game state, it is configured to be able to cause the player to execute the effect display (effect change display) without discomfort, but other than that As a configuration of the main symbol, the display position and the display mode may be made different, or the stop display mode for showing a specific lottery result (for example, a hit) in which the lottery result of the symbol is advantageous to the player is different. You may

  FIG. 16A is a view showing a state after the game state is short and the ball enters the second ball entry port 640 while the first special symbol (special figure 1) is fluctuating. As shown in FIG. 16 (a), when the ball enters the second entrance 640, as a display indicating that the sphere has entered the second entrance 640 at the upper center of the first display area Dm. The word "charge complete" is displayed. Then, in the main holding symbol display area Dm5, a display mode (black circle in the drawing) indicating that the number of holding memories of the second special symbol has become "1" is displayed. In this state, in the second display area Dn5, the numeral "1" is displayed as a display mode indicating that the number of reserved storages of the second special symbol is one.

  In the present embodiment, one ball is inserted in the second ball entrance 640 as a closing condition of the motorized product 640a when the player hits the normal symbol during the short time and the motorized product 640a is in the long open state. 11 seconds (total opening time 6 seconds) has been set since the movement of the ball or motorized part 640a was started, and in this figure, one ball is inserted into the second ball entry port 640, Since the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a is finished and the next normal symbol fluctuation state is being executed, the common figure main symbol Dmc is variably displayed in the central portion of the first display area Dm. Further, "100 seconds" is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds as the remaining period of the time saving state.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, when one pending memory of the second special symbol is acquired, after the end of the time saving state (after the variation stop of the first special symbol during variation), the first (2) The variation display of the special symbol is started, and it is designed so that it is possible to obtain the symbol hit or the V prize hit with high probability. Furthermore, since the time saving state is always given after the end of the jackpot game executed based on the lottery of the second special symbol, there will be a chance to acquire the second special symbol of the pending storage again. In addition, when a plurality of pending memories of the second special symbol are acquired in one time saving state (during the variation of the first special symbol), the jackpot game for the acquired number is configured to be executed It is done. Therefore, providing a game that is easy for the player to understand by displaying the "pending storage of the second special symbol" that the player most expects during the time saving state as the main pending symbol on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

  In the present embodiment, as the display mode of the main suspension symbol, up to four "black circles" can be displayed corresponding to the number of suspension storage, but other configurations may be used, for example, In order to effectively notify the continuation or absence (the presence or absence of the retention storage of the second special symbol) of the consecutive residence mode, the display mode of the main retention symbol corresponding to the first retention storage of the second special symbol is another main suspension You may make it different from the display mode of a symbol. As the display mode in this case, the main hold symbol corresponding to the first hold memory of the second special symbol is emphasized more than other main hold symbols by making the main hold symbol different in size, color, shape or pattern Only the main holding symbol corresponding to the first special holding memory of the second special symbol may be displayed at a position different from that of the other main holding symbols. Further, instead of changing the display mode of the main hold symbol, the mode (display mode of the background image) on the display area side where the main hold symbol is displayed may be changed. Further, only when the first reserved storage of the second special symbol is acquired, the sound output means or the light emitting means may notify that effect.

  FIG. 16B is a diagram showing an example of the display screen when the gaming state is short and the variation period of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is remaining for 1 second. In this state, the main symbol is displayed in the center of the first display area Dm as a pseudo main symbol Dmb which is not corresponding to the display of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, or the normal symbol. This pseudo main symbol Dmb is temporarily stopped and displayed in a swinging state until the period in which the variation of the first special symbol is stopped (the remaining period display of the first sub display area Ds1 becomes "0 seconds") .

  This pseudo rendering symbol is a timing when the gaming state is short and the variation period is longer than the remaining period for a short time when the variation of the normal symbol is started (the timing when "state 3" is set as the rendering state) It is displayed. By configuring in this way, when the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol that the variation period exceeds the remaining short period is displayed as the main symbol Dmc, the common symbol Dmc is hit. Even when the stop display is performed in the display mode indicating the, it is possible to suppress the problem that the electric role object 640a becomes short-circuited open, giving the player a sense of distrust in the effect.

  In addition, the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol whose fluctuation period is longer than the remaining period is displayed as the common figure main symbol Dmc, and the display of the common figure main symbol Dmc is interrupted at the timing when the time saving state ends ( It is conceivable to switch to another main symbol display, but if the display of the main symbol used to cause the player to gaze at the display content is changed on the way, the player may feel a sense of discomfort. There's a problem. Such a problem can also be solved by using the configuration described above.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the display mode indicating the lottery result of the first special symbol is displayed as the display mode of the pseudo effect symbol. Therefore, according to the timing when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is stopped, the pseudo effect symbol is The lottery result of the first special symbol can be smoothly displayed only by setting the swinging state (temporary stop state) to the stop state completely stopped (see FIG. 17A). In addition, when the temporarily stopped main symbol (pseudo main symbol Dmb) temporarily stops in a display mode indicating a hit, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a hit, so the player is surely given a privilege. It is possible to suppress the problem of giving a sense of distrust to the player with respect to the display mode (display result) of the main symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  It should be noted that a configuration other than the configuration for displaying the pseudo effect symbol during the period in which the pseudo effect symbol described in this embodiment is displayed as the main symbol (during the period when "state 3" is set as the effect state) may be used. For example, during the period, without displaying any main symbol, an effect may be performed to avoid ending the time saving state. Even in the case of this configuration, it is possible to prevent the third symbol display device 81 from displaying the common figure main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol in which the fluctuation period longer than the remaining time short period is set. Since it is possible, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the player is given a sense of distrust.

  In the state shown in FIG. 16 (b), in the state where the pseudo main symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variation of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, so in the second display area Dn3, the lottery result of the normal symbol Is stopped and displayed in a display mode (“○ ×”) indicating removal. As described above, the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol is within a predetermined period (for example, within 2 seconds) from the fluctuation stop timing (the end timing of the short time state) of the special figure 1 and the lottery result of the normal symbol is out. Even in the case, the effect display using the pseudo main symbol Dmb is executed.

  In FIG. 16 (b), since the display mode which shows that the number of pending storages of the second special symbol is 2 is displayed in the main suspension symbol display area Dm5, the second special symbol is displayed after the end of the time saving state. Will begin to change. In order to inform the player of that effect, “Soon after the charge release time !!” is displayed above the first display area Dm. The "charge release time" indicates a period in which the jackpot corresponding to the number of the second special symbols stored pending is executed.

  Then, when the charge release time is entered, as shown in FIG. 17A, the information of the first display area Dm is displayed as "charge release time entry", and the special figure 1 main design Dma is stopped and displayed. The normal symbol that is fluctuating display at this timing (time saving end timing), that is, the variation in the time saving state is started, and the normal symbol whose stop timing of fluctuation is after time saving end is the second display area as a subordinate symbol Since it is displayed on Dn3, it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problems in the case where the variable display of the common figure main symbol Dmc is shown to the player.

  Next, when the charge release time is started, as shown in FIG. 17B, the special view 2 main symbol Dmd is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. In this case, since the variation of the second special symbol is started, the display mode indicating the number of pending storage (number of pending symbols) of the special view 2 displayed in the main pending symbol display area Dm5 is updated, and the remaining 1 pending A display mode indicating the number of memories is displayed. Also, in the second display area Dn, the slave symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is displayed in the second display area Dn1 as it is in the state of being stopped and displayed as the main symbol in FIG. 17A, and in the second display area Dn2. The special figure 2 fluctuation is displayed, and in the second display area Dn3, a common figure fluctuation is displayed by a subordinate symbol.

  In the present embodiment, it is designed such that it is easy to win either a big hit or a small hit (100% winning) when the variation of the special figure 2 is executed, and the period during which the special figure 2 is varied is , It is not necessary to make the player pay attention to the fluctuation of the map. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game by displaying the special figure 2 main symbol Dmd as the main symbol while the special figure 2 is being changed.

  In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is set to 2 seconds in both the normal state and the time saving state. The period of 2 seconds is shorter than the shortest period set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. Thereby, during the period in which the special figure 2 is fluctuating, it is suppressed that execution and stop of the common drawing fluctuation are performed without straddling a plurality of gaming states. Thereby, it is suppressing that an extra production | presentation generate | occur | produces during special figure 2 fluctuation | variation. In addition, by configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 fluctuates during the short time state, the fluctuation of the popular figure is executed and stopped during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the short time), It is possible to prevent the motorized part 640a from being opened and increase the reserve of the special figure 2 during the special figure 2 fluctuation period (during the short time), and provide the player with an excessive amount of balls. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, it is constituted so that the fluctuation period of the normal symbol and the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 can be selected from a plurality of, and only when the selected fluctuation period satisfies the predetermined condition ) May be configured to be openable. As a result, the player can be provided with unexpectedness, and the game can be actively played.

  Next, when the special figure 2 fluctuation shown in FIG. 17 (b) is small hit, and is stopped and displayed, the display screen shown in FIG. 18 (a) is displayed. That is, in the first display area Dm, the special view 2 main symbol Dmd is stopped and displayed in the display mode ("555") indicating a small hit, and the lower right area of the first display area Dm is opened during the small hit game. A guidance display for guiding the player the location of the second variable winning device 650 to be played is displayed. Then, “Aim for V” is displayed in the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds.

  When the ball passes through the specific area (V prize switch 650 e 3) in the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game shown in FIG. The jackpot effect screen shown in) is displayed. In this jackpot effect screen, the main symbol is not displayed in the main display area Dm, and the third symbol corresponding to each symbol (special 1, special 2, common figure) is as a secondary symbol in the second display area Dm. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot effect for the player without worrying about the variable display of each symbol (special 1, special 2, ordinary drawing) being executed.

  Furthermore, in the jackpot effect, “the first charge bonus” is displayed in the main display area Dm as the number-of-shots display showing the number of jackpots executed during the twin-seat mode, and below that, the jackpot currently being executed “ROUND1” is displayed as the number-of-rounds display indicating the number of rounds. As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of round numbers (2, 5, 7, 10, 15 rounds) are set in the jackpot game. Further, in the present embodiment, the jackpot is configured to be executable after the time saving state is completed by the number of the special figure 2 holding number reserved and stored during the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 seconds fluctuation) during the time saving state.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment configured as described above, the display regarding a plurality of jackpots executed in the continuous state is counted as one period during which the period from the start of the continuous state to the end is one period. It is configured to be able to display the Sho period cumulative display and the specific period cumulative display that only counts the jackpot games based on the jackpot right acquired in one special figure 1 change (that is, the special figure 2 holding number). In the example shown in FIG. 18A, the round number display area Dm6 formed on the lower right side of the first display area Dm corresponds to the round number for the jackpot game in the specific period described above. The number display mode is displayed.

  In this number-of-rounds display area Dm6, it is determined based on the reserve storage of the special figure 2 acquired by one special figure 1 change, it is determined how many rounds of jackpot games are executed cumulatively, and the determination result Is displayed. Specifically, based on the completion of the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 seconds fluctuation) during the time saving game, the prize information corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension (ie, stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223a described later) The prize information on the special figure 2 being extracted is extracted to determine the number of jackpots that can be executed and the number of rounds. Then, the display mode including at least the determination result is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6.

  The number-of-rounds display mode displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6 is a display mode of confirmed number of rounds (indicated by a solid circle in FIG. 18B) indicating the number of rounds determined to be executed. , A running round display mode (indicated by a black circle in FIG. 18 (b)) showing a currently running round and a jackpot right acquired within a specific period (special figure 1 fluctuation during time-short game (150 seconds fluctuation) In the specific period total round number indication display mode (indicated by a dotted circle in FIG. 18B) indicating the total number of rounds in the possible jackpot game period).

  By executing the jackpot effect configured in this manner, the player can select the special figure 2 holding ball number displayed in the main holding symbol display area Dm5 and the specified period total round displayed in the round number display area Dm6. It is possible to enjoy the jackpot game while predicting the type (the number of rounds) of the jackpot game to be executed in the future while looking at the number suggestion display mode.

  Furthermore, as described above, since the execution number of rounds display mode and the round display mode during execution are displayed in the round number display area Dm6, the round of the jackpot game currently being executed is within the specific period. Of the total number of rounds that may be executed (the number of rounds displayed as a specific period total round number indication display aspect) or the number of rounds that are determined to be executed (execution round number display aspect) The player can easily grasp which area it is. Therefore, it is possible to easily predict the number of remaining rounds to be executed within a specific period.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), "the charge bonus first time" is displayed as the display of the consecutive number of times showing the number of jackpots executed during the continuous movement mode. Display the number of jackpots that are executed based on the jackpot right acquired during the specific period mentioned above (the special figure 1 fluctuation (150 seconds fluctuation) during the short time game) Alternatively, both the display of the number of consecutive times and the display of the number of consecutive times within the specific period may be displayed. A means to calculate the number of times special figure 1 fluctuation (150 seconds fluctuation) is executed during short time game) is provided, and it is executed within the total number of jackpots in the consecutive mode, the number of specific period rushes, and one specific period. Display the number of jackpots played By configuring in this way, it is possible not only to enjoy the display mode during the jackpot game, but also to grasp the gaming situation of the pachinko machine 10 and to make reference to future gaming. After calculating the number of times described above, the average number of big wins within a specific period performed within one specific period may be displayed.

  If the number of big wins within a specific period is low by displaying the average number of big wins within this specific period, whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol is biased out, or through which is a condition under which the lottery of normal symbols is executed It can be used as a reference for future games while analyzing possible causes and whether the number of ball passes to the gate 67 is small.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode (one round, one display mode) corresponding to the number of rounds is displayed as the display mode displayed in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6. However, the number of rounds is displayed The display mode displayed in the area Dm6 is not limited to that, as long as the player can predict the number of rounds. For example, the size and color of the display mode may be varied according to a predetermined rule in correspondence with the number of rounds.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, "ROUND 1" is displayed as the number-of-rounds display indicating the number of rounds of jackpot currently being executed, but this number-of-rounds display also displays the number of rounds for one jackpot game Instead, the number of rounds may be added and displayed for the jackpot game executed within a specific period. This makes it possible to easily grasp and store the game result in the continuous mode. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, “5, 10, 20” indicating the number of times of being executed in a plurality of jackpot games executed within a specific period is displayed.

  When the second jackpot game is started by the time variation (special figure 2 fluctuation) executed after the jackpot game shown in FIG. 18 (b) is ended, the second jackpot game shown in FIG. 19 (a) The display screen is displayed. As shown in FIG. 19A, in the state where the second jackpot game is started, a display mode indicating that the remaining number of pending storages is “0” is displayed in the main suspension symbol display area Dm 5 In the main display area Dm, “charge bonus second time” is displayed as a number-of-times display for the number of consecutive units to indicate that the present large number is the second large number in the continuous mode. Then, in the number-of-rounds display area Dm6, a display mode of the number of confirmed execution rounds for 20 rounds in total is displayed. That is, in FIG. 18B, the number of rounds displayed as the specific period total round number suggested display mode is changed to the execution determined round number display mode by the execution of the present jackpot game (second time). ing. As described above, by changing the specific period total round number suggestion display mode to the execution determined round number display mode, the player can be made to perform the jackpot game with ease.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, in order to notify the number of rounds of the present jackpot game, among the number of rounds displayed as the specific period total round number suggestion display mode, the present jackpot Although it is configured to change the number corresponding to the number of game rounds to the execution determined number of rounds display mode, other configurations may be used. For example, at the timing when the big hit game is started, the number of execution determined rounds displayed If the display remains as an aspect, and a predetermined condition is established during the jackpot game (for example, execution of a predetermined operation on the frame button 22 during the jackpot game or the jackpot game reaches the third round), the specific period total The round number suggestion display mode may be changed to the execution determined round number display mode. Thereby, in order to grasp the number of execution finalized rounds even during the jackpot game, it is possible to have an interest in the effect.

  Further, although the present embodiment shows an example in which the specific period total round number suggesting display aspect is all variable to the execution determined round number display aspect, other configurations may be used, for example, the specific period total round number suggesting display aspect Only part of the game may be changed to the execution determined round number display mode, or the specific period total round number suggested display mode may be changed to the execution determined round number display mode at a plurality of timings during the jackpot game You may Thereby, it is possible to execute the jackpot game while always giving a sense of expectation.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 19 (b) to 20 (b), the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period of special figure 1) of the time saving state (special figure 1 fluctuation is being performed) is a predetermined condition The effect display (battle effect) executed when the remaining 10 seconds are satisfied will be described. In this effect display (battle effect), it is an effect for notifying the player that the continuous shooting mode is ended when there is no hold storage of the special view 2 at the end of the time saving state. As described above, this battle effect is executed when the remaining time period of the time saving state is within 10 seconds and the special figure 2 hold is “0”. Then, when the ball enters the second entrance 640 during the battle effect, and the holding memory of the special view 2 is generated, the battle victory effect for executing the continuous mode is executed. (See FIG. 20 (a)), if the ball does not enter the second entrance 640 during this battle effect, battle defeat effect is executed to indicate that the continuous mode will continue ( See FIG. 20 (b)). In addition, in this embodiment, when battle production is performed, it is comprised so that the production which loses to a battle finally may be set. This is because the period of battle effect is set in a period (10 seconds) in which the spread map fluctuation can be varied three or four times, and the probability of entering the ball into the second entrance ball port 640 during the battle effect is This is because it is lower than the probability that the ball will not enter the second ball entrance 640 during the battle effect. That is, the processing load can be reduced because it is sufficient to execute control to vary the effect contents only when an event with a low probability occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the special effects of the battle effect are made different depending on the presence / absence of the special figure 2 suspension, but other elements may be included. For example, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 changing during the hour is a big hit, the battle victory effect may be executed at the timing when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is stopped and displayed. As a result, it is possible to provide a surprising effect to the player who is predicting the outcome of the battle effect based only on the content (presence or absence of storage) of the main hold symbol display area Dm5.

  In this embodiment, the display mode of the main suspension symbol display area Dm5 is updated at the timing when the suspension storage of the special view 2 occurs, but as a configuration other than that, for example, during battle effect, the special view 2 Even if the pending storage occurs, the display mode of the main pending symbol display area Dm5 may not be updated, or the main pending symbol display area Dm5 may not be displayed when the battle effect is performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp that the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 while the battle effect is being executed, and to enhance the effect effect of the battle effect. Can.

  In addition, it is possible to determine the success or failure of the normal symbol based on the information of the normal symbol stored on hold, and change the contents of the battle effect (the opponent, the order of the attack, the type of attack, etc.) based on the determination result. You may want to configure As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the battle effect. Furthermore, a bonus effect may be provided which is executed only when a plurality of Tokusetsu 2 reservations are obtained during the battle effect.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 21A, the contents of the effect to be executed when the special figure 2 suspension is acquired to the upper limit during the special figure 1 short-time fluctuation will be described. As shown in FIG. 21A, when the special figure 2 hold is acquired to the upper limit, it is shown that the special figure 2 hold is stored to the upper limit (four) in the main hold symbol display area Dm 5 The main hold symbol is displayed in the display mode of (the display mode with four black circles in the figure). Then, in the central part of the first display area Dm, a message is displayed to congratulate that the special view 2 suspension has reached the upper limit. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (b), in the first display area Dm, a bonus effect (a lively effect using a character) that is not related to the lottery result of each symbol is executed.

  Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, the characters "??" concealing the remaining period of a short time are displayed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp which gaming state the period in which the above-described bonus effect is being executed is.

  Here, during the special figure 1 time variation, the lottery of the normal symbol is repeated repeatedly, and by winning the hit of the normal symbol, the electric role object 640a is opened and the ball is made to enter the second ball entry port 640 And, the game which acquires the retention memory of the 2nd special symbol is executed. While such a game is being executed, the player usually looks closely at the lottery result of the normal symbol, so the main symbol Dmc is displayed as the main symbol of the third symbol display device 81 ( When the special figure 2 hold as shown in FIG. 15 (b) and FIG. 21 (a) is stored up to the upper limit (four pieces), the special figure 2 hold can not be stored any more. The player no longer pays attention to whether or not the normal symbol is won. Therefore, in the state shown to Fig.21 (a), it is displayed on 2nd display area Dn3 as a 3rd symbol corresponding to a normal symbol as a subordinate symbol.

  Thereby, it is possible to suppress the display of the third symbol corresponding to the symbol that the player does not gaze as a main symbol. Moreover, the common figure main symbol Dmc is displayed in the state of FIG. 21 (a), and the malfunction at the time of carrying out stop display by the display mode which shows a hit can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 22, the contents of effects when the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed in the normal game state is won as a small hit will be described. FIG. 22 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen immediately after the small hit game is started, and FIG. 22 (b) is a specific timing (second variable winning device 650) in the small hit game. Is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen at the opening timing of

  Here, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, when the small hitting game based on the drawing result of the special view 1 is executed, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed in the first display area Dm. The pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed so as to suggest the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game, and the sub display area Ds is for explaining the game contents during the small hitting game If the symbols (simulated main symbol Dmb) are aligned, the character of "chance" is displayed (see FIG. 22 (a)).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), when the pseudo main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed in a predetermined stop display mode (“444” in FIG. 22 (b)), it is on the lower right side of the first display area Dm. A guidance display mode for guiding a game aiming at the second variable winning device 650 to the player is displayed, and the character "Aim for V" for explaining the game content is displayed in the sub display area Ds.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the small hitting game based on the special view 1 is executed in the normal state, the pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed variably based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is 1 Displayed in the display area Dm. Thus, the opening operation of the second variable winning device 650 which is executed a plurality of times during the small hitting game can be thought to be executed based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb.

  In addition, in a state where a small hit game based on the special view 1 is executed in the normal state, the main hold symbol for highlighting the number of the hold symbols is highlighted on the third symbol display device 81 so that the player is emphasized. Configured. Thereby, based on the variable display of the pseudo main symbol which is not related to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common figure), that the reservation symbol indication which shows the number of pending memory of each symbol mentioned above is not changed It can be made difficult for the player to notice. In addition, you may make it display on the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 the pseudo | simulation holding symbol display (pseudo holding main symbol) which is varied based on the fluctuation display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb as a structure other than this.

  Furthermore, during the small hitting game, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is also different from the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, and also performs variable display in which the stop display is shown in the stop display mode (e.g. Be done. Thereby, even when the interval of the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 is wide, it is possible to change display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb continuously. In addition, in the case of the pseudo main symbol Dmb to be stopped and displayed based on the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650, the opening timing of the corresponding second variable winning device 650 is opened for the player in an advantageous manner. It is configured to be different depending on whether it is the timing (the opening timing where the ball can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650 e 3)) or not, for example, the stopping of the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing advantageous to the player. As the display mode, for example, a display mode in which a specific same number is stopped is set, such as "777". As a result, since the opening timing of the second variable winning device 650 and the degree of advantage of the opening timing can be grasped by the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb executed during the small hitting game, it is possible for the player It is possible to make the presentation contents interesting.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23 (a), an error display displayed on the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 23A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when a right-handed game is performed in a normal state where the left-handed game is executed. As shown in FIG. 23 (a), when it is determined that the right hitting game has been performed in the normal state where the left hitting game is executed, the main symbol displayed in the first display area Dm is covered. Thus, the notification display area Dm7 is formed, and the characters "Please return to the left" are displayed. Thus, the player can correct the game content.

  In the present embodiment, the error display in FIG. 23 (a) detects that the right-handed game is executed (the ball passes through the through gate 67) during the normal state where the left-handed game is executed. In the state where the normal state in which the left-handed game is executed is set as the game state, the ball passes through the through gate 67 immediately after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. It is preferable not to execute an error display even if it detects that the error has occurred. Specifically, immediately before the shift from the time saving state to the normal state (immediately before the end of the time saving state), the fluctuation period of the normal symbol started and the electric motor executed when the fluctuation (lottery) result is a hit During the operation period of the accessory 640 a or a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the time saving state ends, it may be set as a grace period in which the error display is not performed.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of an error display even if the ball fired to the game area immediately before the time saving state ends passes through the through gate 67 after the time shortening state ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming intention of the player who has been actively playing the game immediately before the end of the time saving state.

  In the case where such a configuration is used, when a ball enters the second ball entry port 640 during the grace period described above, it is preferable to execute a benefit effect different from usual, for example, It is preferable to execute a resurrection effect indicating that a state advantageous to the player (continuous mode) has been revived. Thus, the player can play the game eagerly until the end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 23 (b), the display content displayed during the opening operation of the motorized service product 640a in the short time state will be described. FIG. 23 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen displayed during the motor-operated combination opening operation (during the long opening) in the short time state. In the present embodiment, by continuously performing the right-handed game during the time saving state, it is possible to immediately cause the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 if the electrically operated product 640a is in the long open state. The game board 13 is configured in In addition, the motorized accessory 640a that is long opened is opened for 3 seconds as a first open period, and then, after a closed period of 5 seconds, an open period (second open period) of 3 seconds is set again.

  The display screen shown in FIG. 23 (b) is displayed when the ball does not enter the second ball entry port 640 during the first opening period during the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a (during the long opening). It is That is, if the player normally plays a right-handed game, the first game is performed despite the use of the configuration of the gaming board 13 in which the ball can be made to enter the second ball entrance 640 reliably during the first opening period. Since it is conceivable that a normal right-handed game is not being executed as a case where the ball is not entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the opening period, a display for prompting a right-handed operation is displayed in the notification display area Dm7. Is displayed.

  In this embodiment, even if the right-handed game is started after seeing the content displayed in the notification display area Dm7, each period so that the ball can enter the second entrance 640 during the second opening period. Is set. Specifically, it is designed such that the time it takes for the ball to reach the second entrance 640 (motorized object 640a) is about 2 seconds after firing the ball in a right-handed game, The closing period provided between the first opening period (3 seconds) and the second opening period (3 seconds) is set to be 5 seconds. Therefore, it becomes possible to make a ball enter the second ball entrance 640 by performing a right-handed game for 3 seconds after the closing period is started.

  In the present embodiment, the first opening period and the second opening period have the same number of seconds, and means for measuring the elapsed period of the first opening period and means for measuring the elapsed period of the second opening period. Although the sharing is attempted, for example, the second opening period may be set longer than the first opening period. Thereby, based on the display for prompting a right hit being displayed in the notification display area Dm7, when the right hit game is performed, the ball can be made to enter the second entrance 640 more surely. it can.

  In the present embodiment, 5 seconds is set as the closing period, but a longer closing time (for example, 30 seconds) may be set. In this case, if the rightward game is normally executed as a condition for ending the opening operation of the motorized role object 640a, the number of balls that can be entered into the second ball entrance 640 during the first opening period ( For example, one) ball entry may be used as the termination condition. As a result, even if the closing period (the closing period performed after the first opening period) is lengthened during the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a, it is possible to the player who performs the right-handed game normally. In this case, the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a can be ended before the closing period is performed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in First Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display result of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  Selection of jackpot random number counter C1 to be used for lottery of jackpot (and jackpot) and selection of jackpot type (jackpot symbol) for setting of display of jackpot lottery and first symbol display device 37 and third symbol display device 81 Used to select the variation pattern, the first hit type counter C2 used for the first, the stop type counter C3 used for the selection of the stop type, the small hit type counter C5 used for the selection of the small hit type (small hit pattern), The variation type counter CS1 and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used to set the initial value of the first random number counter C1 are used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the normal symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at an interval of 2 milliseconds which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 53) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The details will be described later, but in the RAM 203, the first ball entrance 64 (left first ball entrance 64a, right first ball entrance 64b (hereinafter referred to as the first ball entrance 64 when both are shown) Special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a where each counter value is stored for winning for) and special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b where each counter value is stored for winning for the second entrance 640 There is. In the present embodiment, the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640 are each provided with a maximum of four holding balls, and a maximum of eight holding balls can be stored. Therefore, each counter value is a special symbol when the ball wins the first entrance 64 during a period when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable display or the special symbol is not being played in the big hit game of the special symbol. When the ball is stored in the first holding ball storage area 203a and the ball is won in the second entrance port 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Thereafter, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variably displayed (dynamic display) Settings and control processing are performed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is variably displayed. Various settings and control processes are performed.

  In this embodiment, although the upper limit of the number of pending items (number of pending storages) is set to four for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the upper limit number of pending numbers corresponding to each symbol is this However, different values may be set, or only one special symbol may be held.

  On the other hand, during a period when lottery of special symbols such as during the first special symbol or the second special symbol fluctuating display or the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the jackpot game is impossible, the ball can enter the first entrance 64 or When the second ball entry 640 has been won, acquisition of each counter value is performed if the number of pending items for the hit ball entry (starting opening) is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment). Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning entry. In addition, when the number of holdings for the winning entry is higher than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value etc. is not obtained, but the winning balls (5 in the present embodiment) are obtained. Only the winning balls are treated as invalid balls to be paid out to the player.

  In the present embodiment, although the upper limit value of the number of holding balls is four for each of the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is less than four (for example, 3) or more than 4 (e.g. 8). Further, the upper limit value may not be provided.

  Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and is 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking values of 0 to 299) It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

  The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 53).

  The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), the timing when the ball wins the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Are stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. And the value of the random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol is specified in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table If it matches the value of the jackpot random number specified in 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first random number table 202a is a table in which random number values (determination values) determined to be winning in each gaming state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, the first random number table 202a is provided with a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for lottery of the second special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that the jackpot has occurred. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined to be a small hit.

  On the other hand, in the second special symbol lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that a big hit is made. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 299”, and if “1 to 299”, it is determined that the small hit is made.

  Here, if the value of the first random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a random number that is the big hit of the special symbol For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the big hit of the special symbol. In this case, a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot is a display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

  The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 that is the big hit of the special symbol, and the random value "0" is stored in the first random number table 202a as described above. As described above, since the total number of random number values to be a big hit is 1 among the total number of random number values to be 300, the probability to be a big hit of a special symbol is “1/300”. In addition, since the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the first special symbol is three, and the value of the first random number counter C1 which is a small hit in the second special symbol is 299, the first The probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "1/100", and the probability of being a small hit of the second special symbol is "299/300".

  Further, the value of the first collision type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the jackpot type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 27A). The Rukoto. Specifically, this will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop type at the time of disengaging displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after reach is generated, it differs from the symbol to which reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "reach out" (for example, a range of 90 to 99) at which the symbol stops and "complete out" (for example, a range of 0 to 89) in which no reach occurs. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment), and when the ball enters the first entrance 64, the value thereof is stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

  In addition, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol from the value (random number value) of the stop type selection counter C3 is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into one for the normal state and one for the short time state, and the range of random numbers set for each stop type of deviation is changed according to the table. This is to change the selection ratio of the stop type depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state or a short time state of the special symbol.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The fluctuation type counter CS1 determines one fluctuation pattern from the set fluctuation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 53) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. It is provided inside.

  A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 29 and 30). A plurality of fluctuation pattern tables corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set in the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation patterns corresponding to the gaming state and the result of the judgment on each of the winning patterns, respectively. Table is set. Details of each variation pattern table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30.

  The second random number counter C4 is configured, for example, as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). When the second random number counter C4 makes one revolution, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the second embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is, for example, periodically updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the ball passes either the left or right normal starting port (through gate) 67 When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the common drawing execution area of the RAM 203.

  And the value of the random number which becomes a hit of the normal symbol is specified in the second hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 26 (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4. When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes the second specified in the second random number table 202c, it is determined that the normal symbol (the second symbol) is hit. For example, in the second random number table 202c, there are 12 random number values that normally hit a symbol, and the range is “0 to 11”. Since the total number of random numbers to be hit is 12 while the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240, the probability that the symbol will normally hit is “12/240 (1/20) It becomes ".

  Further, in the present embodiment, the game state is configured to be able to set the normal state and the time saving state, and the second time when the normal symbol changes or the normal symbol is hit according to the game state. The opening time of the motorized role piece 640a attached to the ball entry port 640 is made different, so that the ball can enter the second ball entry port 640 more easily in the short time state than in the normal state. Thereby, in the case where the gaming state is the normal state, a game (left-handed game) for aiming the first ball entrance 64 (the first left ball entrance 64a) is performed, and in the case where the gaming state is the time saving state , A game (right-handed game) for aiming the second ball entry port 640 can be performed.

  In the normal state, when the ball passes through gate (normal ball entry port) 67, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired and the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 4 seconds in the second symbol display device 83 Ru. Then, if the value of the second hit random number counter C4 acquired is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “o” is lighted and displayed as “)”, and the motorized accessory 640 a is opened (short open) for “0.1 seconds × 2 times”. On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate (ordinary ball entry port) 67 in the short time state, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds in the second symbol display device 83, and the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired If it is in the range of “0 to 11”, it is determined to be won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) The motorized role piece 640a is opened (long open) for "3 seconds x 2 times". In the present embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric character combination may be changed as appropriate within a range that does not impair the game characteristics.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing when the lottery of the normal symbol is executed) and the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 It is configured such that the motorized combination 640a is opened long only when the time when the operation of the combination (the operation of the motorized combination 640a is set) ends in a short time. If, for example, the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the normal symbol lottery is executed) is in a short time state, the timing at which the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 ends. Even if (the timing when the operation of the motorized accessory 640a is set) is in the normal state, even if the motorized accessory 640a is opened long, Even if the timing at which the value of the first random number counter C4 is acquired (the timing at which the lottery of the normal symbol is executed) is in the normal state, the timing at which the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished If the timing at which the operation of the accessory 640a is set is a short time state, the motorized accessory 640a may be open long.

  The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37). And repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see 53).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored in addition to the various counters shown in FIG. And a work area (work area) in which the value of.

  The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 53), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 52) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, the contents of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 25A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the present embodiment. The ROM 202 is provided with at least a first random number table 202a, a first collision type selection table 202b, a second random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, and a small hit type selection table 202e.

  Next, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 (a) to 26 (c). As shown in FIG. 26 (a), the first hit random number table 202a includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 used for lottery of the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 used for lottery of the second special symbol. And are prescribed.

  Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 is, as shown in FIG. 26 (b), for entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b). It is the table in which the random number value (decision value) judged to be a hit is set in the lottery based on the first special symbol. In the lottery of the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that a big hit is made. Further, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 3”, and if it is “1 to 3”, it is determined to be a small hit. In addition, when it is determined that the value is "4 to 299", it is determined that the value is out.

  On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. 26 (c), is a random value (decision value) that is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol lottery based on entering the second entrance 640. ) Is a set table. In the lottery of the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that a big hit is made. In addition, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is “1 to 299”, and if “1 to 299”, it is determined that the value is small.

  The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 26 (d)) is a data table in which hit determination values of ordinary symbols are stored. As shown in FIG. 26 (d), regardless of the state of the gaming machine, if the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the second random number counter buffer is in the range of 0 to 11, and if the symbol hit normally It is judged.

  In addition, when it is determined that a normal symbol is hit, the symbol of “o” is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol) after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, and the electric symbol is displayed. 640a is released for a predetermined time.

  Here, as described above with reference to FIG. 2 and the like, the motorized role product 640a in the present embodiment operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (not shown) (one of the other solenoids 209z). The motorized accessory 640 a functions to guide the ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 by moving forward (opening operation). On the other hand, by retracting backward (closing operation), the ball is not guided to the second ball entrance 640 (no ball entering).

  Although the details will be described later, the motorized accessory 640a in the present embodiment is opened again for 3 seconds after the opening period (first opening period) of 3 seconds passes after the opening period of 3 seconds in the short time state. An opening operation (long opening) in which a period (second opening period) is set is executed, and after a lapse of a 0.1 second opening period (first opening period) when the time saving state is not in progress (during the normal state) After a closing period of 0.1 seconds, an opening operation (short opening) in which an opening period (second opening period) of 0.1 second is set is executed again. As a result, it is possible to suppress a game in which the ball is intended to enter the second ball entry port 640 despite the fact that it is not in the time saving state (in the normal state).

  Moreover, when one ball enters the second ball entry port 640, the motorized part 640a in the present embodiment is designed so that the end condition of the opening operation is satisfied and the opening operation is ended. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the plurality of balls from entering the second ball entry port 640 by the opening operation of the one-time motorized role product 640a. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4, the configuration is such that the balls flowing down the flow passage capable of entering the second ball inlet 640 are restricted. Since it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 at the same time, the plurality of balls enter the second entrance 640 by the opening operation of one electric role part 640 a. It is possible to suppress the ball more.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 27A, the details of the first hit type selection table 202b will be described. FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) are schematic views schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b.

  The first hit type selection table 202b is won when the jackpot of the first special symbol is won, or is won for the small hit of the first special symbol, and the ball is in the specific area (V prize switch 650e3 (Fig. If you win the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 for selecting the jackpot type in the case of passing 5)) and the jackpot of the second special symbol, or wins the small jack of the second special symbol, and that 27 has a special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2 for selecting the jackpot type when the ball passes the specific area (V winning switch 650e3 (see FIG. 5) during the small hit game (FIG. 27 (FIG. a) see).

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), when the first special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79” and a big hit A (7R hour short holding big hit) is selected, “580 In the case of “about 99”, the jackpot D (16R time short non-hit) is selected. In addition, when the first special symbol small hit, jackpot type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, in the case where the small hitting type is the small hitting A, the big hitting C (7R time short held big hitting) is selected, and in the case of the small hitting B, the big hit D (2R time short non hit) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 27 (c), when the second special symbol is a big hit, regardless of the value of the first hit type counter C2 (when the value is "0 to 99") a big hit E (15R hour short big hit Is selected. In addition, when the second special symbol small hit, jackpot type is selected corresponding to the small hit type described later. Specifically, if the small hitting type is small hitting C, big hit F (5R time short held big hitting) is selected, if small hitting D, big hit G (10R time short presented jackpot) is selected, and if small hit E The jackpot E (15R time short possession jackpot) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, in each of the jackpot types described above, when “time saving possessed jackpot” is selected, a time saving state of “time saving once” is provided after the end of the jackpot game. However, the number of time reductions granted after the end of the jackpot game is not limited to this, and may be set two or more times, and different numbers of time reduction states are selected based on the selected jackpot type You may do so. In addition, different times may be selected based on the gaming state set at the time when the selected jackpot type and jackpot are won (when the ball passes the specific area), or “time A different number of time saving states may be selected based on the jackpot type selected at the time of jackpot winning based on the number of times the winning jackpot is continuously selected. By configuring in this way, in addition to the contents of the jackpot game (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, etc.), it is possible to make the benefit contents (number of time reduction status) granted after the jackpot game end different. It is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm while expecting what kind of benefit (time saving state) will be given after the end of the jackpot game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the variation of the special symbol is executed by the preset number of time-shortening times to set the time-shortening ending condition when the time-shortening state ends, but the time-shortening ending condition different from the present embodiment For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol may be measured, and different end conditions may be set for the fluctuation of each special symbol. Specifically, as the time-saving completion condition, the time-saving completion condition is that the number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol is 4 times or the number of times of fluctuation of the second special symbol is 1 or the first special symbol and the first special symbol (2) The total number of changes with the special symbol may be four times, or the number of changes in the second special symbol may be one, which may be set as the time saving end condition.

  Other than that, each time the variation of the special symbol is executed, the lottery whether or not to end the time saving state may be executed, and the time saving state may be ended based on the result of the lottery, and the special symbol is predetermined. The time saving state may be ended when stop display is performed with the symbol of. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the timing at which the time saving state ends in a complicated manner, and to make the player in the time saving game play while expecting the time saving state to continue for a long time. Can. In this case, at least a part of the period in which time saving does not end may be notified to the player. As a result, it is possible to make the player grasp a part of the period in which time saving is not completed, and it is possible to make the player play the game with peace of mind during that period.

  Next, the contents of the small hitting type selection table 202e will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 28A to 28C are schematic diagrams schematically showing the contents of the small hitting type selection table 202e.

  The small hit type selection table 202e is a special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 for selecting a small hit type when the small hit of the first special symbol is selected, and a small hit of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol 2 small hitting selection table 202e2 for selecting a small hitting type (see FIG. 28 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 28 (b), at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is “0 to 10”, and the small hit A (V passable) is selected. In the case of "11 to 99", small hit B (V can not pass) is selected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28 (c), when the small hit of the second special symbol is elected, the value of the small hit type counter C5 is selected, and the small hit C (V passable) is selected if "0-9". In the case of "10 to 24", the small hit D (V passable) is selected, and in the case of "25 to 99", the small hit E (V passable) is selected.

  In the present embodiment, the operations of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow passage solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 are set according to the small hitting type. Specifically, in the small hitting game with the small hitting A and C to E, the passage solenoid 209c of the second variable winning device 650 is operating, and the ball can enter the special discharge passage 650e2 There is. On the other hand, in the small hitting game by the small hitting B, the flow path solenoid 209 c of the second variable winning device 650 is not operating. A ball can not enter the special discharge flow path 650 e 2. That is, small hits A and C to E then pass the ball to a specific area (V prize switch 650e3), a small hit that can be awarded a big hit game, and a small hit B is a small hit that is not awarded a big hit. .

  Further, in the small hitting game by the small hitting A and B (small hitting type selected by the small hitting winning of the first special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the open / close door 650f is opened for a short period (FIG. In the small hit game by small hits C to E (small hit type selected by the small hit win of the second special symbol), the V inlet solenoid 209a operates so that the open / close door 650f is opened for a long period (see figure) 11). That is, small hits A and B are small hits where it is difficult for the ball to enter the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game, and small hits C to E are the second variable winning device 650 during the small hitting game. It is a small hit that the ball is easy to enter.

  In the present control example, the type of jackpot to be awarded thereafter is determined according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot awarded after the jackpot A becomes the jackpot C (7R hour short holding jackpot) and the jackpot B of The jackpot given later will be the jackpot D (2R hourly short jackpot), the jackpot given after the small jack C will be the jackpot F (5R hourly short holding jackpot) and the jackpot given after the small jack D will be the jackpot G (10R When the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot given after the jackpot E is configured to be a jackpot E (15R hour jackpot jackpot).

  In this control example, the type of jackpot to be awarded is determined according to the type of small jack, but as the other specifications, it is the case that the lottery result of the second special symbol is small jack and Also, determine the type of jackpot by the jackpot selection table (acquire the jackpot right only), and then execute the jackpot which acquired the right just before the ball passes the V winning switch 650e3 in the small jackpot game thereafter May be By doing this, it is possible for the player to select a small hit passing the V prize switch 650 e 3, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, even if it is configured to execute a predetermined lottery based on the ball passing through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3) during the small hitting game, and determine the jackpot type based on the lottery result. Good. As a result, since the contents of the jackpot game to be executed can be made different depending on the timing when the ball passes through the specific area, the player is willing to play the small hit game, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  Next, the contents of the fluctuation pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. The fluctuation pattern table 202d is a data table used to determine the display pattern (the fluctuation time) of the fluctuation pattern, and the display pattern is defined for each value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. In the variation pattern table 202d, a plurality of different tables corresponding to types of special symbols, lottery results, and game states are defined.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (a), the special pattern 1 variation pattern table 202d1 for big hit, the (special) variation pattern table 202d2 for special figure 1 off, and the variation pattern table 202d3 for small figure 1 specially In addition, at least the special figure 1 shift pattern table 202d4 for short time and the variation pattern table 202d5 for special figure 2 are defined.

  First, referring to FIG. 29 (b), the special pattern 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202d will be described. Among the variation patterns (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) in the normal state, the variation pattern table 202d1 for the special figure 1 jackpot selects the variation pattern (variation time) when winning a big hit. A random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the type of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is defined.

  Specifically, when the jackpot is determined as the stop type, the fluctuation pattern of normal reach (30 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 50” as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and “51 to 179” A variation pattern of super reach (60 seconds) is associated with the range, and variation patterns of various special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of “180 to 198”.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 29 (c), the contents of the special pattern 1 deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 will be described. In the special pattern 1 off (ordinary) fluctuation pattern table 202 d 2, when the lottery result of the special drawing 1 is out of the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special drawing 1) in the normal state A random number value (counter value of the fluctuation type counter value CS1) for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) in is defined.

  Specifically, when complete removal is determined as the stop type, a variation pattern of short removal (7 seconds) is associated with the range of “0 to 98” as the value of the variation type counter CS1, “99 to The long-range (10 seconds) fluctuation pattern is associated with the range of 198 ". Further, when the first special symbol lottery is out and out of reach is determined as the stop type, various types of normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of “0 to 149” as the value of the change type counter CS1. The range of "150 to 197" is associated with various types of super reach (60 seconds), and the range of "198" is associated with various types of special reach (90 seconds).

  Next, the contents of the special figure 1 small hitting variation pattern table 202d3 will be described with reference to FIG. 29 (d). The special figure 1 small hitting variation pattern table 202d3 is a first special symbol (in the normal state) Of the variation patterns (variation time) of the special figure 1), a random number value (variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) when the lottery result of the special figure 1 becomes small hit. Is specified.

  Specifically, when the small hit is determined as the stop type, regardless of the small hit type (small hit A, small hit B) and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, various types of super reach (60 seconds) It is associated.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, various fluctuation patterns are selected corresponding to each stop type based on the lottery result of the first special symbol, and in particular, the fluctuation time is set. Is set to be easy to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol is a big hit. Therefore, if the player is displayed fluctuating continuously for a long period of time, is the jackpot won? And expect to play the game. Therefore, the game result can be predicted by the period length of the set fluctuation pattern, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 30A, the contents of the special figure 1 shift pattern table 202d4 for hour reduction will be described. This special figure 1 time saving variation pattern table 202d 42 has a random value (counter value of variation type counter value CS1) for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) during the time saving state. It is prescribed.

  Specifically, regardless of the determined stop type and the value of the change type counter CS1, a change pattern of 150 seconds is associated.

  FIG. 30B is a diagram showing the contents of the special pattern 2 variation pattern table 202d5. The special pattern 2 variation pattern table 202d5 defines random number values for determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) in the normal state and the short time state.

  Specifically, if the determined stop type is a big hit, regardless of the value of the change type counter CS1, a short / long hit (7 seconds) is set, and if the determined stop type is a small hit, the change type A short hit (2 seconds) is associated regardless of the value of the counter CS1.

  Next, the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, time savings medium time counter 203g, big hit start flag 203h, big hit middle flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit middle flag 203k, V passing big hit type storage area 203m , V, a storage release flag 203p, a release counter 203qa, a time saving flag 203q, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas is a first random number counter The values of C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter C5 are respectively stored.

  More specifically, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and C5 are acquired at the timing when the ball enters the first entrance 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is four pending Among the vacant areas of the area (pending first area to pending fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main controller 110, when a lottery of special symbols is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is to the execution area Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determinations such as lottery of special symbols are performed.

  Note that when data is shifted from the hold first area to the execution area, the hold first area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  Similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas. In the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the respective counter values acquired based on the start winning for the second ball entry port 640 are stored. About the storing method etc. of a counter value, since it is the same as that of special symbol 1 reservation ball storing area 203a, it omits about the detailed explanation.

  The regular symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Area). In each of these areas, a second random number counter C4 is stored.

  More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through gate 67, the value of counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data indicates that the four reserved areas (the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area) are vacant. Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area number (first to fourth) are stored in order. That is, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to a winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so it is the same as the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 suspension ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed to pack winning data stored in another reserve area into a reserve area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the ball enters the first entrance 64 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. One is added (see S704 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 38).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 38). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. As a result, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 causes the main control device 110 to be affected by noise or the like. Even if it is deviated from the number of holding balls of the actual fluctuation indication held, it is possible to correct the deviation by the next holding ball number command received.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is set to zero, and the ball enters the second entrance 640 and reaches a maximum value of 4 each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. 1 is added (see S710 in FIG. 43). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 suspension ball number counter 203e is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 38). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command similar to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is the maximum number of holding balls (number of waits) of the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball in the through gate 67 It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. See S1104 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S905 in FIG. 45).

  When the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1105 in FIG. 47). On the other hand, when the ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S1103 in FIG. 47: No) ).

  The time saving counter 203 g is a counter for counting the remaining short time (the number of times the special symbol changes) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. At this time, the counter 203g for the short time is set to 1 at the end of the jackpot game of which the jackpot type is other than "big hit B, D" (that is, "big hit A, C, E to G") (see S1815 in FIG. 54). . That is, in the present embodiment, when the time saving state is provided after the big hit game, one time saving state is provided.

  The jackpot start flag 203 h is a flag used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot start timing. The jackpot start flag 203h is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) (see S219 in FIG. 38), and the jackpot start timing in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) Is referred to (see S1801 in FIG. 54), and is set to OFF when it is determined in the jackpot control processing that it is the jackpot start timing (see S1802 in FIG. 54). Thereby, processing according to the jackpot start timing can be executed. Although illustration is abbreviate | omitted also in each control example mentioned above, the big hit start timing is similarly discriminate | determined.

  The jackpot flag 203 i is a flag used to determine whether or not a jackpot is in progress, that is, whether or not a jackpot game is being executed. The jackpot flag 203i is set to ON when the lottery result is a jackpot in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), as in the jackpot start flag 203h described above (see S219 in FIG. 38). Then, in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54), reference is made to determine whether or not the jackpot is in progress (see S1805 in FIG. 54), and it is determined in the jackpot control process that it is the timing of the jackpot end. In this case, it is set to off (see S1813 in FIG. 54).

  The small hit start flag 203 j is a flag used to determine whether it is a small hit start timing. The small hitting start flag 203j is set to ON in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42) executed when it is determined that the lottery result is a small hit in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38). (See S610 in FIG. 42). Then, it is referred to determine whether or not it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) (see S1901 in FIG. 55), and it is the start timing of the small hit in the small hit control process. Is determined to be off (see S1902 in FIG. 55).

  The small hit middle flag 203k is a flag used to determine whether a small hit is in progress, that is, whether a small hit game is being executed. The small hit middle flag 203k is set to ON in the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S610 in FIG. 42), similarly to the small hit start flag 203j described above. Then, it is referred to determine whether or not the small hit is in the small hit control process (see FIG. 55) (S1906 in FIG. 55), and it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit in the small hit control process. If it has been set, it is set to off (S1911 in FIG. 55).

  The V-pass jackpot type storage area 203 m is an area for storing a jackpot type corresponding to the small jackpot type of the small jackpot selected when the small jackpot is won, and the ball is a specific area during the small jackpot gaming state The type of jackpot that is executed based on passing through is stored. In the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203m, a jackpot type corresponding to the won small jackpot type is set in the small hitting start setting process (see FIG. 42) (see S608 in FIG. 42), and the V passing process (see FIG. 50). 50), the set jackpot type is read (see S1401 in FIG. 50), and the corresponding V flag is set to ON (see S1401 in FIG. 50).

  The V flag 203 n is a flag for storing that the ball has passed through the V prize switch 650 e 3 of the second variable prize device 650, and sets the jackpot type based on the value of the V flag 203 n at the end of the small hitting game. It is a thing. The V flag 203 n is set based on the value of the V passing jackpot type in the V passing process (see FIG. 50) (S 1402 in FIG. 50), and is referred to in the small hitting end process (S 2003 and S 2004 in FIG. 56) Thereafter, it is set to off (S2006 in FIG. 56).

  The storage cancellation flag 203p is a flag used to indicate a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 provided in the pachinko machine 10 is released (opened), and when it is set to ON, storage of the storage device 750 is performed. When the state is released and set to OFF, the storage device 750 is in the storage state. The storage cancellation flag 203p is set to ON (S1804 in FIG. 54) when it is determined that it is the start timing of the jackpot in the large hitting control process (see FIG. 54) (S1804 in FIG. 54), It is referred to in the control process (see FIG. 58) (see S2202 in FIG. 58), and is set to off (FIG. 58) when the value of the release counter 203Pa reaches the upper limit (25000) (see S2205 in FIG. 58). S2208). That is, in the present embodiment, the storage device 750 is in the released state (the storage valve 750a is opened) at the timing when the big hit game is started, and is in the storage state when the predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed (the storage valve 750a is configured to operate closed). As a result, it is possible to increase the bonus given to the player when the jackpot is won.

  A configuration other than the present embodiment may be used as a configuration for changing the state (storage state, release state) of the storage device 750, for example, a big hit for transferring the storage device 750 to the release state, and the storage device 750. A jackpot that does not shift to the release state may be settable according to the selected jackpot type, or a plurality of winning openings (for example, the first specified winning opening 65, the second specified winning opening 650) may be predetermined. When the jackpot game to be opened in the order is executed, the storage device 750 may be shifted to the release state at the timing when the specific winning opening is opened.

  Further, also in the configuration in which the storage device 750 is shifted from the release state to the storage state (end condition of the release state), in the present embodiment, the release state is terminated when 10 seconds have elapsed after the transition to the release state. Even though the sphere is not stored in the storage device 750, the sphere can pass through the storage device 750, but the period in which the storage device is in the released state is shortened (for example, 0.5 seconds). Only the stored balls may be allowed to pass through the storage device 750. Thus, it is possible to cause the player to play a game eagerly to store the ball in the storage device 750 until the release condition (large hit) of the storage device 750 is satisfied.

  The release counter 203pa is a counter for measuring a period during which the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 is released (opened). The release counter 203pa is set to “1” (see FIG. 58) when it is determined in the storage device control process (see FIG. 58) that the storage release flag 203p is set to ON (see S2202 in FIG. 58). Thereafter, every time the storage device control process is executed, the value is incremented by 1 (see S2206 in FIG. 58). Then, it is determined whether the value of the counter has reached "25000" (see 2205 in FIG. 58), and based on the determination result, the variable operation of the storage valve 750a is controlled, and the storage valve 750a is controlled to be closed. Then, the value of the release counter 203Pa is set to "0" (see S2209 in FIG. 58).

  The time stamp hit flag 203 q is a flag for indicating in which gaming state a lottery (normal drawing lottery) of a normal symbol whose lottery result is a hit is executed, and when the lottery is executed during the time saving state, Set to on. At this time, the short hit flag 203 q is referred to when setting the open pattern of the motorized accessory 640 a to be executed based on the hit of the drawing lottery.

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing and storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, and the first specified winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid or the like for driving a motorized part is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals thereto via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected with various switches 208 including switches and sensors (not shown), and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 7, 122) circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115 described later. Various processing is executed based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch (FIG. 7, 122) circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 51) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The emission control device 112 controls the ball emission unit 112 a so that the ball launch strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main controller 110 instructs the ball emission. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation stop handle 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is off (condition that it is not operated), the operation handle The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in the sound output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, and outputs and changes lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device 227 (decorative lamp 227a, transparent lamp 227b, other lamp 227c, etc.) The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display effect (variation display) is controlled. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

  The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22 and changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, or at the time of super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly indicates the contents of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, out of range, etc.) ) Is used to determine the detailed contents of the change. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from the main control device 110, one fluctuation mode among the plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting the effect state for setting the display mode of effect images (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Among the six presentation states, one of the presentation states is selected based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of the various flags, and the lottery results of the special symbols and the ordinary symbols.

  Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 32A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), the effect state selection table 222b is in the state of establishment of the continuous state flag 223i, the common drawing effective flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special change flag 223s (whether set to on or off It is comprised so that either of presentation state "1"-"6" may be selected according to.

  Specifically, in the state in which the consecutive-in-room flag 223i is set to off, if the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state "2" is selected. Further, in the state where the consecutive villain flag 223i is set to ON and the common drawing effective flag 223q is set to OFF, if the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to OFF, the rendering state "3" is It is selected. On the other hand, when special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to on, production state “4” is selected. Then, in the case where the consecutive loin flag 223i is set to on and the common drawing effective flag 223q is set to on, the effect state "5" is selected. In the state where this effect state “5” is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (general drawing) are at a predetermined interval (special figure If the fluctuation stop timing of the general drawing is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1, and the respective fluctuation stop timings are within 2 seconds, the rendering state "6" is selected.

  Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic view showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222 b and the third symbol and the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the object by which the display mode is changed according to the effect state to be set is not only the third symbol and the holding symbol described above, but also the effect state in which various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are also set. Although it is changed to an effect image corresponding to, the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 by the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9) And the symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the normal symbol) corresponding to the main holding symbol (see FIG. 9) displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 Is defined in As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having complex game characteristics, the main symbol and the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol) corresponding to the main holding symbol are differentiated depending on the effect state. It is possible to inform the result of the main game in an easy-to-understand manner only by making the player grasp the symbol and the main hold symbol.

  Specifically, when the rendering state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the main symbol, and the reservation for showing the number of reserved memory of special figure 1 is suspended. The symbol becomes the main holding symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state "1" is selected during the normal state in which the game state is left hit.

  Next, when the presentation state "2" is selected, the pseudo symbol for presentation not corresponding to any symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, popular figure) becomes the main symbol (false main symbol Dmb) The main holding symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that no holding symbol is displayed (see FIG. 22 (b)). The effect state "2" is selected when the gaming state is normal and the small hitting game of the special view 1 is executed.

  The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state "2" is selected is the variable display (see FIG. 22 (a)) of the symbol and the stop display (FIG. 22) like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and in the small hitting game of the special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined based on the timing when the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The display is controlled to be stopped and displayed in a mode (see FIG. 22 (b)) in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. While being able to inform the opening timing of the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 650a in the hitting game, as it is the result of fluctuation (lottery) of false main design Dmb, the privilege which 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 650a opens is granted It is possible to think.

  In addition, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed is set at least more than the number of times the second specified winning opening 650a is opened during the small hitting game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specified winning opening 650a The variable display of the not-simulated main symbol Dmb is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called, loose eyes)) ing. As a result, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hitting game, it is possible to change display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb constantly, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, since the main hold symbol is not displayed when the effect state “2” is selected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the hold symbol. That is, since the false main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common figure) actually stored on hold, when the variable display of the false main symbol Dmb is started There is no increase or decrease in the number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, common drawing reserved symbol). Therefore, in the effect state "2" in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any one of the holding symbols (special drawing 1 holding symbol, special drawing 2 holding symbol, regular drawing holding symbol) is displayed as the main holding symbol When the main symbol starts to change, the main hold symbol does not decrease, which may cause the player to feel discomfort. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the effect state "2" is selected, since the main hold symbol is not displayed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned situation.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when production state "2" is selected, although it is comprised so that a main hold symbol may not be displayed, you may use the structure of other than that, for example, a false main symbol A pseudo main hold symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, the number of pseudo main hold symbols may be increased or decreased corresponding to the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Furthermore, in the case of displaying the pseudo main hold symbol, it is preferable to set the number and display mode of the pseudo main hold symbol displayed based on the type of the small hitting game to be executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to predict to the player the content of the current small hit game by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game where the effect state "2" is selected is started. It is possible to make it possible to carry out a small hit game while enjoying it.

  Moreover, although the stop display mode of the false main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specified winning opening 650a is opened is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, in addition, the second specified winning opening 650a enters the ball The display control is performed so that the same symbol types to be stopped and displayed are different based on the content of the benefit given by the ball. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specified winning opening 650a is opened at a timing at which the ball entering the second specified winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) A display mode (for example, "777") in which a specific same number is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the false main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specified winning opening 650a opened at other timing As the stop display mode, a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, “444”) is used. As a result, the false main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, thereby notifying the player of the opening timing in the second specified winning opening 650a, and further, according to the type of the number displayed to be stopped, The contents can be notified (suggested). Therefore, the rendering effect of the rendering using the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be enhanced.

  Next, when the presentation state "3" is selected, the pseudo symbol for presentation not corresponding to any symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, popular figure) becomes the main symbol (false main symbol Dmb) The hold symbol corresponding to the special view 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main hold symbol in the main hold symbol (see FIG. 16 (b)). The effect state "3" is selected when the gaming state is short and the small hitting game is executed.

  Next, when the presentation state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main retention symbol is a hold corresponding to the special figure 2 The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main hold symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state "4" is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the variation of the special view 2 is executed.

  Next, when the effect state "5" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the common figure becomes the main symbol (common figure main symbol Dmc), and the holding symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main holding symbol. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15 (b)). The effect state "5" is selected when the gaming state is a short time state, and a random drawing change capable of executing a lottery and an opening operation of the motorized role object 640a is performed during the short time state.

  When the effect state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma), and the holding symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the third holding symbol as the main holding symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 17A). The effect state "6" is selected when the game state is a short time state, and the spread map change is started in a state where the remaining change period of the special figure 1 during change is within 2 seconds.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. FIG. FIG. 31A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 31A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a and an effect state selection table 222b.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly indicates the contents of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, out of range, etc.) ) Is used to determine the detailed contents of the change. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The effect state selection table 222b is a table for selecting the effect state for setting the display mode of effect images (third symbol image, reserved symbol image, background image, etc.) displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Among the six presentation states, one of the presentation states is selected based on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, the state of establishment of the various flags, and the lottery results of the special symbols and the ordinary symbols.

  Here, the contents of the effect state selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). FIG. 32A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the effect state selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 32 (a), in the effect state selection table 222b, the consecutive state flag 223i, the common drawing effective flag 223q, the pseudo effect flag 223r, and the special state 2 change flag 223s are satisfied (set to ON ( Depending on whether it is set to OFF), one of the presentation states "1" to "6" is selected.

  Specifically, in the state in which the consecutive-in-room flag 223i is set to off, if the pseudo effect flag 223r is also set to off, the effect state "1" is selected. On the other hand, when the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON, the effect state "2" is selected. Further, in the state where the consecutive villain flag 223i is set to ON and the common drawing effective flag 223q is set to OFF, if the special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to OFF, the rendering state "3" is It is selected. On the other hand, when special figure 2 fluctuation flag 223s is set to on, production state “4” is selected. Then, in the case where the consecutive loin flag 223i is set to on and the common drawing effective flag 223q is set to on, the effect state "5" is selected. In the state where this effect state “5” is selected, the fluctuation stop timing of the first special symbol (special figure 1) being executed and the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol (general drawing) are at a predetermined interval (special figure If the fluctuation stop timing of the general drawing is earlier than the fluctuation stop timing of 1, and the respective fluctuation stop timings are within 2 seconds, the rendering state "6" is selected.

  Here, the relationship between the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (b). FIG. 32 (b) is a schematic view showing the relationship between each effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222 b and the third symbol and the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the object by which the display mode is changed according to the effect state to be set is not only the third symbol and the holding symbol described above, but also the effect state in which various effect images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are also set. Although it is changed to an effect image corresponding to, the detailed description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the third symbol (main symbol) displayed in the first display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 by the effect state selected by the effect state selection table 222b (see FIG. 9) And symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbols) corresponding to the main holding symbols (see FIG. 9) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are defined to be different. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 having complex game characteristics, the main symbol and the symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol, and normal symbol) corresponding to the main holding symbol are differentiated depending on the effect state. It is possible to inform the result of the main game in an easy-to-understand manner only by making the player grasp the symbol and the main hold symbol.

  Specifically, when the rendering state "1" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) is the main symbol, and the reservation for showing the number of reserved memory of special figure 1 is suspended. The symbol becomes the main holding symbol and is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 9). The effect state "1" is selected during the normal state in which the game state is left hit.

  Next, when the presentation state "2" is selected, the pseudo symbol for presentation not corresponding to any symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, popular figure) becomes the main symbol (false main symbol Dmb) The main holding symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 so that no holding symbol is displayed (see FIG. 22 (b)). The effect state "2" is selected when the gaming state is normal and the small hitting game of the special view 1 is executed.

  The pseudo main symbol Dmb displayed as the main symbol when the effect state "2" is selected is the variable display (see FIG. 22 (a)) of the symbol and the stop display (FIG. 22) like the other main symbols. (B)) is executed, and in the small hitting game of the special figure 1, the pseudo main symbol Dmb is predetermined based on the timing when the second specified winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. The display is controlled to be stopped and displayed in a mode (see FIG. 22 (b)) in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed. While being able to inform the opening timing of the 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 650a in the hitting game, as it is the result of fluctuation (lottery) of false main design Dmb, the privilege which 2nd specified winning a prize mouth 650a opens is granted It is possible to think.

  In addition, the number of times the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed is set at least more than the number of times the second specified winning opening 650a is opened during the small hitting game, and corresponds to the opening timing of the second specified winning opening 650a The variable display of the not-simulated main symbol Dmb is controlled so as to be stopped and displayed in a display mode other than a predetermined display mode (for example, a mode in which non-identical symbols are stopped and displayed (so-called, loose eyes)) ing. As a result, regardless of the opening timing of the second specific winning opening 650a during the small hitting game, it is possible to change display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb constantly, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

  Furthermore, since the main hold symbol is not displayed when the effect state “2” is selected, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the fluctuation of the pseudo main symbol Dmb and the increase / decrease relationship of the hold symbol. That is, since the false main symbol Dmb is not a symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common figure) actually stored on hold, when the variable display of the false main symbol Dmb is started There is no increase or decrease in the number of any of the reserved symbols (special figure 1 reserved symbol, special figure 2 reserved symbol, common drawing reserved symbol). Therefore, in the effect state "2" in which the pseudo main symbol Dmb is variably displayed, any one of the holding symbols (special drawing 1 holding symbol, special drawing 2 holding symbol, regular drawing holding symbol) is displayed as the main holding symbol When the main symbol starts to change, the main hold symbol does not decrease, which may cause the player to feel discomfort. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the rendering state "2" is selected, the main hold map is not displayed, so that the occurrence of the above-described situation can be suppressed.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when production state "2" is selected, although it is comprised so that a main hold symbol may not be displayed, you may use the structure of other than that, for example, a false main symbol A pseudo main hold symbol corresponding to Dmb may be displayed. In this case, the number of pseudo main hold symbols may be increased or decreased corresponding to the variable display of the pseudo main symbol Dmb. As a result, it is possible to execute the variable display of the pseudo main symbol without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  Furthermore, in the case of displaying the pseudo main hold symbol, it is preferable to set the number and display mode of the pseudo main hold symbol displayed based on the type of the small hitting game to be executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to predict to the player the content of the current small hit game by the pseudo main hold symbol displayed as the main hold symbol at the timing when the small hit game where the effect state "2" is selected is started. It is possible to make it possible to carry out a small hit game while enjoying it.

  Moreover, although the stop display mode of the false main symbol Dmb corresponding to the timing when the second specified winning opening 650a is opened is a display mode in which the same symbol is stopped and displayed, in addition, the second specified winning opening 650a enters the ball The display control is performed so that the same symbol types to be stopped and displayed are different based on the content of the benefit given by the ball. Specifically, the pseudo main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specified winning opening 650a is opened at a timing at which the ball entering the second specified winning opening 650a can pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) A display mode (for example, "777") in which a specific same number is stopped and displayed as the stop display mode of the false main symbol Dmb corresponding to the opening timing of the second specified winning opening 650a opened at other timing As the stop display mode, a display mode different from the specific same number (for example, “444”) is used. As a result, the false main symbol Dmb is stopped and displayed with the same number, thereby notifying the player of the opening timing in the second specified winning opening 650a, and further, according to the type of the number displayed to be stopped, The contents can be notified (suggested). Therefore, the rendering effect of the rendering using the pseudo main symbol Dmb can be enhanced.

  Next, when the presentation state "3" is selected, the pseudo symbol for presentation not corresponding to any symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, popular figure) becomes the main symbol (false main symbol Dmb) The hold symbol corresponding to the special view 2 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as the main hold symbol in the main hold symbol (see FIG. 16 (b)). The effect state "3" is selected when the gaming state is short and the small hitting game is executed.

  Next, when the presentation state "4" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol Dmd), and the main retention symbol is a hold corresponding to the special figure 2 The symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a main hold symbol (see FIG. 18A). The effect state "4" is selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the variation of the special view 2 is executed.

  Next, when the effect state "5" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the common figure becomes the main symbol (common figure main symbol Dmc), and the holding symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 becomes the main holding symbol. 3 Displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 15 (b)). The effect state "5" is selected when the gaming state is a short time state, and a random drawing change capable of executing a lottery and an opening operation of the motorized role object 640a is performed during the short time state.

  When the effect state "6" is selected, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 1 is the main symbol (special figure 1 main symbol Dma), and the holding symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 is the third holding symbol as the main holding symbol. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 16 (b)). The effect state "6" is selected when the game state is a short time state, and the spread map change is started in a state where the remaining change period of the special figure 1 during change is within 2 seconds.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 has a special drawing prize information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, a special drawing fluctuation start flag 223d, and a stop type selection flag 223e, Effect counter 223f, time-shortening flag 223g, time-short remaining period storage area 223h, consecutive-in-time flag 223i, fluctuation time counter 223j, state storage area 223k, effect state storage area 223m, special status hold flag 223n , Special upper limit flag 223p, common drawing effective flag 223q, pseudo effect flag 223r, special change flag 223s, common drawing prize information storage area 223t, common drawing change start flag 223u, and exchange The flag 223v, the benefit effect execution flag 223w, the end effect execution flag 223x, Other memory area 223z and is provided with at least.

  Special drawing prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a special symbol (a first special symbol and The winning information on the second special symbol) is stored. The information stored in the special drawing winning information storage area 223a enables the voice lamp control device 113 to determine the lottery result of the holding ball and the like before the start of the change.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), and main control It is a counter which counts the number of holding balls (the number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the device 110 up to four times for each type of special symbol. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b corresponds to the holding ball number of the variation effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c is the second special symbol (special symbol Corresponds to the number of holding balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of 2).

  As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e Can not get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c. , The number of holding balls is to be managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in the main control device 110, the display of the variable display is caused by entering the first entrance 64 (left first entrance 64a, right first entrance 64b) and entering the second entrance 640. When the number of balls is added, or when the number of holding balls is subtracted by the variable display in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the main controller 110, after or after the addition A command for holding ball number indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball reception is used from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c (see S3207 in FIG. 61). As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. The values can be updated while being synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c after storage, a display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113, the special symbol 2 holding ball The drawing of the image is controlled to display the number-of-holding balls number pattern corresponding to the value of the number counter 223c on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. , Its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 also changes while being synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 It can be done. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  In this embodiment, the normal symbol is also configured to be able to hold the variable display (right of symbol lottery) similarly to the special symbol described above (upper limit of four), and the number of normal symbol holding balls of the main control device 110 When a command set when the value of the counter 203f increases or decreases, it has a normal symbol holding ball number counter (not shown) as a counter that increases or decreases the value according to the content of the received command. However, with regard to the processing executed in the audio lamp control device 113 and the processing executed in the display control device 114, only the target command is different with respect to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b described above. Since there is, it omits the detailed explanation. The value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter is used, for example, when displaying the number of holding balls of the normal symbol in the third symbol display device 81. In addition, about the detailed content in the case of displaying the value of a normal symbol holding ball number counter on the 3rd symbol display device 81, it is the same as the case where the 3rd symbol display device 81 displays the holding ball number of the special symbol mentioned above. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the display control device 114 receives each holding ball number command for display, it is received in a predetermined area (sub-holding symbol display areas Dn4 to Dn6 (refer to FIG. 9A)). A display is made to indicate the number of holding balls corresponding to the executed command, and the number of holding balls command to be displayed in the main holding symbol display area is selected based on the received display effect state command, and is held as a main holding symbol A display is made to indicate the number of balls. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a display synchronized with the increase or decrease in the number of balls held by the main control device 110, and to notify the player in the current rendering state The number of holding balls of the symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, the number of holding balls for each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common drawing) is all the predetermined area (following holding symbol display area Dn4 to Dn6 (FIG. 9 (FIG. a))) and it is possible to display part of it as a main hold symbol, but it is not limited to this as a display method of the hold symbol, for example, each symbol (special figure 1 , The special figure 2, a common figure), when the ball number command for holding is received, the hold symbol (main hold symbol) to be displayed in the main hold symbol display area based on the received display effect state command, and Discrimination between a suspended symbol (a suspended symbol) to be displayed in the suspended symbol display area, and the symbol corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common figure) in the third symbol display device 81 based on the discrimination result A symbol may be displayed.

  The special drawing fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command (for special drawing) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3304 in FIG. 62), and the fluctuation display in the third symbol display device 81 It is turned off when the setting is made (see S3702 in FIG. 66). When the special drawing fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the special drawing display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (see S3706 in FIG. 66).

  The variation pattern command for special view display set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221. Are sent to the display control device 114. In the display control device 114, by receiving the variation pattern command for special view display, the variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 in the variation pattern indicated by the special pattern variation pattern command. As described above, display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  In this embodiment, as the variation pattern command for special view display, the variation pattern command for special view 1 display corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol and the variation for special figure 2 display corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol The pattern command is configured to be settable. The display control device 114 displays, on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern corresponding to the type of the special pattern display variation pattern command (special pattern 1 display variation pattern command, special figure 2 display variation pattern command) received. Are configured to

  In the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, when the display variation pattern command is received, the predetermined area (the symbol display areas Dn1 to Dn3 of the second display area Dn (see FIG. 9A)) is received. A display for indicating a symbol row (variation pattern) corresponding to the received display variation pattern command is made, and a symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm based on the received display effect state command The symbol is selected from each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common drawing), and it is comprised so that the selected symbol may be displayed as a main symbol. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 a display synchronized with the variation pattern of each symbol set in the main control device 110, and to notify the player in the current rendering state The variation of the symbol can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the present embodiment, in the display control device 114, all the variable displays (symbol row) of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common drawing) are subordinate symbol displays of the second display area Dn in a predetermined area Although it is displayed in the areas Dn1 to Dn3 (refer to FIG. 9A), and a part of it can be displayed on the first display area as a main symbol, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common figure) The display method of the figure) is not limited to this, and for example, the display received when the display variation pattern command corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common figure) is received The symbol (main symbol) to be displayed in the first display area Dm and the symbol (sub symbol) to be displayed in the subordinate symbol display region are discriminated based on the for-play status command, and the third symbol display is displayed based on the discrimination result Variable display (pattern row) corresponding to each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common drawing) in the device 81 It may be displayed.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3204 in FIG. 61), and is turned off when the setting of the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is performed. (See S3708 in FIG. 66). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (in the case of a large hit, a large hit type) extracted from the received stop type command (see S3710 in FIG. 66).

  The effect counter 223 f is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223f is formed of a 1-byte loop counter updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 60) is executed. . Note that this effect counter 223f has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when determining a pattern of effects by referring to a plurality of counter values in one loop process, the values of the different counters are different. Used. Thereby, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that it is possible to suppress the bias of the effect pattern to be set. The effect pattern may be set using the values calculated after performing different processing on the values acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the first place of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tenth place of the acquired value, and the other selection indicates one of the acquired value It is also possible to multiply the value obtained by doubling the value of the third digit by the value obtained by multiplying the fifth digit by ten, and to refer to the first digit of the obtained value. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the effect pattern to be set while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

  The time saving flag 223 g is a flag for indicating that the current time is being saved. At this time, if the flag 223g is on, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the short time state, and if off, it indicates that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is not in the short time state. At this time, the flag 223g is set to ON in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) when it is determined to shift to the time short state after the big hit ends (3906 in FIG. 68), and the fluctuation display setting process (FIG. 66). (S3113 in FIG. 66), it is determined that the special drawing fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3701 in FIG. 66: Yes), and it is determined that the time saving flag 223g is on (S3704 in FIG. 66: Yes). ), Off (S3705 in FIG. 66).

  In the present embodiment, as the ending condition of the time saving state, the variation (lottery) of the special symbol is executed once (that is, one time saving time), so the time saving flag 223 g is on as described above. When fluctuation of the special symbol is started in the state which is set to, it is constituted that the time saving flag 223g is set to off, but it is voice lamp control device 113 that game state is time saving state For example, if the time reduction number is set to 100, a time reduction number counter capable of determining the remaining period number is provided, and the special symbol is changed (lottery) every time it is determined. The value of the counter may be updated, and the time saving flag 223g may be set to OFF when the value of the counter is updated to a value indicating that the time saving state ends. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 has the time-savings set to a plurality of times (two or more), the sound lamp control device 113 reliably determines whether or not the current gaming state is the time-saving state. Can.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, when variation of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is executed a predetermined number of times (one time), the ending condition of the time saving state is established. , Other configurations may be used, for example, it is possible to separately measure the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the number of fluctuations t of the second special symbol separately, and for the termination condition of the time saving state, the first special symbol Is changed ten times (lottery) or the second special symbol is changed one time (lottery), and the time saving state is ended even if one of the end conditions is satisfied. The time saving state may be ended under conditions other than the number of times of variation of the special symbol. In this case, for example, when the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) or the normal symbol becomes a predetermined lottery result, an end condition for ending the time saving state is established, or the pachinko machine 10 A configuration may be used in which an end condition for ending the time saving state is satisfied when the various drive members provided (the motorized combination 640a, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device 650) are driven. The number of times of driving of the various driving members described above can be measured, and when the number of times of driving reaches a predetermined number (for example, twice), an ending condition for ending the time saving state may be satisfied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the time saving state ends, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  The time saving period storage area 223 h is an area for storing the variation time of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state. Here, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured to end the time saving state when the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) changes once during the time saving state. That is, the fluctuation time of the special symbol set in the time saving state is the remaining period in the time saving state as it is.

  The continuous-state flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the right-handed game state (continuous-state state), and the current-state flag 223i is set to ON. It indicates that the gaming state is the right-handed gaming state, and if it is set to off, it indicates that the current gaming state is the normal state. The on-duration flag 223i is set to ON when it is determined that the jackpot has been started in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3903 in FIG. 68), and effects are produced based on the effect state selection table 222b. It is referred to when selecting the state (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and it is determined that the time saving state is not entered after the big hit, or the time saving state ending condition is satisfied without special storage of reserved view. (See S3907 and S3912 in FIG. 68).

  The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is shifted from the time saving state in a state having the reserve memory of the special view 2 in addition to the jackpot state, the time saving state as a gaming state (right hitting gaming state) advantageous to the player It is a game characteristic that includes the normal state (see FIG. 12), and the number of holding balls output from the main control device 110 whether or not the current game state is the gaming state advantageous to the player (right-handed gaming state). The voice lamp control device 113 is configured to make a determination based on a command, various status commands, and the like. As a result, the main control device 110 need not execute the process of determining whether the current gaming state is the advantageous state or not, and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Note that the main control device 110 may perform processing to determine whether the current game state is a game state advantageous to the player. In this case, a command indicating that the gaming state (right-handed gaming state) advantageous to the player is set is output to the sound lamp control device 113, and the fact that the game is in the right-handed gaming state is externally output. It may be configured to output a signal (right-handed signal) for notifying. In this case, in addition to a period in which the gaming state itself such as the jackpot state or the time saving state is advantageous to the player, the gaming state is not an advantageous gaming state (although it is the normal state), the predetermined conditions are satisfied. If it is determined that the game is shifted to the jackpot state, the player is made to continuously execute the right-handed game by continuously notifying the outside of the period of the right-handed game state. It is possible to prevent bothersome and annoying games from being played.

  The fluctuation time counter 223 j is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 during the time saving state, and the remaining period of the time saving state is calculated based on the value of the measured counter. When it is determined that the fluctuation of the special view 1 is started during the short time (during the short time state) in the counter updating process (see S3311 in FIG. 70), the fluctuation time counter 223j (S4103 in FIG. 70: Yes) Every time the value of the counter is set to "1" and thereafter the counter updating process (see S3311 in FIG. 70) is performed, "1" is added until the value of the counter becomes "150000" (S4108 in FIG. 70). Reference), when the value of the counter becomes “150000” (S4107 in FIG. 70: Yes), the value of the counter is set to “0” (S4109). Then, based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j, the time saving remaining period (remaining period of the time saving state) is calculated (S4105 in FIG. 70).

  State storage area 223 k is a storage area for temporarily storing the state when various status commands output from main controller 110 are received, and in the command determination process (see S 3112 in FIG. 61), When a status command is received (S3215 in FIG. 61: Yes), status information based on the received status command is stored (S3216 in FIG. 61). A display state command is set based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, and various images (background image and demo image) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are set by the main control device 110. Images corresponding to various states are displayed.

  The effect state storage area 223m is, in the display control device 114, the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common drawing) displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and each pending symbol (special figure 1 pending) It is an area for storing a rendering state used for setting a rendering effect state command for display to be referred to when deciding a display mode of a symbol, a special figure 2 suspension symbol, a common drawing suspension symbol). The effect state is the setting status of various flags (continuous flag 223i, common drawing effective flag 223q, pseudo effect flag 223r, special view 2 change flag 223s) set by various processes of the audio lamp control device 113, and each Based on the fluctuation stop timing of the symbol, it is selected in the rendering state setting process (S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3918 in FIG. 68), and the selected rendering state is stored in the rendering state storage area 223m. The effect state storage area 223 m is configured to store (store) the selected effect state several times in the past. Thereby, it is possible to compare and determine the effect state before the transition and the effect state after the transition. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to determine a transition pattern that can not be shifted when performing a normal game, and to determine the presence or absence of an unauthorized game.

  Also, when the rendering state is shifted in a predetermined transition pattern over a plurality of times (for example, the transition from the rendering state 4 to the rendering state 5 is repeated five times or more without intervention of the rendering states 1 and 2) It is possible to provide an effect state (e.g., Dalian Shen effect state) which is selected only in the above, and the effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that it is preferable to display a bonus image which can not normally be viewed by the player in the first display area Dm without displaying the main symbol on the third symbol display device 81 when the state of the effect of Dalian sorrow is set. .

  The special hold flag 223 n is a flag for indicating that there is a reserve memory of the special view 2 (special mark 2) during the time saving state, and the special hold flag 223 n is set to ON. It shows that the holding storage (holding symbol) of FIG. 2 is present, and by being set to OFF, it indicates that the holding storage (holding symbol) of the special view 2 does not exist. The special ball on hold flag 223 n is set to ON when the special ball on hold number is updated to 1 in the hold ball number related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3403 in FIG. 63). This special 2 suspension flag 223 n is referred to in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) when it is determined that the time saving state is ended (see S3911 in FIG. 68), and the special 2 suspension ball number becomes 0. Will be set to off.

  The special hold upper limit flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the reserve storage of the special view 2 (special case 2) has reached the upper limit (four pieces) during the time saving state, and the special hold upper limit flag 223p is By being set to ON, it indicates that the number of pending storages in the special figure 2 (special 2) reaches the upper limit (four) during the time saving state, and by setting the special 2 upper limit flag 223p to OFF, It shows that the number of pending storages in the special figure 2 (special 2) is not the upper limit (four).

  When the special ball suspension ball number is updated to the upper limit (S3406: Yes in FIG. 63), the special ball suspension upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3406 in FIG. 63). This is referred to in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) in FIG. 63), and is set to OFF when the number of specially held balls is no longer at the upper limit.

  The common drawing effective flag 223 q is a flag for indicating a common drawing fluctuation (normal symbol fluctuation) in which the operation of the motorized commercial product 640 a to be executed at the time of winning will be an operation pattern (long open) advantageous to the player. By setting the common drawing effective flag 223 q to ON, it indicates that the common drawing fluctuation at the timing when the motorized commercial product 640 a can be opened long, and by being set to OFF, the electric commercial product 640 a is shorted. It indicates that it is a common figure fluctuation at the timing of opening.

  The common drawing effective flag 223 q is set to ON when it is determined in the common drawing fluctuation display setting process (see S 3712 in FIG. 67) that both the fluctuation start and fluctuation end timings are in the time saving state (FIG. 67). If the timing of the start of fluctuation is determined not to be in the short time state, or if it is determined that the timing of the end of the fluctuation is not in the short time state (S3809 in FIG. 67). reference). The setting status of the common drawing effective flag 223 q is referred to when selecting a rendering state based on the rendering state selection table 222 b (see S 3918 in FIG. 68).

  The pseudo effect flag 223r is a flag for indicating that the special view 1 small hit is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, and the special view 1 small hit in the normal state by being set to ON. Indicates that was performed. By setting the pseudo effect flag 223r to ON, effect display in which the pseudo symbol is a main symbol (false main symbol) during the small hitting game is executed (see FIG. 22). The pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON when the small hit in the special view 1 occurs in the normal state by the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68) (see S3915 in FIG. 68), and the small hit Is set to be off when the processing ends (S3917 in FIG. 68). Then, the setting status of the pseudo effect flag 223r is referred to when selecting the effect state based on the effect state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  The special change flag 223s is a flag for indicating that the change of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is started, and by being set to ON, the second special symbol (special figure 2) It indicates that fluctuation has been started. The special variation flag 223 s is set to ON in the case of the special pattern 2 variation pattern command (S 3302 in FIG. 62), in the variation pattern related process (see S 3202 in FIG. 62). And, when the fluctuation pattern command for special figure 1 is received, it is set to off. The setting status of the special variation flag 223s is referred to when selecting a rendering state based on the rendering state selection table 222b (see S3918 in FIG. 68).

  Here, in the present embodiment, when the special variation flag 223s is set to ON, that is, when the variation (lottery drawing) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed, the variation result (lottery result) The small hit game that is executed based on the change (lottery) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be given a jackpot or a small hit as a), the ball is a specific area (V It is configured to be a small hit game that easily passes through the winning switch 650e3). That is, the variation (lottery drawing) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to be advantageous to the player only by being executed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment configured in this manner, while the special change flag 223s is set to ON (that is, while the second special symbol is changing), the second special symbol is displayed. It is variably displayed as a main symbol (special figure 2 main symbol). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the variable display of the second special symbol to which a state advantageous to the player is given is overlooked.

  The common drawing winning information storage area 223t is an area where winning information included in the winning information command is stored when the winning information command of the normal symbol is received. The detailed configuration is the same as that of the special drawing winning information storage area 223a described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  The common drawing fluctuation start flag 223u is a flag indicating that the fluctuation of the normal symbol has been executed, and indicates that the normal symbol is fluctuated by being set to ON. In the fluctuation pattern related process (see S3202 in FIG. 62), the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223u determines that the received fluctuation pattern command is not a special drawing fluctuation pattern command (a common drawing fluctuation pattern command). If it is determined that it is set to ON (see S3306 in FIG. 62) and it is determined that it is set to ON in the common view variation display setting process (see S3712 in FIG. 67) (S3801 in FIG. 67: Yes) It is set to off (see S3802 in FIG. 67).

  The replacement flag 223v is a flag indicating that the end timing of the time saving state (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation in which the change is started in the time reducing state) and the end timing of the spread map change satisfy the predetermined conditions. By being set to ON, it is indicated that the end timing of the spread fluctuation is within 2 seconds of the end timing of the time saving state. By setting the replacement flag 223v to ON, the effect state "6" is selected as the effect state.

  The bonus effect execution flag 223 w is a flag for indicating that the bonus effect is to be executed, and is set to ON to indicate that the bonus effect is to be executed. While the bonus effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, a bonus effect (see FIG. 21) which can not normally be viewed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The special effect setting execution flag 223w determines that the special hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) (see S4002 in FIG. 69), and the special effect command for display 69 (see FIG. 69) is set to ON (S4005 in FIG. 69), and in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), after the consecutive flag 223i is set to OFF (see FIG. 69). 68 (see S3907) and off (see S3908 in FIG. 68). That is, even if the bonus effect execution flag 223w is set to ON at least once (in continuous mode) while the consecutive villa flag 223i is set to ON (the number of holding balls in the special figure 2 is the upper limit) If it has reached, the bonus effect is continuously performed until the continuous mode ends.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the benefit presentation is immediately ended even if the effect presentation is to be executed. That is, after the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit, at least all the reserved balls in Special Figure 2 are digested until the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state is ended. Since it is comprised so that it may be performed, a privilege presentation can be continued and displayed.

  Further, by configuring in this way, it is possible to display on the third symbol display device 81 that the number of balls in the special drawing 2 has reached the upper limit for a long period of time. You can appeal and get a sense of satisfaction. Furthermore, in order to obtain the sense of satisfaction, it is possible to play the game eagerly.

  In this embodiment, although it is configured to execute a specific benefit effect even if the number of balls in the special drawing 2 has reached the upper limit at least once, the present invention is not limited to this. A means may be provided to measure the number of times the number of balls in the special drawing 2 has reached the upper limit, and different benefit effects may be executed based on the measurement result of the means. As a result, the player can play the game more actively.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus effect execution flag 223w is set to ON, the bonus effect is set to be executed until the continuous mode ends, but the present invention is not limited thereto. A period until all the holding balls in the special figure 2 are consumed may be set as a period in which the bonus effect is performed. Thus, in the continuous mode, it is possible to switch the effect every time the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed in the short time state, and to play the game eagerly to continue the continuous mode with new feelings. Can.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the condition for executing the bonus effect is satisfied, the bonus effect is automatically executed. However, other configurations may be used, for example, pachinko By operating the operation means (frame button 22) provided in the machine 10, the normal effect and the benefit effect may be switched to be executable. This makes it possible to provide the player with a desired effect.

  In the present embodiment, the case where the number of holding balls in the special view 2 reaches the upper limit is set as the condition for executing the privilege effect, but other conditions may be set as the condition for executing the privilege effect. For example, in addition to the case where the number of holding balls in the special figure 2 reaches the upper limit, the special figure 1 during fluctuation may be set as a condition that it has been won (big hit, small hit). As described above, when the number of balls in the special drawing 2 has reached the upper limit, if the drawing result of the special drawing 1 during the fluctuation is the big hit, it is substantially five times (one big hit, one special Since the jackpot game of 4 jackpots based on FIG. 2 will be provided, the gaming state becomes more advantageous to the player. By performing the privilege effect only when such a condition is established, it is possible to enhance the sense of values of the privilege effect, and it is possible to play the game eagerly to see the privilege effect.

  In this case, whether or not the bonus effect is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 when the number of holding balls of the special figure 2 becomes 3 (the number of semi-upper limit less than the upper limit number). It is preferable to perform a display (indication of benefit presentation execution indication) to notify (propose) the player. Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly while expecting the lottery result of the special view 1 and the provision of the bonus effect. In addition, when special figure 2 retention sphere number becomes upper limit number (4 pieces), it is constituted so that privilege production is executed, the contents of the special effect production, the drawing result of special figure 1 which is moving, It is made to change based on the remaining period of the time saving state (the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 during fluctuation) when the number of holding balls of the special drawing 2 reaches the upper limit (when the execution condition of bonus effect is satisfied). May be Even in such a configuration, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly.

  The end effect execution flag 223x is a flag for indicating that the end effect (refer to FIG. 19B to FIG. 20B) for suggesting that the continuous mode is ended is performed, and is on By being set to, it indicates that the end effect is being executed. The end effect execution flag 223x is turned on when the time saving remaining period becomes 10 seconds in the specific effect setting process (see S3315 in FIG. 69) with the special hold flag 223n set to off. It is set (see S4010 in FIG. 69), and is referred to when the special hold flag 223n is set to ON in the pending ball count related process (see S3208 in FIG. 63) (see S3404 in FIG. 63). Here, if the second hold flag 223 n is set to ON while the end effect execution flag 223 x is set to ON, it is assumed that the current time saving state is ended (variation of special figure 1 is ended). Also, the fluctuation (lottery drawing) of the special figure 2 is started, and the continuous mode will be continued. Therefore, for the end effect being executed, a display win command is set, and an effect that suggests a return from the end effect is executed. As a result, the player can be expected to continue the continuous mode even after the end effect is executed, and the player can play the game eagerly until the end.

  Then, in the effect state setting process (see S3114 in FIG. 68), after the continuous-running flag 223i is set to off, it is set to off (see S3909 in FIG. 68). Note that the termination effect executed in the present embodiment may be configured to be executed even in a state in which the special view 2 suspension flag 223 n is set to on. In this case, the continuous mode will always continue. Therefore, it is possible to increase the visual continuous mode continuation probability in the end effect. In addition, when a plurality of special drawing 2 reservations are obtained during a period in which the end effect is being executed, a corresponding effect may be executed.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113, for example , Command storage area is provided.

  The command storage area is an area temporarily stored until various commands output from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 are processed. In detail, it is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 61) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out in one big symbol of a special symbol are different. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, described later, in the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237 Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, the error correction is performed based on the erroneous data. Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program. From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. Thus, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one of the program storage area 233a. Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the remaining boot programs are the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 71) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73B), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control unit 110 or the display control unit 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list is the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on time variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first entrance 64 and the second entrance are started. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control unit 110 by the fluctuation effect when entering the mouth 640 is detected.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 71).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the main image area 235a at power on to display the third image at the power on main image. Display on 81

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. The result is judged, and if it is "big hit of special symbol", "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period after stopping the change production, and if it is "out of special symbol", "×" symbol is after the change production stop Display for a fixed period.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the first ball entry port 64 (left first ball entry port 64a, right first ball entry port) 64b) or when the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected, the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image using the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is used Is drawn from the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 so that the power-on time variation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected at the first entrance 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately Can.

  Returning to FIG. 33, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a town, a sea, the sky and the like are displayed. In addition, a right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 15A) and the like are also stored as a back surface image in the back surface image area 235c.

  The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described ten types of main symbols assigned with the numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, reside. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64, although the fluctuation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37, the fluctuation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unintended condition.

  In the third symbol area 235d, characters such as a main symbol with a rear symbol such as a wooden box, a symbol with a rear symbol, a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to a main symbol consisting of an attached symbol imitating the symbol is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. Be Thereby, when the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, in the demonstration effect, a main symbol not numbered is displayed as the third symbol. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demonstration state by visually recognizing the main symbols without numbers from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message image area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, and an effect state storage area 233k.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and display data It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a change effect, an opening effect Display data tables corresponding to, round presentation, ending presentation, and demonstration presentation are prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the fluctuation pattern command for display is received, the stop type command for display indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  The opening effect is for notifying the player that the first specified winning opening 65a and the second specified winning opening 650a which are normally closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state from now on. It is an effect, and a round effect is an effect for notifying a player of the number of rounds to be started from now. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

  The demonstration effect is, as described above, an effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has elapsed since one variation effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. If the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed enlarged than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is reduced smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the content to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined. This back surface type indicates which of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of the "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage") is displayed, or the back surface A to C Information specifying whether to display a back image different from C is described. Moreover, when specifying to display a back surface image different from the back surfaces A to C, the back surface type is also described together with information specifying which back surface image to be displayed.

  When it is specified that one of the back surfaces A to C is displayed according to the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back surface image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. Also, the range of the rear view image to be displayed for the frame is specified as time passes. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear surface image different from the rear surface A to C, the rear surface image to be displayed is specified from the rear surface type.

  In the present embodiment, only the back surface type is defined as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table, but instead, the back surface type and the range of the back surface image corresponding to the back surface type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) describes the data table "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, the resident data among the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 35 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 35).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H” which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display content specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 36) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 35, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 (see S5005 in FIG. 71). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 82 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 73 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure in FIG. 73) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 73 (b) (see S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 of FIG. 82A), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 82B) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simplified image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 36) in which the contents of the drawing instruction are described is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 36) described later (see FIG. 36) in which the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame are described. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 completes the image drawing process for one frame (FIG. 73 (b In step S5303), the pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 81) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. The transfer data information of the image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer is to be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while creating (see FIG. 36), and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 36 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 36, a back image to be used in an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as a pattern). Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number symbol 1, holding ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed, the V interrupt process (FIG. 73 (b Every time the display setting process (see) is executed, the time counter 233h is decremented by one (see S6207 in FIG. 79). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by an initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6717 in FIG. 83). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S6718 in FIG. 83). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 84).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed, the process is performed (see S6802 of FIG. 84).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The effect state storage area 233 k is an area for storing effect state information included in the effect state command for display output from the audio lamp control device 113. The effect state information stored in the effect state storage area 233k is referred to when the display content to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern data corresponding to each rendering state information is included, and different variation patterns are determined even when the same display variation pattern command is received. .

<About control processing of main controller in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 37 to 58. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon turning on the power, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment) There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by one, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 Are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Furthermore, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first random number counter C1, the first collision type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter C5 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the values (in the present embodiment, 299, 99, 99, 239, and 99, respectively) are reached, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed as well as processing for performing display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B (S104). Thereafter, when both the left first entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b (hereinafter referred to as the first left entrance 64a and the right first entrance 64b are indicated, the first entrance 64 and the first entrance 64b are indicated. Or a start winning process associated with a winning on the second entrance 640 (start winning) (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 to 44.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device is executed (S106), and the through associated with the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 Gate passage processing is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passing processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 45 to 48.

  After the through gate passing process is executed, the V inlet passing process according to entering the ball into the second variable winning device 650 is executed (S108). Thereafter, V pass processing is executed in association with the winning of the V winning switch 650 e 3 of the second variable winning device 650 (S 109). The details of the V inlet passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 and 59.

  Next, the launch control process is executed (S110), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process is ended. In the shot control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the shot stop switch 51b for stopping the shot is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of the firing. The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol and the like performed in the display device 81.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a jackpot of special symbols, during the display showing the jackpot of the special symbols (including during the jackpot game of the special symbols) in the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and special The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is changing (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B If the mode is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (number of holding N2 of the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

  If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation A holding ball number command (special drawing 2 holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted values The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223 c are respectively stored.

  After setting the special figure 2 holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S213). The special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is 0 in the process of S204 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d The value of is acquired (S208). It is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210) A holding ball number command (special figure 1 holding ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 holding ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). Thereafter, the process of S213 is performed.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is changing (S202: Yes), has the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B elapsed? It is determined whether or not it is (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S214, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B is set (S215) . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 39 to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, the lottery of the special symbol line is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. It will be. More specifically, depending on the value of the first random number counter C1, it is determined whether it will be a big hit, a small hit or a small hit of the special symbol, and it is a big hit or small hit of the special symbol In this case, one of the big hit A to G or one of the small hit A to E is determined according to the value of the first hit type counter C2 or the small hit type counter C5.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when becoming big hit A, blue LED is lighted in 1st symbol display apparatus 37A, 37B. Also, in the case of a small hit, the red LED is lit, and in the case of a small hit, the red LED and the green LED are lit. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is completed, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start process (current lottery result) It is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol (S216). If the lottery result this time is the jackpot of the special symbol (S216: Yes), an open scenario of the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S217), and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). Next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit flag 203i are set to ON (S219), and the hour / minute counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221. In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S216 that the current lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S222).

  In the process of S222, when it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit (S222: Yes), a small hit start setting process is executed (S223). Next, the process of S221 is performed, and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S222 that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S222: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving middle counter 203g is 1 or more (S224). If it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S224: No), the process of S221 is performed, and the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S224: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S224), and the process of S221 is executed. Thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of the various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a lottery of "big hit of special symbol", "small hit of special symbol" or "out of special symbol" It is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81 while performing the determination).

  In the special symbol variation start process, first, it is determined whether or not the time is short (S301). If the time is not short (S301: No), the normal fluctuation start process (S302) is executed, and this process is ended. On the other hand, when the time is short (S301: Yes), the time short start process (S303) is executed, and this process is ended.

  Next, normal fluctuation start processing (S302) and time saving fluctuation start processing (S303), which are executed in the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation start processing (S213), will be described.

  First, the normal change start process (S302) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the normal fluctuation start process (S302) executed in the special symbol fluctuation start process (see S213 of FIG. 39).

  In the normal variation start process, first, data of the execution area in the corresponding special symbol holding ball storage area (the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b) is acquired (S401). Thereafter, the lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table corresponding to the acquired type of special symbol (S402). Specifically, if it is a lottery of the first special symbol based on entering the first entrance 64, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (refer to FIG. 26 (b)) is referred to and the big hit or the small hit If it is a lottery of the second special symbol based on entering the ball into the second entrance 640, the distinction is made, the distinction between the big hit or the small hit is made with reference to the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 (see FIG. 26C). I do.

  Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is a jackpot (S403). When the lottery result is a big hit (S403: Yes), based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401, the display mode at the time of normal jackpot corresponding to the special symbol and the jackpot type is set ( S404). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S401 is compared with the random value stored in the special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 jackpot selection table 202b2, Among the jackpots (jackpots A to G) of the special symbols that are present, it is determined what the jackpot type is (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

  In the process of S404, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A to G). Further, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type (big hit A to G) is set as the stop type.

  Thereafter, the normal jackpot variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S405, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until the jackpot symbol is stopped. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. Specifically, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, and the special pattern 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1 or the special drawing 2 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d5 (normal / time-short common) To determine the variation time of symbol variation (FIG. 29 (a) or FIG. 30 (b)).

  In the process of S406, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the process of S405 is set (S406). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S404 is set (S407). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1701 of the main process (see FIG. 53). Be done. The audio lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command to the display control device 114 as it is. When the process of S407 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is not a big hit (S403: No), it is further determined whether the lottery result is a small hit or not (S408). When the lottery result is a small hit (S408: Yes), the display mode at the time of a normal small hit corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S409). Thereafter, the normal small hitting variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S410). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the small symbol is stopped in the third symbol display device 81 is determined. At this time, similarly to the process of S405, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 and the special pattern 1 small hitting variation pattern table 202d3 or the special figure 2 large hitting variation pattern table 202d5 The variation time of the symbol variation is determined by comparing with (normal time common) (FIG. 29 (d) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processing of S406 and S407 is executed, and the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  If the lottery result is not a small hit (S408: No), the display mode at the time of the normal removal corresponding to the special symbol is set (S411). After that, a fluctuation pattern at the time of normal removal is determined based on the number of holding balls (S412). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S405, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203, the fluctuation pattern table 202d2 for special drawing 1 or the fluctuation pattern table 202d5 for jackpot for special drawing 2 ( The variation time of symbol variation is determined by comparing with normal time common) (FIG. 29 (c) or FIG. 30 (b)). Next, the processing of S406 and S407 is executed, and the processing returns to the special symbol variation processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the time saving change start process (S303) will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the time variation start process (S303) executed in the special symbol change start process (S213, see FIG. 39). The short change start process (S303) is different from the above-described normal change start process (S302) in that the time short display mode and the change pattern are set (determined), and the other points are the same. , I omit the detailed explanation. In the process of S505, S510, and S512, when determining the time-shortening fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol, as described above, it is determined based on the special-purpose time-shorting fluctuation pattern table 202d4 (FIG. 30 (a )reference). On the other hand, when determining the time-shortening fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol, it is determined based on the special pattern 2 fluctuation pattern table 202d5 (normal / time-short common) as in the case of the normal fluctuation start process (S302) (Figure 30 (b)).

  Next, the small hitting start setting process (S222) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the small hitting start setting process (S222). The small hitting start setting process (S222) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the small hitting type (small hitting A to E) Is a process for setting the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a, the staying solenoid 209b, and the passage solenoid 209c in the small hit game.

  In the small hitting start setting process (S222), first, the small hitting type selected in the process of S409 of the above-described normal variation start process or the process of S509 of the time-shortening variation starting process is read (S601). It is determined whether or not it is B (S602). If it is the small hitting type A or B (S602: Yes), an opening scenario for the special view 1 is set (S603). Specifically, the opening scenario for the special view 1 indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the open / close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 and the staying member 650n. That is, it is shown that the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is set so that the open / close door 650f1 and the staying member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 10).

  When the process of S603 is completed, it is determined whether the small hitting type is B or not (S604). If the small hit type is B (S604: Yes), the flow channel solenoid operation is set so that the V winning can not be made (S605). That is, the operation of the channel solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can not flow down the channel 650h3 (see FIG. 10A). Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of S608. In the process of S604, when the small hitting type is not B (that is, the small hitting type is A) (S604: No), the channel solenoid operation is set so that the V winning can be made (S606). That is, the operation of the flow path solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down the flow path 650h3 (see FIG. 10B).

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the small hitting type is not A and B (that is, the small hitting type is C, D or E) (S602: No), an open scenario for Special Figure 2 is set (S606) ). Specifically, the opening scenario for the special view 2 indicates the setting of the opening pattern of the open / close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 and the staying member 650n. That is, it is shown that the operation of the V inlet solenoid 209a and the staying solenoid 209b is set so that the open / close door 650f1 and the staying member 650n are opened for a predetermined period during the small hitting game effect (see FIG. 11A). When the process of S 607 ends, the channel solenoid operation is set so that the V winning can be made (S 606). That is, the operation of the channel solenoid 209c is set so that the ball can flow down the channel 650h3 (see FIG. 11A).

  When the processing of S605 and S607 ends, the V-pass jackpot type corresponding to each small hit type is set in the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203m (S608). More specifically, based on the small hitting type and the special symbol 1 big hit selection table 202b1 or the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 acquired in the process of S601, the V passing jackpot type (big hit C to G) is determined. As described above, if the small hit type is A, it is determined that the big hit C (7 rounds short shorts big hit), and if the small hit type is B, it is the big hit D (2 rounds short hit non hit) Judgment, if the small hitting type is C, it is determined that the big hit F (5 round time short possession big hit), if the small hitting type is D, it is determined that the big hit G (10 round time short possession big hit) If the small hitting type is E, it is determined that the big hitting E (15 rounds short held big hit) (see FIG. 27 (b) or (c)).

  Next, the start of the small hit is set based on the small hit type (S609), and the small hit start flag 203j and the small hit middle flag 203k are set to ON (S610). Thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, the start winning information processing (S105) will be described. First, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). The start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and determines whether there is a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, When there is a start winning, various random number counters are acquired, it is the processing for executing the retention processing of the value.

  When the start winning process (FIG. 43, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S701). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S701: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S702) ). Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in the present embodiment) (S703).

  And if there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S701: No) or if there is a winning on the first entrance 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 4 If it is not less than (S703: No), the process proceeds to S707. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first entrance 64 (S701: Yes), and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the special symbol 1 holding The value (N1) of the ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, a ball holding ball number command (special figure 1 ball holding ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 ball holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S705).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S705, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3 and the small hit type updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above Each value of the counter C5 is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S706). In the process of S706, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, in the processing of S707 to S712, the same processing as that of the processing of S701 to S706 is also performed for the winning of the second ball entrance 640. The difference is that the second special symbol is subjected to the holding process with respect to the winning of the second entrance 640, and the other processes are the same, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined in the process of S707 that the ball has not won the second entrance 640 (S707: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S712 (S713). Thereafter, this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the prefetching process (S713) which is one process in the start winning process (see S105 in FIG. 43) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S713).

  In this pre-reading process (FIG. 44, S713), first, it is determined whether there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801). As a result of the determination, when there is no new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: No), the present process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if there is a new winning at the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S801: Yes), then it is determined whether the winning is the first special symbol (S802) ).

  In the process of S802, when it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S802: Yes), special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 1 jackpot selection table 202b1 and special symbol 1 small hit selection table 202e1 The lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hitting type are acquired based on (S803), and the process proceeds to S804. In the process of S804, a winning information command including the big hit determination result, the big hit type, the small hit determination result, and the small hit type acquired in S803 (or S805) is set (S804), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is the second special symbol in the process of S802 (S802: No), the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, the special symbol 2 big hit selection table 202b2 and the special symbol 2 small hit selection Based on the table 202 e 2, the lottery result, the jackpot type, and the small hitting type are acquired (S 805), the processing of S 804 is executed, and the present processing is terminated.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 40, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device and the electric motor accompanying the second ball entrance 640 It is a process for controlling the opening time of the bonus.

  In this normal symbol variation process (FIG. 40, S106), first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (second symbol) (S901). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is performed while the indication indicating the hit is made in the second symbol display device. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S901: Yes), the present processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is not inside the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S901: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902), and the second symbol display device If the display mode is not changing (S902: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holding the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S903). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S904), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S904: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S904: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S905).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S906). In the process of S906, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S907).

  Next, a lottery result is acquired based on the second hit random number table 202c (S908). In this control example, there is no distinction between the high probability state and the low probability state in the lottery of normal symbols, and the probability of being hit with the normal symbols is always constant. Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the process of S907 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 11", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "12 to 239", the normal symbol is off It is determined that is (see FIG. 26D).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the processing of S 908 is the hit of the normal symbol (S 909), and when it is determined that the symbol is the normal symbol (S 909: Yes) The display mode of is set (S910), and the process proceeds to the process of S912. In the process of S910, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol "o" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol).

  In the process of S909, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out (S909: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S911). In the process of S911, after the variable display in the second symbol display device is finished, the symbol “x” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of removal is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S912.

  When the process of S910 or S911 ends, in the process of S912, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol (S912). When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol (S912: Yes), the time-speaking hit flag 203q is set to ON (S913). Subsequently, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device is set to 3 seconds (S914), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S912: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 4 seconds (S915), and this processing is ended. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, in the time-shortened state of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short as "4 seconds → 3 seconds" in comparison with the normal state of the normal symbol, so the second The ball easily enters the ball entry port 640.

  On the other hand, in the process of S902, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S902: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed. (S916). In addition, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S914 or the process of S915 before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device.

  In the process of S916, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S916: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S916, if the fluctuation time of the currently executing fluctuation display has elapsed (S916: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S917). In the process of S917, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S910, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device (lighting display Set to be On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the process of S911, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed on the second symbol display device) in the second symbol display device. Is set as When the stop display is set by the process of S917, the second symbol display updating process (see S1708) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device is ended. Then, in the display mode set in the process of S910 or the process of S911, the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stop-displayed (lit-displayed) on the second symbol display device.

  Next, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device is started, the lottery result (this time lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol fluctuation processing (FIG. 45, S106) is the ordinary symbol It is determined whether it is a hit (S918). If the lottery result this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S918: Yes), the electric role control process is set (S919), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the motorized accessory control process (S919) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. The motorized prize control process (S919) is a process executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and FIG. It is the flowchart which showed S919).

  In the motorized prize control process, first, it is determined whether or not the time saving medium hitting flag 203q is on (S1001). If the time saving hit flag 203q is on (S1001: Yes), the time saving hit flag 203q is set off (S1002), and it is then determined whether the time saving is in progress (S1003). If the time is short (S1003: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal short time state of the symbol, the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened (3 seconds), closed The open state (3 seconds) is set (5 seconds) (S1004), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in S1001, if the time saving flag hitting flag 203q is not on (ie, off) (S1001: Yes), or if S1003 is not in time saving (S1003: No), pachinko machine 10 is a normal symbol The opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to open (0.1 seconds), close (0.1 seconds) and open (0.1 seconds). (S1005, the process ends.

  Thus, in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the opening operation of the second entrance 640 is "open (0.1 second), closed (0.1 second), open (0.1 second), compared to the normal state of the normal symbol. Since it becomes very long as 0.1 second) open (3 seconds), closed (5 seconds) open (3 seconds), the ball easily enters the second entry ball opening 640.

  Further, when the opening operation of the motorized combination 640a is set by the motorized combination control process (S919), the motorized combination opening / closing process (see S1706) of the main process (see FIG. 53) is executed next. , Opening and closing control of the motorized role is started.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37), and it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

  In the through gate passing process (FIG. 47, S107), first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101). Here, passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holding times of variable display in normal symbol) is acquired (S1102). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment) (S1103).

  If the ball passes the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 (S1101: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S1103: Yes), the normal symbol holding ball The value (M) of the number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S1104). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 Are stored in the area (S1105). In the process of S1105, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first holding area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. When the process of S1105 is completed, the general drawing pre-reading process is executed (S1106).

  Here, with reference to FIG. 48, the common drawing pre-reading process will be described (S1106). FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing the contents of this common view pre-reading process (S1106). In the routine drawing pre-reading process (FIG. 48, S1106), first, predetermination based on the value of the second hit random number counter C4 newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is executed (S1201). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 newly stored in the process of S1105 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c.

  Next, on the basis of the result of the pre-discrimination, a hit pre-discrimination result and a fluctuation time determination result are acquired (S1202). Thereafter, a common drawing winning information command is set (S1203), the present process is ended, and the process returns to the through gate passing process.

  Returning to FIG. 47, the description will be continued. When the common-figure look-ahead processing (S1106) is ended, it is then determined whether or not the present is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1107). As a result of determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1107: Yes), this processing ends. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1107: No), it is determined whether or not the present is a small hit (S1108). If the result of the determination is that the player is in a small hit (S1108: Yes), the present process ends.

  If it is not in the small hit (S1108: No), it is determined whether or not the second special symbol is changing (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the second special symbol is being changed (S1109: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. If the second special symbol is not in motion (S1109: No), it is determined whether or not the time is short (S1109). As a result of the determination, if the time is being saved (S1110: Yes), this processing ends. If the time is not short (S1110: No), an error command is set (S1111), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S1101: No) or the normal symbol holding ball number counter even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S1103: No), the common drawing pre-reading process (S1106) is skipped, the processes of S1107 to S1111 are executed, and this process is ended.

  Next, the V inlet passage processing (S108) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the V-inlet passage processing (S108) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37).

  In the V entrance passing process (S108), it is first determined whether a small hit is in progress (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S1301: Yes), a V entrance passing command is set (S1302), and the present process is ended. If it is not in the small hit (S1302: No), it is a case that the ball enters the second variable winning device 650 in spite of not being a small hit game, so set an error command (S1303), this processing Finish.

  The V entrance pass command set in the process of S1302 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the spheres that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for causing the display control device 114 to execute an effect based on the V entrance passage. In this way, it is possible to execute an effect in a small hitting game based on entering the second variable winning device 650 (see FIG. 12).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the V passage process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the V passage process (S109). This V passage process (S109) is a process executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  In the V-pass processing, first, the V-pass jackpot type value stored in the V-pass jackpot type storage area 203m is acquired (S1401), and the V flag 203n indicating the acquired V-pass jackpot type is set to ON (S1401) S1402). Then, a V passage command is set (S1403).

  Next, it is determined whether the small hitting type corresponds to the small hitting B (S1404). If it is determined in the process of S1404 that the small hit B is applicable (S1404: Yes), an error command is set (S1405), and the process ends. In this embodiment, it is small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than small hit B) that the ball can pass the V prize switch 650 e 3 of the second variable winning device 650, and the small hit type value It is only when small hit A, C, D or E (that is, other than small hit B) is set. Therefore, when the V passing process (S1401) executed based on the ball passing the V winning switch 650e3 is performed when the small hitting type value is the small hitting B, the V winning switch 650e3 is illegal. It is considered to be when the ball is won. In this case, by setting an error command in the process of S1405, an output of an error is executed, and a fraud can be detected.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S1501), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The NMI interrupt process described above is also executed by the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and the NMI interrupt process causes the RAM 213 to store power-off occurrence information in the RAM 213. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout etc., the blackout signal SG1 is outputted from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control under execution. Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 52, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S1601). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Subsequently, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a weight process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S1602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S1603).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S1604), and if it is turned on (S1604: Yes), the process proceeds to S1612. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605), and if not stored (S1605: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S1612 also in this case.

  If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S1606), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S1607: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process also proceeds to S1612 in such a case. As described later in the process of S1716 in FIG. 53, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S1612, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S1612). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start the payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S1613, S1614) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S1613, S1614) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S1613, S1614) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the occurrence of the power-off is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S1613, S1614), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S1613), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S1614). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S1610.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S1604: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S1605: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal (S1604: Yes) S1607: Yes), while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, clear the power-off occurrence information (S1608). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of driving power supply interruption is transmitted (S1609), and the process proceeds to S1610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and is in a state where it can start the payout control of the ball.

  In the process of S1610, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S1611), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each process of S1701 to S1709 is executed as a periodic process of 4 ms cycle, and the counter updating process of S1712 and S1713 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main process (see FIG. 53), first, while the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1701). Specifically, it determines the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 37), and if there is the winning detection information, corresponds to the winning ball number to the payout control device 111. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) and the start winning process (see FIG. 43) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. Also, the jackpot start command, the round number command, and the jackpot end command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 54) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when firing a ball, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch controller 112.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1702). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1703), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or A jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the 1 variable winning device 65 is executed (S1704). In the jackpot control process, the first specified winning opening 65a is opened for each round of the jackpot, and the maximum opening time of the first specified winning opening 65a has elapsed, or a predetermined number of balls have been won in the first specified winning opening 65a. Determine if Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the first specified winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the first specified winning hole 65a is repeatedly performed for a predetermined number of rounds. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1704) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be performed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  Next, when it is in the small hitting state of the special symbol, the small hitting control processing for opening or closing the open / close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed. S1705). In the small hit control process, the open / close door 650f1 is opened based on the open scenario, and it is determined whether the maximum open time of the open / close door 650f1 has elapsed or whether the ball has won a prescribed number in the open / close door 650f1. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the open / close door 650f1 is closed. In the present embodiment, the small hitting control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), but may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 37).

  When the process of S1705 is completed, the motor-operated part opening and closing process is performed to perform the opening and closing control of the motorized part 640a attached to the second entrance 640 (S1706). In the motorized part opening and closing process, the motored part is controlled when the motorized part opening / closing control start is set by the motorized part control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). Start opening and closing control of objects. Note that the opening / closing control of the motorized prize is continued until the opening operation set in the process of S1004 or the process of S1005 in the motorized article control process (FIG. 46, S1005) is completed.

  Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1707). In the first symbol display update process, S405, S410, S412 of the normal variation start process (FIG. 40, S302) or the time variation start process (FIG. 41, S303) executed in the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 39). When the fluctuation pattern is set by the processing of S505, S510, and S512, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B start the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern. In the present embodiment, of the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED until the fluctuation time has elapsed. Turn off the light and turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, the blue LED And turn on the red LED.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  Also, in the first symbol display update processing, the fluctuation set by the processing of S405, S410, S412 or the processing of S505, S510, S512 in the normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or the time-shortening fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 41) When the fluctuation time corresponding to the pattern ends, the fluctuation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is ended, and normal fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 40) or time-shortening fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 41) In the display mode set by the process of S404, S409, S411 or the process of S504, S509, S511, the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B (lighted).

  Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1708). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S914 or the processing of S915 of the normal symbol variation processing (refer to FIG. 45), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device . As a result, in the second symbol display device, the variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. In addition, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the processing of S 917 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45), the variation executed in the second symbol display device The display is ended, and the stop symbol (the second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device in the display mode set by the processing of S 910 or the processing of S 911 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 45). Do.

  Next, storage device control processing for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750 is executed (S1709).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1711) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1711: Yes), the process proceeds to S1701, and the above-described S1701 and subsequent processes are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1711: No), within the remaining time until reaching the predetermined time, ie, until the execution timing of the next main processing, (1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1712, S1713).

  First, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1712). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299, 239 in the present embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1702 (S1713).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1701 to S1709 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4 can be updated at random, and the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

  Further, in the process of S1710, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1710: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 51 has been executed, so that the process at the time of the power-off after S1714 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is inhibited (S1714), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1715). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1716), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1717), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  The process of S1710 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the change in the state of the game performed in S1701 to S1709, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of S1712 and S1713 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1701. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1701. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutdown, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are saved to the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, the stack pointer By setting the value to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1701. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, the jackpot control process (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1704). This jackpot control process (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, or the first This processing is for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203h is set to ON by the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the big hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1801, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF (S1802), and the opening command is set (S1803).

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display jackpot start command, an effect of starting a jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. When the process of S1803 ends, the storage cancellation flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1805). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the big hit medium flag 203i is on. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1805 (S1805: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set ( S1808). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the continued jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command according to the cumulative number of round numbers is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continued jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, the first variable winning device 65) In the case of winning a total of 10 pieces, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1809, when the closing condition of the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. , End this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the big hit end (S1811). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is finished, it is determined that it is the timing of the big hit end.

  In the process of S1811, when it is the timing of the big hit end (S1811: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S1812), and the big hit flag 203i is set off (S1813).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was a jackpot B (S1814). If it is determined in the process of S1814 that the jackpot is not B (7R: 7: 00) (S1814: No), the hour-time middle counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the jackpot is B (7R hour short nonstop) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped, and the process ends.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the special drawing prize information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command according to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an effect of jackpot end.

  Next, the small hitting control process (S1705) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the small hitting control process (S1705) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The small hitting control process (S1705) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the small hitting state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the small hitting, or This is a process for opening or closing the open / close door 650f1 of the variable winning device 650.

  In the small hitting control process, first, it is determined whether the small hitting of the special symbol is started (S1901). Specifically, if the small hit start flag 203j is set to ON by the process of S610 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 42), it is determined that the small hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1901, when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: Yes), the small hit start flag 203j is set to OFF (S1902), and the small hit start command is set (S1903).

  The small hit start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 is voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the small hit start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a small hit start command for display to the display control device 114. When the display small hit start command is received by the display control device 114, an effect of starting a small hit on the third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  When the process of S1903 is finished, the V inlet solenoid 209a and the flow path solenoid 209c are set to ON based on the open scenario (S1904), the operation of the retention member 650n is started (S1905), and the process is ended.

  The open scenario to be referred to in the process of S1904 is set in the small hit start setting process described above (see FIG. 42), and the open scenario of the V inlet solenoid 209a is set regardless of the small hit type. The open scenario of the solenoid 209 c is set only when the small hitting type is A, C, D or E. Therefore, the open / close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened in all the small hitting games, and it becomes possible to enter the ball into the second variable winning device 650. On the other hand, the ball entering the second variable winning device 650 can flow down to the special discharge flow path 650e2 only at the small hits A, C, D or E where the flow path solenoid 209c is turned on. That is, the small hit A, C, D or E is a small hit type to which a big hit is given, and the small hit B is a small hit type to which a big hit is not given.

  In addition, in the process of S1905, when the operation of the retaining member 650n is started (the retaining solenoid 209b is turned on), it is possible to cause one ball to stay in the distribution destination region 650h3.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1901, when it is not the timing when the small hit of the special symbol is started (S1901: No), it is determined whether the small hit of the special symbol is in progress (S1906). As a small hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the small hit of the special symbol (including the small hit of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, It includes the middle of the predetermined time after the small hitting game end of the special symbol. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the small hit middle flag 203k is on. In the process of S1906, when the small hit of the special symbol is not in progress (S1906: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in the process of S1906 that the small symbol of the special symbol is being hit (S1906: Yes), then it is determined whether the closing condition of the V inlet is satisfied (S1907). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 6.5 seconds) elapses after the open / close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is opened, or a predetermined number of balls are displayed on the second variable winning device 650 (for example, In the case of winning a total of 10 pieces, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  The closing condition may be that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the second specified winning opening 650a.

  In the process of S1907, when the closing condition of the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is satisfied (S1907: Yes), the V inlet solenoid 209a is closed to close the opening and closing door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650. It is set to OFF (S1908), and in order to end the operation of the retaining member 650n, the retaining solenoid 209b is set to OFF (S1909), and this processing is finished. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the open / close door 650f1 of the second variable winning device 650 is not satisfied (S1907: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the small hitting end (S1910). Specifically, it is determined that the small hitting end timing is reached after a predetermined time (3 seconds in this control example) elapses after the closing condition of the V inlet described above is satisfied. Thus, the small hitting end process (off of the flow path solenoid 209c) can be executed after the operation of the staying member 650n is finished, so the ball staying in the distribution destination area 650h3 is sent to the V pay switch 650e3. You can enter the ball surely.

  In the process of S1910, if it is the small hitting end timing (S1910: Yes), the small hitting middle flag 203k is set to OFF (S1911), the small hitting end process is executed (S1912), and each solenoid is opened. The scenario is cleared (S1913), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1910, when it is not the timing of the small hitting end (S1910: No), the present process is finished as it is.

  Here, the details of the small hitting end process (S1912) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the small hitting end process (S1912). The small hitting end process (S1912) is a process executed when it is determined in the small hitting control process that it is the timing of the small hit ending.

  In the small hitting end process (S1912), first, the channel solenoid 209c is set to OFF (S2001), and it is judged whether the V flag 203n is ON (S2002). In the process of S2002, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is on (S2002: Yes), it means that the ball passes the V prize switch 650e3 of the second variable prize device 650 during the small hitting game, so A process for starting the execution of the jackpot game based on the passage of the V winning switch 650 e 3 is performed.

  Specifically, the open scenario of the first specified winning opening 65a is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003), and the start of the jackpot is set based on the jackpot type corresponding to the V flag 203n (S2003) S2004). Next, the big hit start flag 203h and the big hit flag 203i are set on (S2005), and the V flag 203n is set off (S2006). Then, the hour and hour counter 230g is set to 0 (S2007), and the value of the V-pass jackpot category value stored in the V-pass jackpot category storage area 203m is cleared (S2008), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is not on in the process of S2002 (S2002: No), the small hit ball is the case where the ball does not pass the V prize switch 650e3, so no big hit is given. In order to end, the small hitting end command is set (S2009). After that, the processing of S2008 is executed, and this processing ends.

  The small hitting end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201 is voiced. It is transmitted to the lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the special drawing prize information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command according to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an effect of jackpot end.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the motorized product opening / closing process (S1706) will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the motorized product opening / closing process (S1706) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The motorized product opening / closing process (S1706) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for controlling the opening / closing of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640.

  In the motorized part opening / closing process, first, it is determined whether the opening operation of the motorized part 640a is set (S2101). The opening operation of the motorized combination 640a is set by the motorized combination control process (FIG. 46, S1005) executed in the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 45). In the process of S2101, when the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a is not set (S2101: No), this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the opening operation of the motorized combination 640a is set in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), it is then determined whether it is the first opening timing of the motorized combination 640a (S2102). If it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is the first opening timing of the motorized accessory 640a (S2102: Yes), the release of the motorized accessory 640a is set (S2103), and the present process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2102 that it is not the first opening timing of the motorized accessory 640a (S2102: No), it is next determined whether it is the first closing timing of the motorized accessory 640a. (S2104). If it is determined that it is the first closing timing of the motorized accessory 640a (S2104: Yes), the closing of the motorized accessory 640a is set (S2105), and then it is determined whether the time saving operation is in progress (S2106) ). If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time-saving operation is not being performed (S2106: No), this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S2106 that the time saving operation is being performed (S2106: Yes), a closing command is set (S2107), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the first closing timing of the motorized accessory 640a in the process of S2104 (S2104: No), it is next determined whether it is the second opening timing of the motorized accessory 640a. (S2108). If it is determined that it is the second opening timing of the motorized accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), the release of the motorized accessory 640a is set (S2109), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2108 that it is not the second opening timing of the motorized accessory 640a (S2108: No), then it is determined whether it is the second closing timing of the motorized accessory 640a. (S2110). If it is determined that it is not the second closing timing of the motorized accessory 640a (S2110: No), it is then determined whether the ball has entered the second ball entry port 640 (S2111). If it is determined that the ball has not entered the second entrance 640 (S2111: No), this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S2110 that it is the second closing timing of the motorized accessory 640a (S2108: Yes), and if it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 in S2111. (S2111: Yes), the closing of the motorized accessory 640a is set (S2112). Then, the setting of the opening operation of the motorized role product 640a is cleared (S2113), and the present process is ended.

  Next, the storage device control process (S1709) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a storage device control process (S1709) executed in the main process (see FIG. 53). The storage device control process (S1709) is performed in the main process (see FIG. 53), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the storage valve 750a associated with the storage device 750.

  In the storage device control process, first, it is determined whether the value of the release counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not larger than 1 (that is, 0 or 1) (S2201: No), it is then determined whether the storage release flag 203p is on (S2202) If it is determined that the switch is on (S2202: Yes), storage cancellation (that is, opening of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2203). Then, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 1, and the process proceeds to the process of S2205. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2201 that the value of the release counter 203pa is larger than 1 (S2201: Yes), the processes of S2201 to S2204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S2205.

  In the process of S2205, it is determined whether the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205). If it is determined that the value of the release counter 203pa is not 25000 (S2205: No), the value of the release counter 203pa is incremented by 1 (S2206), and this process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2205 that the value of the release counter 203pa is 25000 (S2205: Yes), storage closure (that is, closure of the storage valve 750a) is set (S2207), and the storage cancellation flag 203p is set. It is set to off (S2208). Next, the value of the release counter 203pa is set to 0, and this processing ends.

<About control processing of voice lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 70. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 59, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S3119 (see FIG. 60) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current startup process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S3002). As described later with reference to FIG. 60, when receiving the power-off command from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 60), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S3119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S3119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S3002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S3119 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword "55AAh" is written by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S3119 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. If it is started, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process moves to S3008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S3002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S3119, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3119 is performed (see S3118 in FIG. 60). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3119 is performed, the process of S3008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). The permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to the main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110.

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S3008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S3004 through S3006 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in this case (S3008: No), S3009 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S3010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). Next, interrupt permission is set (S3011), and the process proceeds to main processing.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S3009 is that, when the process of S3008 is performed via the processes of S3004 to S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the startup processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the present S3101 process is executed (S3101), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S3101: No), the process proceeds to S3112 without performing the process of S3102 to S3111. In the processing of S3101, it is the processing relating mainly to display (rendering) S3102 to S3111 to determine whether 1 ms has elapsed, while it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3112, the variation display setting process of S3113, the effect state setting process of S3114, and the specific effect setting process of S3115 in a short cycle. Since the process of S3112 is executed in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S3113 in a short cycle, On the basis of this, it is possible to make settings relating to the variable effect without delay. In addition, the processing of S3114 is executed in a short cycle, so that the display of the third symbol display device 81 is changed without delay to the display content corresponding to the current gaming state based on the command received by the command determination processing. It can be done.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3111 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S3102) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S3104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update process, a process of lighting a hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S3107). This frame button input monitoring and effect processing monitors the input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed to enhance the effect, and corresponds to the case where the input of the frame button 22 has been confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect. In this process, when the player's operation of the frame button 22 is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3109, a liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. In addition, the sound editing / output processing of S3109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the counter update process (S3111), a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main control apparatus 110 (S3112). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  Next, the process proceeds to the process of S3113. In the process of S3113, the variable display setting process is executed (S3113). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S3114. In the process of S3114, an effect state setting process is executed (S3114). In this effect state setting process, each effect mode (the display mode of the third symbol, the display mode of the holding symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is for setting the effect state to correspond to the game state. Processing is executed, and a display effect state command is generated and set based on the set effect state. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this effect state setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S3114 is finished, the process proceeds to S3115. In the process of S3115, a specific effect setting process is executed (S3115). In this specific effect setting process, a process for setting an effect different from the fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common drawing) is executed. The details of the specific effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the specific effect setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off process is executed (S3119). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3120), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of occurrence information of power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the command determination processing (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S3112). This command determination process (S3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for

  In the command determination process (FIG. 61, S3112), first, the first command received from the main control device 110 among unprocessed commands is read out and analyzed from a command storage area (not shown) provided in the RAM 223, It is determined whether a variation pattern related command has been received (S3201). The variation pattern related command is a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol or a command for notifying a variation pattern (variation time) of a normal symbol, and from the main control device 110 The selected variation pattern (variation time) is output corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, or the normal symbol.

  When it is determined in the process of S3201 that the variation pattern related command has been received (S3201: Yes), the variation pattern related process (S3202) is executed. The variation pattern related process is used to extract a variation pattern based on a variation pattern related command (received) output from the main control device 110 and cause the display control device 114 to execute an effect display. Here, the variation pattern related process (S3202) will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation pattern related process (S3202). In this variation pattern related process (S3202), it is a process to determine which variation pattern command the variation pattern command received this time corresponds to, and to execute processing corresponding to the received symbol based on the determination result. . In this variation pattern related process (S3202), it is determined whether the variation pattern related command received this time is a variation pattern command for a special symbol (special figure) (S3301). If it is determined in the process of S3301 that the command is a special pattern fluctuation pattern command (S3301: Yes), the process proceeds to S3302.

  If it is determined in the process of S3302 that the variation pattern command for Special Drawing 2 is (S3302: Yes), first, as shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is the variation pattern command for Special Figure. (S3301). Here, it is determined whether the variation pattern received this time is the variation pattern command for Special Figure 2 (S3302), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command for Special Figure 2 is (S3302: Yes), The special variation flag 223s is set to ON (S3303), the special drawing variation start flag is set to ON, and the variation pattern is extracted from the received command (S3305), while the special pattern 2 variation pattern command is set. Be done.

  The variation start flag 223d (variation start flag for special drawing) provided in the variation display of the special symbol is set to ON, the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S3305), and the present process is ended. . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that the fluctuation pattern related command received this time is not the special drawing fluctuation pattern command, the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223u is set to ON (S3306), and the received fluctuation pattern The variation pattern type is extracted from the command (S3307), and this processing ends. The variation pattern type extracted here is the variation pattern type of the special symbol in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 every type of special symbol (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol, ordinary symbol). It is stored in a distinguishable format, and in the variable display setting process described later (see FIG. 66), the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol for the display control device 114 and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol It is used when notifying (when setting a variation pattern command for display of a special symbol).

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3201 that the variation pattern related command has not been received (S3201: No), it is determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3203). If it is determined that the stop type command (any one of the special figure 1 stop type command, the special figure 2 stop type command, and the normal drawing stop type command) has been received (S3203: Yes), it corresponds to the received command type The stop type selection flag 223e is set to ON (S3204). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the first special symbol is set to ON, and the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special When the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the symbol is set to ON, and the common drawing stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223e corresponding to the normal symbol is set to ON.

  When the process of S3204 is finished, next, the stop type (completely out (out), reach out, small hit, big hit (per)) is extracted from the received stop type command (S3205), and this process is executed. finish. The stop type extracted in the process of S3205 is stored in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. The variable display setting process (see FIG. 66), which will be described later, is referred to, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the change effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S3203 that the stop type command has not been received (S3203: No), it is determined whether the ball holding ball number command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S3206). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S3206: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 included in the received hold ball number command, the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e Of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the variable sphere of the second special symbol is extracted, corresponding to the extracted counter value, provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 The counter value is updated (S3207). More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e When a value is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c.

  In the process of S3207. When a normal symbol holding ball number command indicating a normal symbol holding ball number is received, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter (that is, the holding ball number of the variation display of the normal symbol) not shown is extracted and extracted The corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 is also updated according to the calculated counter value.

  When the process of S3207 is finished, a pending ball number related process is executed (S3208). In the holding ball number related process (S3208), a process for setting various flags and display commands based on the number of holding balls in the special figure 2 is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 63, the holding ball number related process (S3208) will be described in detail. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pending ball count related process (S3208).

  When the holding ball number related process (S3208) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is an update of the special ball 2 (special figure 2) number of holding balls (S3401). Here, when it is determined that there is no update of the special ball 2 holding ball number (S3401: No), that is, when the holding ball number command received this time is not the number of holding balls of special figure 2, this processing is ended as it is . On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that there is an update of the special 2 holding ball number (S3401: Yes), it is next determined whether the special 2 holding ball number has been updated to 1 (S3402). Here, it is determined whether the special 2 reserve ball number has been updated to 1, that is, the special 2 reserve ball number has transitioned from “0” to “1”, that is, from a state without special 2 hold ball to a state Do.

  If it is determined in the process of S3402 that the special 2 suspension ball number has been updated to 1 (S3402: Yes), the special 2 suspension flag 223n is set to ON, and then the termination effect execution flag 223x is set to ON It is determined whether it has been done (S3404). When it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the end effect (see FIG. 19 (b)) is executed by the third symbol display device 81. (S3404: Yes), a display win command is set (S3405), and the process ends.

  When the display win command is set, the word "win" is displayed as a result of the finish effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 20A), which is advantageous for the player. It is informed that the condition is going to continue. In addition, when the ball is won in the special figure 2 during the period when the end effect is being executed, the effect may be switched even in the middle of the end effect, as described in this embodiment, it is determined in advance. The special figure 2 may be notified that the ball has won a prize at the end of the end effect to be executed for the specified period.

  In addition, as in the present embodiment, the timing at which the ball has won special figure 2 (second entry ball opening 640), and notification that the ball has won special figure 2 (second entry ball opening 640) as an effect When there is a possibility that a time lag may occur between the timing of the game and the game, for example, the holding symbol displaying the number of holding balls in the special figure 2 may be deleted during the termination effect execution period. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being notified of the effect result of the end effect due to the increase in the number of holding balls in the special view 2 despite the fact that the end effect is continuing.

  Referring back to FIG. 63, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3402 that the special 2 ball holding ball number is not updated to 1 (S3402: No), it is next determined whether the special ball 2 holding ball number is updated to the upper limit (4) (S3406 If it is determined that the update has been made (S3406: Yes), the special hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S3407: Yes), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that the special 2 ball holding ball number is not updated to the upper limit, the process of S3407 is skipped and the present process is ended.

  Here, the ball holding ball number command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 when the ball passes through the first entry ball opening 64 or the second entry ball opening 640 (start winning combination) or the through gate 67. The main control device of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c by the processing of S2210 every time there is a start winning. The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e can be respectively adjusted. Therefore, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is different from the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 or the special Even if it is out of alignment with the value of the symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e, if the holding ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 or the special symbol The value of the 2 holding ball number counter 223c can be corrected to match the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  If it is determined in the process of S3206 that the ball holding ball number command has not been received (S3206: No), it is determined whether a winning information related command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3209). If it is determined in the process of S3209 that a winning information related command has been received (S3209: Yes), a winning information related process is executed (S3210). In the winning information related process (S3210), setting of various flags and setting of various counters to be referred to for setting various effects performed by the third symbol display device 81 are performed. Thereby, based on the lottery result of the special symbol being held, before the fluctuation of the special symbol being held is started (that is, the special symbol being executed before the fluctuation of the special symbol of the object) During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect indicating the lottery result of the special symbol to which the prize information command has been transmitted, and to the player using the lottery display of one special symbol using a plurality of variable symbol display periods. Suggestive notification can be made, and the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the winning information related process (S3210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the winning information related process (S3210). When the prize information related process (S3210) is executed, it is first determined whether the prize information related command received this time is a prize information command related to a special figure (special symbol) (S3501). If it is determined that it is a prize information command related to the special figure (S3501: Yes), the received prize information command is stored in the special figure prize information storage area 223a (S3502), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3501 that the prize information related command received this time is not the prize information command for the special figure (special symbol) (is the prize information command for the common figure) (S3501: No), The information is stored in the common game winning prize information storage area 223t (S3503), and the present process is ended.

  In the game machine where the special symbol winning information (special symbol pre-reading) and the normal symbol winning information (general symbol pre-reading) are executed, the main control unit 110 outputs the sound lamp control unit 113. When the output timing of each winning information command is the same and it is determined by the winning information related process (S3210), a priority is provided for each winning information command, and only the winning information commands having high priority are determined. It may be configured as follows. As a result, it is not necessary to execute different determination processing for each winning information command, and the processing load can be reduced, and the type and number of winning information commands determined by the audio lamp control device 113 are irregular. Thus, it is possible to easily execute an unintended presentation by the player.

  That is, the winning information included in the winning information command is acquired when the ball enters each ball entry port (the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640) or the through gate 67 by the main controller 110. The voice lamp control device 113 is a result of previously determining each counter value before the lottery based on the entry is performed, or information indicating a value based on the counter value. Since there is no hindrance to the game even if the player does not acquire the prize information command reliably, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the special drawing prize information command and the common drawing prize information command are received at the same time In this case, the above-described effect is achieved by intentionally not acquiring one of the winning information commands. Furthermore, as in the case of the first left ball entrance 64a and the first right ball entrance 64b of the present embodiment, in the configuration in which there are a plurality of acquisition conditions (enter ball) for one symbol (first special symbol), winning is achieved. Information that allows the voice lamp control device 113 to identify which acquisition condition is based on the establishment of the acquisition command is included in the information command, and based on the identification result, processing based on the prize information command May be varied. Specifically, for example, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a winning information command based on entering the left first entrance 64a, an effect based on the received winning information command (so-called, pre-reading effect) May be performed more frequently than in the case of receiving a prize information command based on entering the ball into the right first ball entrance 64b. Thereby, even if it is the same 1st special symbol, the frequency by which pre-reading effect is performed can be varied easily. According to the configuration shown in the above-described example, during the game aiming at the left first ball entrance 64a (left-handed game), it is possible (previously can be performed) to perform pre-reading effect based on the first special symbol. During the game aiming at the entrance 64b (right-handed game), it is also possible to make pre-reading effect based on the first special symbol difficult to execute (can be performed with low probability). As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode according to the gaming state.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3209 that a winning information related command has not been received (S3209: No), it is next determined whether a winning related command has been received (S3211). When the hit related command is received (S3211: Yes), the hit related process (S3212) is executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 65, the hit related process (S3212) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the hit-related process (S3212). The hit-related process (S3212) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a hit-related command has been received.

  In the hit-related processing, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S3601). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S3602), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect indicating (informing) the start of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S3603). If it is determined in the process of S3603 that the round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter (S3604). After that, a round number command for display is set based on the round number accumulation counter (S3605), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3603 that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether the big hit end command has been received (S3606). If it is determined in the process of S3606 that a big hit end command has been received (S3606: Yes), a big hit end command for display is set (S3607), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3606 that the big hit end command has not been received (S3606: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command has been received (S3608).

  If it is determined in the process of S3608 that the small hitting start command has been received (S3608: Yes), the small hitting display start command is set based on the small hitting type (S3609), and the process ends. If it is determined in the process of S3608 that the small hitting start command has not been received (S3608: No), it is determined whether the small hitting end command has been received (S3610).

  If it is determined in the process of S3610 that the small hitting end command has been received (S3610: Yes), a small hitting end command for display is set to execute an effect that suggests the small hitting game is over (S3611) , End this process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3610 that the small hitting end command has not been received (S3610: No), it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received (S3612).

  If it is determined in the process of S3612 that the V passage command has been received (S3612: Yes), a process based on entering the ball into the V winning switch 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 is executed, and a V passage command for display Are set (S3613), and the process ends. In this embodiment, the measuring means for measuring the number of receptions of the V-pass command during the period in which the consecutive-meal flag 223i is set to ON is provided, and for display corresponding to the number of times of measurement by the measuring means. The V passage command is configured to be settable. Specifically, the display V passage command is set such that the privilege effect is executed only when the number of times of measurement by the measurement means exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). As a result, the player can aim for more V passes, and it is possible to play the game eagerly.

  Other conditions may be set as the conditions for setting the content of the V-pass command for display, for example, the number of small hitting games which did not pass V and the number of small hitting games which V passed. A means for measuring and calculating the ratio may be provided, and the content of the display V passage command may be set based on the ratio calculated by the means. In this way, a player who has many small hit games that do not pass V is made to perform an effect to congratulate the player when V passes, or a player who runs V at low percentage of small hit games In response to that, you can execute an effect to bless that effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S3612 that the V passage command has not been received (S3612: No), this process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 61, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S3211 that a hit-related command has not been received (S3211: No), it is next determined whether a notification command has been received (S3213). If it is determined in the process of S3213 that a notification command has been received (S3213: Yes), a notification voice is set, a display command for notification is set (S3214), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3213 that the notification command has not been received (S3213: No), it is determined whether the status command has been received (S3215). If it is determined that a status command has been received (S3215: Yes), status information based on the received status command is stored in the status storage area 223k (S3216), and this processing is terminated. In addition, as a state command received here, a normal state command for indicating that the gaming state is the normal state, a jackpot state command for indicating that the gaming state is the jackpot state, and a small hitting state of the gaming state The small hitting state command to indicate that it is, the short time state command to show that the gaming state is the short time state, that the electric role thing 640a is operating, and how many times it has operated And a state command related to a game state that can be grasped on the main control device 110 side.

  The above-described state command is configured to be received from the main control device 110 when the gaming state is shifted. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load by suppressing the process of determining the content of the received state command from being complicated. When a power failure or the like occurs and the data in the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is erased, the status command currently set in the power failure recovery process is output. Note that the output timing of the status command is not limited to this, and the gaming status currently set may be periodically output, or the gaming status does not shift, and the specific output condition is satisfied. The state command may be output in a case (for example, a timing at which a predetermined round is reached during a jackpot game, or a timing at which the number of times of variation of a special symbol reaches a predetermined number in a normal state). As a result, it is possible to more reliably grasp the current gaming state on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3215 that the status command has not been received (S3215: No), then the process according to the other commands is executed (S3217). In the process of S3217, for example, it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received from the main control unit 110, and when it is determined that the stop command has been received, the display stop command is set based on the received command. When the ball entry command set based on the ball entering the ball entry port provided on the board 13 is received, the ball entry number is accumulated for each type of ball entry port into which the ball entered the ball. , And execute processing for setting a ball entry number command for display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the variable display setting process (S3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S3113). The variation display setting process (S3113) is one process of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 66) is a process executed to display variation display effects in the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, in the present embodiment, each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, popular figure) corresponding to the main symbol displayed mainly in the third symbol display device 81 according to the effect state being set is It is designed to be variable. In the variation display setting process, a variation pattern command for display is set for each of the above-described symbols, and the display control device 114 is notified of this. Then, based on the display variation pattern command received by the display control device 114 and the content of the received display effect state command, the main symbol (symbol displayed in the first display area Dm) and the subordinate symbol (second symbol) The effect display corresponding to the symbol to be displayed in the display area Dn is configured to be displayed. As a result, in the gaming machine in which different effect displays corresponding to a plurality of effect states are performed, the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S3113), first, it is judged whether or not the special drawing fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3701). When it is determined that the special drawing fluctuation start flag 223d is off (S3701: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S3707. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special drawing fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S3701: Yes), the detailed aspect of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 The respective processes of S3702 to S3706 for determining the

  More specifically, first, the special drawing fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (S3702), then, the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S3703), and it is determined whether the time saving flag 223g is ON (S3702) S3704). If it is determined in the process of S3704 that the time saving flag 223g is on (S3704: Yes), then the time saving flag is set off (S3705), and the variation pattern command for special view display is set ( The process shifts to the processing of S3706) and S3707. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3704 that the hour-shortening flag 223g is not on (is off) (S3704: No), the process of S3705 is skipped and the process of S3706 is executed.

  In addition, when executing the process of S3706, 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol holding ball number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b or special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c, and it is subtracted from the value Based on this, the data for the special drawing winning information storage area 223a included in the command storage area is shifted.

  In the process of S3707, it is determined whether the flag indicating the stop type of the special view among the stop type selection flags 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3707). When it is determined that the flag indicating the stop type of the special view out of the stop type selection flag 223e is off (S3707: No), the process proceeds to S3712. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3707 that the flag indicating the stop type of the special view out of the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S3707: Yes), the (for special view) stop type selection flag 223e is turned off. Is set (S3708), and then the stop type extracted in the process of S3205 of the command determination process (see FIG. 61) is acquired (S3709), and the acquired stop type is set as it is (S3710). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S3711). Thereafter, the common drawing variation display setting process (S3712) is executed, and the present process is ended.

  The common drawing fluctuation display setting process (S3712) is a process executed to display the fluctuation display effect in the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation pattern command concerning the common drawing fluctuation is received from the main control device 110. Here, the common drawing variation display setting process (S3712) will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the contents of the common drawing variation display setting process (S3712). When the common drawing fluctuation display setting process (S3712) is executed, first, it is determined whether the common drawing fluctuation start flag 223u is set to ON. Then, if it is determined that the common drawing variation start flag 223u is off (S3801: No), since it is in a state of not receiving the fluctuation pattern command related to the common drawing from the main control device 110, the process proceeds to S3810. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223 u for common drawing is on (S 3801: Yes), the detailed aspect of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110 The respective processes of S3802 to S3810 for determining the

  Of the various types of processing performed in the common view fluctuation display setting processing (S3712) in FIG. 67, the portions where the same processing as the fluctuation display setting processing (S3113) described with reference to FIG. The detailed description is omitted.

  If it is determined in the process of S3801 that the general drawing variation start flag 223u is on (S3801: Yes), S3702 and S3703 for special drawing that are executed in the above-described variation display setting process (S3113). The processing of S3802 and S3803 in which the target is changed to a common drawing is executed for the processing, and then it is determined whether the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command is executed is a short time state (S3804). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k and the short remaining time period information stored in the short time remaining period storage area 223h.

  In the process of S3804, when it is determined that the fluctuation start timing is in the short time state (S3804: Yes), next, the timing at which the fluctuation based on the received fluctuation pattern command ends (in the case of a hit, the motorized jackpot 640a It is determined whether or not the timing for setting the operation content of (1) is in the short time state (S3805). Here, the difference between the time remaining period information stored in the time remaining period storage area 223 h and the fluctuation time included in the acquired fluctuation pattern is calculated to determine the presence or absence of the time reduction state at the timing when the fluctuation ends. Do.

  In the process of S3805, when it is determined that the fluctuation end timing (motor operation product 640a operation start timing) is short (S3805: Yes), the common drawing effective flag 223q is set to ON (S3806) and then the fluctuation It is determined whether the end timing is within 2 seconds of the short end (S3807). If it is determined in the process of S3807 that the variation end timing is within 2 seconds of the time reduction end (S3807: Yes), the exchange flag 223v is set to ON (S3808), and the display variation pattern command ) Is set (S3810), and the process proceeds to S3811.

  On the other hand, if it is determined No in the process of S3804 or S3805, the common drawing effective flag 223q is set to OFF (S3809), and the process proceeds to the above-described process of S3810. If it is determined in the process of S3807 that the variation end timing is not within 2 seconds of the time saving end (S3807: No), the process of S3808 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3810.

  Next, the processing of S3811 to S3815 similar to the processing of S3707 to S3711 described above with reference to FIG. 66 is executed, and this processing ends. The processing to be executed in S3811 to S3815 is that the target of the stop type command is the stop type command for the special view in S3707 to S3711, and the stop type command for the generic view in S3811 to S3815. The other contents are the same except for the difference, so the detailed description will be omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the effect state setting process (S3114) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect state setting process (S3114). The effect state setting process (S3114) is a process for setting an effect state according to the state command output from the main control device 110 and the current game situation, and the effect state set in this process is set to By outputting information based on the display (reproduction state command for display) to the display control device 114, the display mode of each symbol (special figure 1, special figure 2, common drawing) on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The display mode of the number of reserved memories (number of reserved symbols) of each symbol is configured to be displayed in the display mode corresponding to the effect state.

  When the effect state setting process (S3114) is executed, first, the state information (playing state) stored in the state storage area 223k is read (S3901). This state information is stored in the state storage area 223k based on the state command received from the main control unit 110 in the command determination process (see S3112 in FIG. 61) described above. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 side is used to determine the current gaming state.

  Next, with reference to the state information stored in the state storage area 223k, it is determined whether the present (state information stored in the state storage area 223k) indicates the start of a big hit (S3902). Here, when it is determined that the start of the jackpot is determined (S3902: Yes), the continuous-state flag 223i is set to ON (S3903), and the process proceeds to S3918. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start of the jackpot is not indicated in the process of S3902 (S3902: No), it is then determined whether the end of the jackpot is indicated (S3904).

  If it is determined in the process of S3904 that the end of the jackpot is indicated (S3904: Yes), it is then determined whether to shift to the time saving state after the end of the jackpot (S3905). The determination in S3905 is made based on the jackpot type information stored in the state storage area 223k. If it is determined in the process of S3905 that the mode shifts to the time saving state (S3905: Yes), the time saving flag 223g is set to ON (S3906), and then the process shifts to the process of S3918.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the shift to the time saving state is not made in the process of S3905 (S3905: No), the consecutive villain flag 223i is set off (S3907), and the bonus effect execution flag 223w is set off (S3908), The end effect execution flag 223x is set to off (S3909), and the process shifts to the process of S3918.

  If it is determined that the end of the jackpot is not indicated in the process of S3904 (S3904: No), it is next determined whether it is the timing when the time saving state ends (S3910). If it is determined that it is the timing when the time saving state ends (S3910: Yes), then the special hold flag 223n for determining the presence / absence of the hold storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is set on It is determined whether it has been done (S3911). Here, when it is determined that the special hold flag 223n is not on (is off) (S3911: No), the continuous-in-state flag 223i is set to be off (S3912), and the process proceeds to the processing of S3918. Also, when it is determined that the special hold flag 223 n is set to ON (S3911: Yes), similarly, the process proceeds to S3918.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, the continuous-running flag 223i is set to ON, and when the time saving state is not given after the jackpot end, or when the time saving state ends, When the pending storage is “0”, it is configured to set the consecutive-in-suspension flag 223i to off. Thus, while the jackpot game is in progress, the time saving state, and the state in which the variation (lottery drawing) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is executed when transitioning from the time saving state to the normal state is repeatedly performed. (During a specific period that is advantageous to the player), it is possible to continuously set the continuous-duration flag 223i on. Therefore, by measuring various values (for example, the number of times a jackpot has been executed, the number of balls obtained, etc.) during the period in which the consecutive villa flag 223i is turned on, various values in the consecutive scenario mode can be easily obtained. The process can be simplified in the pachinko machine 10 having a continuous play mode in which transition to a plurality of different gaming states can be performed.

  Referring back to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the process of S3910, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the time saving state ends (is not the time saving end timing) (S3910: No), it is determined whether it is the small hitting start timing (S3913). If it is determined that there is (Yes at S3913), it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S3914). If it is determined in the process of S3914 that the current state is the normal state (S3914: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to ON (S3915), and the process proceeds to the process of S3918. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3914 that the current state is not the normal state (the time saving state) (S3914: No), the process of S3915 described above is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3918.

  In the process of S3913, when it is determined that the present is not the small hit start timing (S3913: No), next, it is determined whether the present is the small hit end timing (S3916), the small hit end timing (S3916: Yes), the pseudo effect flag 223r is set to OFF (S3917), and the process proceeds to S3918. Here, if it is determined that the small effect end timing is the state where the pseudo effect flag 223r is not set to ON (that is, the end timing of the small hit performed during the time saving state), S3917 It transfers to the process of S3918 without performing a process.

  When it is determined in the process of S3916 that the present is not the small hitting end timing (S3916: No), the process proceeds to the process of S3918. In the process of S3918, the current rendering state is selected based on the rendering state selection table 222b (S3918). Then, a display effect state command indicating the selected effect state is set (S3919), and this processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the specific effect setting process (S3115) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the contents of the specific effect determining process (S3115). The specific effect setting process (S3115) is a process for setting a display command for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display a specific effect when the specific condition is satisfied.

  In the first embodiment, the bonus effect to be executed when the number of reserved memories (number of reserved balls) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reaches the upper limit (four) during the time saving state (see FIG. 21) And, during the time saving state, when the second special symbol (special figure 2) is not stored as reserved, the remaining time of the time saving state (the variation remaining period of the special figure 1) becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds) The end effect (see FIG. 19B) to be executed is executed as a specific effect.

  When the display control device 114 receives the display command indicating the content of the specific effect, the display mode corresponding to the received specific effect content regardless of the fluctuation display state of each symbol (whether or not it is in the process of fluctuation). Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  When the specific effect setting process (S3115) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the continuous-running flag 223i is set to on (S4001), and the continuous-running flag 223i is not set to on (set to off) (S4001: No), this process is ended as it is. If it is determined that the consecutive villain flag 223i is set to on (S4001: Yes), then it is determined whether the benefit effect execution flag 223w is set to on (S4002), and is set to on If it is determined that there is not (S4002: No), it is determined whether the special hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003).

  In the process of S4003, when the special hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON (S4003: Yes), the privilege for display effect command is set (S4004), and the bonus effect execution flag 223w is set to ON (S4005) ), End this processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special hold upper limit flag 223p is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4003: No), or in the processing of S4002, the bonus effect execution flag 223w is already set to ON. If it is determined that it is (S4002: Yes), the process proceeds to S4006.

  In the process of S4006, it is determined whether the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006). Here, when it is determined that the end effect execution flag 223x is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4006: No), it is then determined whether the special hold flag 223n is set to ON. If it is determined that the special hold flag 223n is not set to ON (set to OFF) (S4007; No), it is determined whether the short time remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008). ).

  In the process of S4008, the information indicating the short remaining time stored in the short remaining time storage area 223h is read out and the determination is executed. In the process of S4008, when it is determined that the short time remaining period is 10 seconds (S4008: Yes), the display continuous rendering end effect command is set (S4009), and the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4010) ), End this processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4006 that the end effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S4006: Yes), or the special hold flag 223n is set to ON in the process of S4007 (S4007) Yes) skips the processing of S4008 to S4010 and ends the present processing as it is.

  As described above, in the specific effect setting process (S3315) of the present embodiment described with reference to FIG. 69, as the first specific effect, the state in which the consecutive villain flag 223i is set to ON When the special hold upper limit flag 223p is set to ON during (time saving state) (when the number of held memories in the special view 2 reaches the upper limit), a benefit effect (see FIG. 22) is executed. There is. By executing this bonus effect, it is possible to provide the player with a high added-value effect, and therefore, it is possible to cause the player to actively play the game in the time saving state. In addition, when the special effect production is executed, because the common figure main design Dmc is not displayed, the state where it is not possible to increase the number of reservation memory of special figure 2 (the number of reservation memory of special figure 2 reaches the upper limit already In the second state), it is possible to suppress the effect of hitting the ball into the second ball entry port 640, and it is possible to suppress giving the player a large sense of discomfort.

  Furthermore, since the above-mentioned bonus effect is configured to be continuously executed until the consecutive flag flag 223i is set to OFF (until the consecutive mode ends), an added value is added to the player. Can be provided for a long period of time (at least the period until the number of reserved memories in Special Figure 2 is fully consumed), so high-value-added effects are completed in a short period of time and the player's willingness to play Can be reduced.

  In addition, as the second specific effect, while holding the flag for continuous loaf 223i is set to ON (time reduction state) without acquiring the storage for holding of the special figure 2 (the number of reserved storage for special figure 2 is " End condition (refer to FIG. 19 (b)) which suggests that the continuous mode will end when the remaining period of the time saving state becomes a predetermined period (10 seconds remaining). Configured to be run. By this configuration, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the possibility that the continuous mode will end, and the period advantageous to the player (continuous mode) will end before noticing Can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the counter updating process (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the contents of the counter updating process (S3111). This counter updating process (S3111) is a process for updating the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j and calculating the elapsed time (remaining time) of the executed fluctuation display. Information on the remaining time (short time remaining period) of the fluctuation time referred to here is output to the display control device 114 and displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The audio lamp control device 113 is referred to when setting the effect content.

  When the counter update process (S3111) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the current fluctuation time counter 223j is "0" (S4101). If it is determined that it is "0" (S4101: Yes), that is, the state in which the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not updated (the special figure 1 fluctuation during time saving state is not executed), next, It is determined whether the current time is in a short time (in a short time state) (S4102). Here, the determination is made based on the state information stored in the state storage area 223k.

  If it is determined in the process of S4102 that the current time is short (S4102: Yes), then it is determined whether it is time to start fluctuation of the special figure 1 (S4103). If it is determined that it is the timing at which fluctuation starts (S4103: Yes), the value of fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "1" (S4104), and the remaining fluctuation time is determined based on the value of fluctuation time counter 223j. A period (time-short remaining period) is calculated, and information indicating the calculated short-time remaining period is stored in the time-short remaining period storage area 223h (S4105).

  Thereafter, a display time short remaining period command is set (S4106), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current time is not short (in the short time state) in the process of S4102 (S4102: No), or when it is determined that the current is not the start timing of the special figure 1 change in the process of S4103. In (S4103: No), the processing of S4104 to S4106 is skipped and the present processing ends.

  When it is determined in the process of S4101 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is not "0" (S4101: No), that is, the state in which the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j has already been updated. In the state where the fluctuation is being executed), it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223 j is “150000” (whether 150 seconds have elapsed) (S 4107). Here, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223 j is not “150000” (“less than 150000”) (S 4107: Yes), “1” is added to the value of the fluctuation time counter 223 j (S 4108) Then, the process proceeds to the process of S4105 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4107 that the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is "150000" (S4107: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is set to "0" (S4109). Transfer to processing.

  In the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of Special Figure 1 executed during the time saving state is all defined as "150 seconds" regardless of the lottery result of Special Figure 1. As shown, the upper limit of the value of the fluctuation time counter 223j is "150000" corresponding to "150 seconds", but the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of Special Figure 1 executed during the time saving state is divided into a plurality of fluctuation patterns ( In the pachinko machine 10 configured to be selected from the fluctuation time), the upper limit value of the fluctuation time counter 223 j can be reset based on the content of the fluctuation pattern to be executed (the fluctuation time to be set). It may be configured to determine whether the value of the fluctuation time counter 223 j under update has reached the set upper limit value.

<Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Embodiment>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 84. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in the present embodiment. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is made to be able to execute various controls on the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S5101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S5103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S5001 in FIG. 71). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 71) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process is finished.

  As described above, when the boot process (S5001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 72, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S5102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the top of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S5101. And after repeating the process of S5102 several times including the process of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described where in the first program storage area 234d1 a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored among the boot programs. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process starts, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S5103 to S5105 without performing the processes of S5101 and S5102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process is finished, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S5003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S5004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S5004, next, the simplified image display flag 233c Is turned on (S5005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 82A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed to transfer (see S6502 of FIG. 82A).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. Thereby, in the meanwhile, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)), it is simplified so that the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image (not shown), which are power-on images, are drawn. The command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)) are executed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) to the first ball entrance 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110 When it is through the device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the power on fluctuation image (not shown) is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and a simple fluctuation effect is performed. be able to. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S5005, the interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Thus, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 (a) is a flowchart showing the command interruption process. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 73 (b), the V interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 73 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 36) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interruption process, as shown in FIG. 73 (b), it is first determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so it is not a power-on image (not shown) but a normal effect. In order to display an image on the third symbol display device 81, a command determination process (S5302) is executed, and then a display setting process (S5303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S5302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78.

  In the display setting process (S5303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S5304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S5303) or the simple display setting processing (S5309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 continuously receives a continuous notice command and a rear image change command from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the back image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S5304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S5305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by processing of S5307, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol, for example. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (for example, big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, reach out completely) , And the stop type table corresponding to the chance eye) and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S5309) is executed. Transfer to processing.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 78, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S5302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

  In this command determination processing, as shown in FIG. 74, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is not an unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S5303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S5402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S5403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command in the unprocessed commands (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S5405), the process returns to the process of S5401.

  Here, the details of the fluctuation pattern command process (S5405) will be described with reference to FIG. 75 (a). FIG. 75 (a) is a flowchart showing fluctuation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the variation pattern command process, first, the effect state stored in the effect state storage area 233k is read out (S5501). Then, among the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to the fluctuation rendering pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the rendering state read out by the processing of S5501 is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table It is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5502).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern with the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in the present embodiment, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5502 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5503). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table judgment flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S5502 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5504). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S5503. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5502, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S5505), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S5506). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S5507), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By performing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S5506, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S5502. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S5503. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S5505, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the display pattern command processing according to the present embodiment, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 (display contents based on the display variation pattern command output (received) from the audio lamp control device 113 So that the display contents (display pattern of each symbol, number of display of number of symbols of each symbol) corresponding to the display state command for display (received) from the audio lamp control device 113 is determined when determining). Configured. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 15-22, the display suitable for each presentation state can be performed. Further, the display control device 114 discriminates the display effect state command and the display change pattern command, and the sound lamp control device 113 corresponds to each effect state to execute processing for determining the display content. There is no need to set the display variation pattern command, and the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, in the variation pattern command processing, the display content corresponding to the effect state is determined, and the determined display content is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but other than that As the configuration, the display processing described above is executed on the display contents corresponding to all the rendering states based on the display variation pattern command, and among them, only the display contents corresponding to the rendering state currently set are the player It may be configured to be visible on the screen. Specifically, a display layer is provided corresponding to each effect state, and processing for transmitting layers other than the layer corresponding to the set effect state is executed, or the effect state is set. Place the layer corresponding to on top. Thus, even when the display state is changed while the display based on the variation pattern command is being executed, and the display content is changed, it is possible to respond promptly. In addition, an area (for example, the second display area Dn) in which the common display content is always displayed regardless of the effect state to be set is displayed on another layer, and the effect state command for display is referred to. Instead, the display content may be determined only by the fluctuation pattern command.

  Here, the description will return to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406), If there is a display variation type command (S5406: Yes), a stop type command processing is executed (S5407), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front and back outreach, reach other than back and forth out, complete out, chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command Is determined (S5601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter updated each time V interrupt processing (see FIG. 73 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device Finally, the stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is set (S 5602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S5603), and ends this type-of-stop command processing and returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S5304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S5603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, but before drawing is performed in the third symbol display device 81, the normal video from the character ROM 234 is used. Image data necessary for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236. Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, high drawing responsiveness in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained.

  It should be noted that, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, therefore, command determination processing is executed. In the case where two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, there is no possibility, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously displayed for display It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S5601, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, the stop type is assumed to be completely out, and the stop type is determined. Determine the table. Thereby, the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set by the processing of S5602.

  Temporarily, if the stop symbol corresponding to "the big hit of the special symbol" is set, in fact, even if it is "the removal of the special symbol", the "special symbol" in the third symbol display device 81 The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, causing the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become the "big hit of the special symbol", which may lower the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, if the stop symbol corresponding to complete removal is set as in the present embodiment, in fact, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", stop of complete removal on the third symbol display device 81 Even if the symbol is displayed, the player can be pleased because the pachinko machine 10 is "the jackpot of the special symbol".

  Here, the description will return to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5406 that there is no display type command for suspension (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5408), If there is an image change command (S5408: Yes), a back image change command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 76A, details of the rear image change command processing (S5409) will be described. FIG. 76 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S6503) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set on (S5701) . Then, among the back surface image determination flags provided for each of the back surface image types (back surfaces A to C), the back surface image determination flag corresponding to the back surface image type indicated by the back surface image change command is turned on The rear image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to off (S5702), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S5701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S5702. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  In addition, in task processing, when it is specified that the rear surface type of the rear surface image specified in the display data table is to display any of the rear surfaces A to C, the rear surface image discrimination flag set in S5702 The rear image type to be displayed at the time is specified, and further, the range of the rear image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the rear image is stored For the video RAM 235 or for the normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more rear image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set as appropriate according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, the description will return to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5408 that there is no rear image change command (S5408: No), it is then determined whether or not there is an error command in the unprocessed commands (S5410). For example (S5410: Yes), an error command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the details of the error command process (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S5801). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S5802). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S5801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S5802, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in S5802, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, the description will return to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S5410 that there is no error command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display effect state command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display effect If there is a state command (S5412: YES), effect state information based on the received command is stored in the effect state storage area 233k (S5413), and the process returns to S5401.

  Here, the description will return to the explanation of FIG. When it is determined in the process of S5412 that there is no display effect state command (S5412: No), it is determined whether or not there is a win related command (S5440). If it is determined in the process of S5440 that there is a hit related command (S5440: Yes), a hit related command process is executed (S5441), and the process returns to the process of S5401. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5440 that there is no hit related command (S5440: No), the other command process is executed (S5414), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

  In the processing of S5401 executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes ), The processing of S5402 to S5413 and S5419 is executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5413 and S5419 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if it is determined in S5401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this process is performed. The command determination process ends.

  In the simplified command determination process (S5308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 73B), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image (not shown), that is, the display variation pattern command and the display Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 75 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 75 (b)) which are processes corresponding to the respective commands are executed. With regard to the command of, the processing corresponding to the command is discarded without being executed.

  Here, in the variation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 75A) executed in this case, in the processing of S5501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power-on is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233b, and the process of clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, the details of the hit related command process (S5441) will be described with reference to FIG. The hit related command process (S5441) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a hit related command in the command determination process (see FIG. 146).

  In the hit related command processing (S5441), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command (S5901). If it is determined in the process of S5901 that there is a display start command (S5901: Yes), the jackpot start command process is executed (S5902), and the process proceeds to S5903.

  Here, the details of the jackpot start command process (S5902) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (a). FIG. 78 (a) is a flowchart showing the jackpot start command processing (S5902). This jackpot start command process (S5902) is a process that is executed when it is determined that there is a jackpot start command for display in the win-related command process (FIG. 77), and a third effect that indicates the start of the jackpot is displayed. This processing is for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot start command processing (S5902), first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the command (for example, corresponding to the jackpot type) is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6001). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the big hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6002). Thereafter, based on the jackpot start display data table, time data is set to the clock counter 233h (S6003), the pointer 233f is initialized (S6004), and the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set off (S6005) This process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5901 that there is no display jackpot start command (S5901: No), the process proceeds to S5903. When the process of S5901 or S5902 ends, it is determined whether there is a display round number command (S5903). If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is a display round number command, the round number command process is executed (S5904), and the process shifts to the process of S5905.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S5904) will be described with reference to FIG. 78 (b). FIG. 78 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing (S5904). The round number command process (S5904) is a process executed when it is determined that the display round number command has been received in the hit related command process (FIG. 77), and the round number in the jackpot game is updated. Is a process for causing the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect when playing a game.

  In round number command processing (S5904), first, a round number display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6101). Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared (S6102), and based on the round number display data table, time data is set in the clock counter 233h (S6103). After that, the pointer 233 f is initialized (S 6104), the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S 6105), and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5903 that there is no display round number command (S5903: No), the process proceeds to S5905. When the process of S5903 or S5904 is completed, it is determined whether or not the display jackpot end command has been received (S5905).

  If it is determined in the process of S5905 that there is a display jackpot end command (S5905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S5906), and the process moves to S5907.

  Here, the details of the jackpot end command processing will be described. This jackpot end command process (S5906) is a process that is executed when it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (FIG. 77), and a third effect that indicates the end of the jackpot game is displayed. This processing is for displaying on the symbol display device 81.

  In the jackpot end command processing (S5906), first, a jackpot end display data table corresponding to the command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the big hit end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF, and the process ends.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5905 that there is no display jackpot end command, the process of S5906 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5907.

  When the process of S5905 or S5906 is finished, it is determined whether there is a small hitting start command for display (S5907). If it is determined in the process of S5907 that there is a small hitting start command for display (S5907: Yes), the small hitting start command process is executed (S5908), and the process proceeds to the process of S5909.

  Here, the details of the small hitting start command process (S5908) will be described. This small hit start command process (S5908) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit start command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), which suggests the start of a small hit game. This processing is for displaying the effect on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hitting start command process (S5908), first, the small hitting start display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the transfer data table buffer corresponding to the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Thereafter, time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit start display data table, the pointer 233f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF, and the process is ended.

  Referring back to FIG. 77, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S5907 that there is no display small hitting start command (S5907: No), the process of S5908 is skipped and the process proceeds to S5909.

  When the process of S5907 or S5908 is finished, it is determined whether there is a small hitting end command for display (S5909). If it is determined in the process of S5909 that there is a small hitting end command (S5909: Yes), the small hitting end command process is executed (S5910), and the present process is finished.

  Here, the details of the small hitting end command process (S5210) will be described. This small hit end command process (S5210) is a process executed when it is determined that the small hit end command has been received in the hit related command determination process (see FIG. 77), and the small hit game end is suggested. Processing for displaying the effect to be played on the third symbol display device 81.

  In the small hitting end command process (S5210), first, the small hitting end display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d. Next, the transfer data table buffer 233e is cleared, and time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the small hit end display data table. Thereafter, the pointer 233 f is initialized, the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S5303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 79, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, off (S6201: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S6202 to S6204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S6205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed earlier, and the new command flag is set to off (S6202). The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S6203, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S 6203: Yes), a warning image setting process is executed (S 6204).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is developed (S6301).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, it is necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle Determine various parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off in the process of S6203 (S6203: No), the process proceeds to S6205.

  At S6205, pointer update processing is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S 6401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S6401, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information (S6402). As a result, if it is the End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is the demonstration display data table (S6403). If it is the demonstration display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S6405), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6403 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S6406), this processing ends, and returns to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S6402: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S6206 together with the warning image etc. expanded earlier, and the display coordinate position for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as zoom ratio and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S6209).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S6209: Yes), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S 6210), and then the contents are cleared by writing the null data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e (S 6211). Then, time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S6214), the contents of the stop symbol determination flag are directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S6215) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. Further, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 into the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233b to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. Regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the fluctuation effect to be performed next. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S5304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S6215, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, if the finalized display flag is not on but off in the process of S6209 (S6209: No), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is on (S6216). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S6216: Yes), this means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The contents are set in the buffer 233 d (S 6217), and then the null data is written in the transfer data table buffer 233 e to clear the contents (S 6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), and a demonstration display flag indicating that demonstration is being performed in the on state is set on (S6221), this processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect is not received after the finalized display effect is finished, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can set the drawing contents.

  In the process of S6216, if the demonstration display flag is on (S6216: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to the V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  Also in the simplified display setting process (S5309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interruption process (see FIG. 73B), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simplified display setting process, the power-on-time fluctuation image according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect due to the power-on time fluctuation image ends A process of setting a display data table that specifies to stop and display (not shown) in the display data table buffer 233 d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S5305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 82 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S6502) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S6501, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 82 (b), a resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114, will be described. FIG. 82 (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

  In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S6601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6602). In the process of S6602, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, when it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S6602 (S6602: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to S6603. Also, as a result of the process of S6601, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to S6603.

  In the process of S6603, it is determined whether all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S6603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6603: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set so as to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S6603, if all resident target image data have been transferred (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 73 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 73 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 73 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 74 to 78) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 79 to 81) are performed, drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed on the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 83) (see S6501: No in FIG. 82A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 83, a normal image transfer setting process (S6503) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S6701). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S6702), and if it is transfer data information (S6702: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( In step S6703, the transfer start flag is set in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the on state, and the process proceeds to step S6705.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S6702 (S6702: No), the processes of S6703 and S6704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

  In the process of S6706, after the transfer instruction of the image data is set to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing is not completed by the processing of S6706 (S6706: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this normal image transfer setting processing is performed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S6706: Yes), the process moves to S6707. Also, as a result of the process of S6705, even when the image data transfer instruction is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S6705: No), the process moves to S6707.

  In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer in the process of S6703 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6717. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), it is then determined whether the back image change flag is on (S6713). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S6713: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S6713: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S6714), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as transfer target image data (S6715). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The top address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S6716), and the process proceeds to S6717.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S6715, when the back image determination flag in the on state is of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S6717, it is determined whether the transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6717). The determination in the process of S6717 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S6717 (S6717: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6717 (S6717: Yes), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6718). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S6718, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6719), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, when the change of the back image is performed based on the reception of the back image change command in the command determination process executed earlier by executing the normal-use image transfer process, the back image The image data not stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in the above can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the details of the drawing process (S5306) described above which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 59 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305) (S6801). That is, in the process of S6801, from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S5304), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. The parameters necessary for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated with the identified storage RAM type and address. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and drawing object buffer information specified by the drawing object buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S 6802). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing processing and the display processing are simultaneously processed in parallel. be able to.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S6802, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S6803). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. Every time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 73 (b)) is performed, it is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is determined whether or not the state of the starting opening provided on the gaming board is changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter There is one to execute the first lottery. In such a conventional game machine, the lottery performed by the game ball entering the start opening in a state easy to change to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed In the gaming machine which is set continuously, the probability that the determination that the lottery is in favor of the player is executed while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored early There was a problem that it would end up with.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment described above, the holding memory of the special view 2 which is advantageous to the player is acquired during the period in which the variation of the special view 1 is executed during the time saving state. The period of time that can be played can improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machines in which lottery of a plurality of symbols is executed, there is a gaming machine which notifies the player by displaying symbol display for showing the lottery result on the display means (the third symbol display device 81). There is a problem that a plurality of symbols are variably displayed at a proper timing, and it is difficult for the player to understand the contents of the game.

  On the other hand, in the first embodiment, among the third symbols corresponding to the plurality of symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a symbol which the player is most interested in the current gaming state, ie, Since the symbols which can most affect the game result are displayed more emphatically than the other symbols, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  Further, in the above-described first embodiment, a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) that is advantageous to the player according to various gaming states (normal state, time saving state, jackpot state, etc.) set. It is configured differently. As a result, it is possible to change the contents of the game while grasping the current game state for the player, and it is possible to suppress the game from becoming more monotonous.

  In the first embodiment, since different game characteristics can be provided according to the type of special symbol variation to be executed when shifting to the time saving state, suppressing that the player gets bored early in the game Can.

Second Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 85 to 92, a pachinko machine 10 according to a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol fluctuates once during the time saving state, the short state ends at that time, and when the first special symbol fluctuates, the second special symbol is changed. Was configured to capture pending memory of

  And, when the change of the first special symbol in the time saving state is finished, if the second special symbol of the pending memory is acquired, then the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is executed, and the change The jackpot game is executed based on (lottery drawing), and after the jackpot game is over, it shifts to the time saving state again, while when the variation of the first special symbol in the time saving state is finished, the second special symbol If the pending storage could not be acquired, it was configured to shift to the normal state as it is.

  In the first embodiment configured as described above, since the end timing of the time saving state is the end timing of one variation of the first special symbol, the player can easily predict the timing at which the time saving state ends. There is a problem of that. Also, in order to make it difficult for the player to predict, it is necessary to be able to set a plurality of different fluctuation times with respect to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is increased. There was a problem that I let it go.

  Further, in the first embodiment described above, if the holding memory of the second special symbol can be acquired at the end of the fluctuation of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, the state advantageous to the player continues and can be acquired. If it is not, it is a playability that is easy for the player to understand that the state advantageous to the player ends, but on the other hand, there is a problem that the playability becomes monotonous and the player gets tired early.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided to make it difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the time saving state. Specifically, the case where the change (lottery) of the first special symbol is performed twice or the change (lottery) of the second special symbol is performed once is set as the termination condition of the time saving state .

  By configuring in this manner, when the second special symbol is not reserved for storage at the time when the first special symbol of the first rotation (first and second rotation) in the short time state is finished changing, the time is short A change (lottery) of the first special symbol of the second rotation in the state is executed. On the other hand, if the second special symbol has been reserved for storage at the end of the first special symbol of the first rotation (time reduction 1 rotation) during the time saving state, the second special stored on hold. A change in symbol (lottery) is executed.

  Therefore, in the time saving state, when the variation of the first special symbol in the first rotation of time saving is finished, the case where the game property of acquiring the holding memory of the second special symbol is continued, and the holding memory of the second special symbol The case where the used fluctuation (lottery drawing) is executed can be provided according to the pending storage situation of the second special symbol.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state is configured to be selectable from a plurality (two). Therefore, the time saving state period (the fluctuation period of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state) can be diversified by the combination of a plurality of change patterns, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, since the time saving state period is set by the combination of a plurality of fluctuation patterns, when preparing a plurality of fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol in the gaming machine with one time-saving as in the first embodiment described above. In comparison, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  In addition, in the second embodiment, the time saving state is configured to end when the variation (lottery draw) of the second special symbol is performed once. Thereby, for example, when the variation of the second special symbol is performed in the first time rotation, the small hit which is won is performed when the small hit which is not most advantageous to the player (when the ball is passed through the specific area) If the number of rounds of the jackpot game is smaller than other small hits), play the game so as not to let the specific area pass the ball and then execute the second round of the second round of the second round of the second round to be executed It is possible to prevent a special game such as executing a game aiming at fluctuation of being played.

  In addition, when the variation (lottery) result of the first special symbol in the first time rotation is a small hit, the small hitting game is executed after the end of the variation in the first special symbol in the first rotation. Since time saving state is maintained during this small hitting game (because time shortening end condition is not satisfied), the game characteristic which acquires the retention memory of the 2nd special symbol during the small hitting game period, 2nd variable winning a prize device A plurality of game characteristics such as the game characteristics of causing the ball to enter 650 and passing the ball to the specific area (V winning switch 630) can be a period in which the game can be performed simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with novel playability, and to suppress prematurely getting bored with the game.

  In addition, as shown in the first embodiment described above, when the special symbol variation starting to fluctuate during the time saving state is finished as the ending condition of the time saving state, the special symbol variation for the first time reduction is Since the small hitting game to be executed after ending is lost in the short time state, it is not possible to provide the game for acquiring the holding memory of the second special symbol during the small hitting game.

  Also, in the second embodiment, a first variation pattern (time-saving state) in which the player can execute a game in which the second special symbol is acquired as a holding memory as a variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol during time saving state. (A fluctuation pattern longer than the common drawing fluctuation time) and a second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the common drawing fluctuation time in the time saving state) in which it is difficult to play the game for acquiring the second special symbol It is configured to be selectable. By configuring in this manner, for example, when the second variation pattern is selected twice in a row, the time saving state is not substantially imparted (a game for acquiring the retention memory of the second special symbol during the time saving state Short time is given), the first variation pattern is selected twice in a row, there is a high probability that the advantageous storage time of the second special symbol can be acquired during the short time state with an advantageous advantage. Status is granted. In addition, when the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern are respectively selected, the time saving state in which the pending storage of the second special symbol can be obtained is given.

  That is, based on the variation pattern of the first special symbol executed during the time saving state, since the acquisition expectation degree of the second special symbol in the time shortening state can be made different, the player is provided with a game having a surprising property can do. In addition, even if it is configured such that the time saving state is provided after all the big hit games are finished without preparing the big hit type that shifts to the time saving state after the end of the big hit game and the big hit type that does not shift to the time saving state. Based on the selection result of the variation pattern of the special symbol, it is possible to set a substantial time saving state rush ratio, so it is possible to suppress an increase in storage capacity by preparing a plurality of jackpot types.

  In addition, by preparing a plurality of variation pattern selection tables for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol during the time saving state, by referring to different variation pattern selection tables based on the gaming state and the gaming situation, Substantial short-term rush rates can be made more diverse.

  The configuration used in the second embodiment (a configuration using a plurality of time saving end conditions) may be used for a gaming machine having game characteristics other than the second embodiment, and for example, a small hit of the second special symbol is won When some small hitting classifications are set among a plurality of small hitting classifications set at a time, a small hitting impossible game in which the ball can not pass (difficult) through the specific area (V prize switch 630e3) is executed May be used in such gaming machines.

  Also, in the second embodiment, the number of times of change (lottery) is set to two as the ending condition of the time saving state based on the change (lottery) of the first special symbol, but more than that may be set. . In addition, the number of times the number of changes (lottery) of the first special symbol and the number of changes (lottery) of the second special symbol may be set as the termination condition of the time saving state, Normal pattern fluctuation number and special symbol fluctuation (lottery) results, and various prizes provided to pachinko machine 10 (motorized symbol 640a, first variable winning device 65, second variable winning device 650, etc.) The termination condition of the time saving state may be set on the basis of the operation status (the presence or absence of the operation, the number of operations).

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the partial configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Is a process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 85 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen in the time saving state. Here, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 85 (a), points different from the above-described first embodiment (points different from the display content of FIG. 15 (a)) will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 85 (a) is an example showing a display screen in a state in which the second special symbol is not obtained as a pending storage at the end of the first rotation. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), at the end of the first rotation, the second special symbol is not obtained as a hold storage (a display showing the number of hold symbols in the special view 2 main hold symbol display area Dm5 If not, then, the first special symbol fluctuation (lottery) is started as the fluctuation of the second rotation. Here, a fluctuation pattern of 150 seconds is set as the fluctuation pattern of the second rotation in time reduction, and for the display of “remaining time 0 seconds” displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds, “+150 seconds” is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time. The display of “150 seconds” is a display for showing the fluctuation time of the second rotation.

  Then, in the first main display area Dm, the characters "still" are displayed as a continuation notification display mode indicating that the game for acquiring the suspension storage of the special view 2 is continued. By displaying such a display screen, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to know how long the time saving state (the gaming state in which the game for acquiring the holding memory of special view 2 is executed) will continue. It is possible to play the game with hope until the end.

  It should be noted that the “remaining time” displayed in the sub display area Ds1 is before the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation of the time reduction first rotation becomes “0”, that is, during the special figure 1 fluctuation of the short time rotation A value indicating a part or all of the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation that can be the second rotation may be added and displayed. In this case, if the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation of the first time reduction is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) and addition display is executed only when the pending storage of special figure 2 is not acquired. Good. As a result, even if the remaining time is reduced, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  On the other hand, at the time when the time reduction first rotation is finished, the game is performed to acquire the reservation memory of the special figure 2 as the special figure 1 fluctuation of the time reduction second rotation, which is not obtained When a difficult second fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern shorter than the spread pattern fluctuation time in the short time state) is selected, the display in which the remaining time is added as shown in FIG. The display screen shown in FIG. 20 (b) of the first embodiment (display of the time saving state end display) is displayed. In this case, the special view 1 variation of the time-short second rotation is performed during the period when the time-saving state end display is being performed.

  That is, when the second variation pattern described above is set, since the time saving state is substantially finished, the time saving 2 is performed on the third symbol display device 81 despite the time saving state. When the special view 1 change of the rotating eye is executed, the time saving state end display is displayed. In this way, it is possible to notify the player of the end timing not to the end timing of the internal gaming state (time reduction state) but to the gaming state in which it is possible to acquire the hold storage of the special view 2. An easy-to-understand game can be provided.

  In addition, special figure 1 fluctuation of the second time of time reduction is executed during the period when the end of time reduction display is displayed, and the number of reserved symbols of special figure 1 which decreases when the second rotation of time short is performed (hold Since the number of memories) is displayed in the second display area Dn of the third symbol display device 81, it can be made difficult for the player to notice.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the display timing indicating the end of the time saving state is made different based on the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol selected during the time saving state. If the player can not be provided with an advantageous gaming state even during the time saving state internally, a display indicating the end of the time saving state is executed. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. In the second embodiment, the second variation pattern in which it is difficult to execute the game for acquiring the reserve storage of the special figure 2 (a variation pattern shorter than the common drawing variation time in the time saving state) is set internally Even if the time is short, it is assumed that the player can not give a favorable gaming state, but otherwise the spread map fluctuation time is longer than the remaining period of the time cut state (at the end of the spread map fluctuation Even in the case where the time saving state ends), even if the time saving state is internally, it is determined that the player can not give an advantageous gaming state, and a display indicating the end of the time saving state is executed. It is also good.

  Next, the display screen in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation in the first time reduction is a small hit will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 (b) to 86 (b). FIG. 85 (b) is an example showing a display screen in a state in which the special figure 1 wins a small hit and the special storage 2 for one special figure is stored at the time when the first hour reduction is finished. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the first display area Dm, the special display 1 main symbol Dma is stopped and displayed at “341” which is a stop display mode indicating that the small symbol is won, and the main hold symbol display In the area Dm5, a display mode indicating that there is one pending storage of Special Figure 2 is displayed.

  Then, “remaining time 0 seconds” is displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 indicating that the special view 1 fluctuation of the first rotation is completed, and is further displayed in the first sub-display area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. "+60 seconds" is displayed as a display mode for adding the remaining time to the display of "remaining time 0 seconds" being displayed. The display of “60 seconds” is a display for showing the game time of the small hitting game executed based on the small hitting win of the special figure 1.

  That is, although the details will be described later, in the second embodiment, when the variation (lottery drawing) of special figure 1 is executed twice or the variation (lottery drawing) of special figure 2 is executed once, It is set to end the state, and when the fluctuation (lottery drawing) of the special view 1 shown in FIG. 85 (b) is executed once, the end condition of the time saving state is not satisfied. Therefore, the time saving state is continued during the small hitting game executed by the small hitting winning of the special figure 1. Thereby, even in the state in which the reserve storage of Special Figure 2 is acquired, the reserve storage of Special Figure 2 can be further acquired while the small hitting game is executed.

  As described above, the player can play the game period in which the ball can be entered into the second variable winning device 650 which is opened by the small hit game and the game for obtaining the reserved memory of the special view 2 simultaneously. In the first display area Dm, “Charge combo activated” is displayed as a special game period notification mode for notifying to.

  Then, when the small hit game is executed, as shown in FIG. 86 (a), the main display symbol Dmc is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and the game in which the reserve memory of the special view 2 is acquired is To be executed. Furthermore, in the case of a small hit where the ball can pass through the specific area (V prize switch 650e3), the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game when the small hit game executed in the small hit of the special figure 1 is a specific area (V prize switch 650e3) Then, as shown in FIG. 86 (b), "V" is displayed in the first display area Dm, and the jackpot game is started.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Second Embodiment
The second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 87A is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 in the second embodiment. The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the special pattern 1 fluctuation pattern table 202d4 defined in the fluctuation pattern table 202d are partially changed. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted. Although details will be described later, the ending conditions of the time saving state are also different.

  The special pattern 1 time variation pattern table 202d4a (see FIG. 88) of the second embodiment is the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired with respect to the special pattern 1 hour variation pattern table 202d4 of the first embodiment described above. The difference is that different variation patterns (variation times) are set based on the above.

  Specifically, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 is any of “off”, “small hit”, and “big hit”, the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is “0 to 99”. A fluctuation pattern of 120 seconds is set, and in the case of "100 to 198", a fluctuation pattern of 0.5 seconds is set. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the game contents in the time saving state largely different depending on the selected variation pattern.

  FIG. 87B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the second embodiment. A special variation flag 203r is added to the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second embodiment with respect to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The special variation flag 203 r is a flag for indicating that the special figure 2 variation has been executed during the time saving state, and if it is set to ON, the special figure 2 variation is to be executed during the short time It is shown. This special variation flag 203r is determined to be the special figure 2 in the time variation start processing 2 (S303 in FIG. 91) which is executed in the special symbol variation start processing (see S213 in FIG. 39). In the case (S551 in FIG. 91: Yes), it is set to ON (see S522 in FIG. 91) and referred to in the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 90) (see S2301 in FIG. 90) After setting the value to "0", it is set to off (see S2303 in FIG. 90).

  Thus, at the start of the special figure fluctuation, the result of determining which fluctuation is to be executed in special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stored (the corresponding flag is set to ON), At the timing when it is determined whether to end the state, it is determined whether to end the time saving state (whether or not the time saving state end condition is satisfied) based on the stored determination result. It is possible to properly manage the current gaming state and the type of the special figure fluctuation performed during the time saving state.

  In the second embodiment, the type of the special symbol (special figure) determined at the timing when the variation (lottery drawing) of the special figure is started is determined, and the result of the determination is stored by storing the determination result. Although it is configured to be able to determine whether or not to end the time saving state at the variation end timing, other configurations may be used. For example, when the variation (lottery drawing) of the special figure is started, this time It is determined whether or not the time saving state ends at the timing when the variation ends, and storing the determination result enables control to end the time saving state based on the determination result at the special figure fluctuation end timing. Determine the type of special figure fluctuation (type of special figure fluctuation used for fluctuation) executed this time at the fluctuation end timing of special figure, and control for ending the time saving state based on the judgment result To run It may be.

Regarding Control Processing in Second Embodiment
The control processing in the second embodiment is different from the first embodiment in the contents of the control processing in the main control device 110 and the audio lamp control device 113. The other processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  Here, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the second embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (refer to FIG. 89) with respect to the first embodiment, and the time short to be executed in the special symbol variation process 2 (refer to FIG. 89) End discrimination processing (refer to FIG. 90) is added, time change start processing is further changed to time reduction change start processing 2 (refer to FIG. 91), and big hit control processing is changed to big hit control processing 2 (refer to FIG. 92) Is different.

  First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S104) will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol variation process 2 (S104 in FIG. 89) is different from the special symbol variation process of the first embodiment described above in that the lottery result of the special symbol variation is out and the value of the time counter 23g is 1 or more In the case of (S224: Yes), the difference is that the time saving end determination process (see S251 in FIG. 89) is executed, and the other configurations are the same, so the description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, the contents of the special symbol variation processing 2 (see S104 in FIG. 89) described with reference to FIG. 90 will be described. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the contents of the time saving end determination process (see S251) according to the second embodiment. The time saving end determination process (see S251) is to execute control for determining the end state of the time saving state in the second embodiment having a plurality of end conditions of the time saving state.

  When execution of the time saving end determination process (S251 in FIG. 90) is started, first, it is determined whether the special change flag 203r is set to ON (S2301 in FIG. 90). In S2301, when the special variation flag 203r is set to ON, that is, when the variation of the special figure 2 is executed (S2301: Yes), the time saving end condition of the special symbol is satisfied at that time Therefore, next, set the value of the counter of the hour / minute counter 203g to "0" (S2303), set the special change flag 203r to off (S2302), and set the special change flag 203r to off. This process ends.

  On the other hand, when the special variation flag 203r is not set to ON in the process of S2301 (S2301: No), the time saving counter 203g is then decremented by 1 (see S2304), and the process is ended.

  FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) used in the second embodiment. At this time, in the short change start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91), the type of the special figure change to be executed this time is the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 with respect to the short time change start process of the first embodiment described above. The process for determining is added, and the other contents are the same. Description of the same content is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 91, when the time saving variation start process 2 (see S303 in FIG. 91) is executed, the same processes of S501 and S502 as the time saving variation start process are executed. When the process of S502 is finished, next, it is determined whether the current variation is the special figure 2 (S551). If it is determined that the current variation is the special figure 2 (S551: Yes), the special variation flag 203r is set to ON (S552), and the process proceeds to S503. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S551 that the current variation is not the special view 2 (the special view 1) (S551: No), the process of S552 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S503. Then, the processing of S503 to S512 that is the same as the time saving variation start processing is executed, and this processing ends.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the value of the counter 203g is reduced by one each time fluctuation of the special figure other than special figure 2 (ie, fluctuation of the special figure 1) is executed. When the value of the middle counter 203g becomes 0, the time saving state is terminated, and the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is executed to forcibly set the value of the time saving middle counter 203g to 0, thereby reducing the time saving state. There are two time saving condition ending conditions for ending.

  This makes it possible to execute the variation (lottery drawing) of the special figure 1 multiple times during the time saving state, and the number of times the variation (lottery drawing) of the special figure 2 is performed during the time shortening state is one (one) Can be

  Next, with reference to FIG. 92, the jackpot control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) in the second embodiment will be described. The big hit control process 2 (S1704 in FIG. 92) is different from the above big hit control process only in that the number of shorting times given to some big hits after the big hit ends is changed from once to twice. The other contents are the same.

  About the same content, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 2 (S704 in FIG. 92). As shown in FIG. 92, when the present process is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 that are the same as the above-described jackpot control start process are executed. Then, when it is determined in the process of S1814 that the jackpot type is not "B or D" (S1814: No), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to "2", and this process is ended.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, a plurality of short time state termination conditions for ending the short time state are prepared, and further, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation during the short time state is a plurality of variation patterns It is configured to select from time). This makes it possible to diversify the game in the time saving state and to suppress the player from being bored with the game early. Specifically, when the ratio of selecting the jackpot type to which the time-saving state is given after the jackpot end is fixed, the short fluctuation pattern is continuously selected as the fluctuation pattern (variation time) selected during the time-shortening state In this case, it becomes difficult to obtain the reserve storage of the special figure 2 substantially despite the fact that the time saving state is given. As described above, it is possible to vary the substantial short time state rush ratio according to the selection result of the variation pattern (variation time) of the selected special drawing 1 variation.

  In the second embodiment, the time reduction number is set to 2 as the time reduction state, and the variation of the special figure 1 is executed twice or the time variation state of the special figure 2 is executed once. Is set to continue, but the number of times of setting and the time saving condition end condition may be the same as those in the second embodiment described above, as long as they can execute the same technical concept. The time reduction may be set to three or more.

  In addition, even if the number of times of special figure 1 fluctuation (for example, 5 times) which is more than the number of pending storage (upper limit 4) of special figure 1 is set as time saving end condition, Good. As a result, even if the reserve memory of the special figure 2 can not be acquired during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the special figure 2 can be surely changed during the short time state, and therefore the player hits the jackpot when the time short state is entered. A game can be provided.

  Furthermore, as the time saving end condition, the number of times of variation of Special figure 1 is set to 2 times, or the number of times of variation of Special figure 2 is set to 4 times (or the total number of variation times of Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 is 4 times). And, in the small hit type of the special figure 2, as the big hit type executed when passing the specific area (V winning switch 650e3), it is possible to set the jackpot type to which time is reduced and the jackpot type to which time is not added. Alternatively, another example may be used. By configuring in this way, it is executed based on the special figure 2 fluctuation of the time reduction second revolution when one reserved memory of the special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in the short time first rotation. Specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the small hit game, to play a big hit game, or a small hit game that is executed based on the special figure 2 variation of the second time of the clock It is possible to allow the player to select whether to execute the time reduction third rotation (second rotation of the special view 1) without passing the winning switch 650e3).

  That is, in the special figure 1 change (first preparation period) executed at the first time reduction, when the game for acquiring the reserve memory of special figure 2 is executed and one reserve memory of special figure 2 is acquired, The fluctuation of the special figure 2 which is a preferential fluctuation is started at the second rotation of time. When a small hit is won due to the change of the special figure 2, the small hit game is executed after the end of the change of the second rotation. A big hit game (V winning jackpot) based on the small hit game is started by passing the game ball to the specific area during the small hit game. In this example, as a type of V winning jackpot of the special figure 2, the type to which the time saving state is given after the big hit game and the type to which the time saving state is not given can be set. In the case of the jackpot based on the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is not a jackpot state does not give a short time state, the continuous shooting mode will end with this jackpot game. Here, in a state in which the player has acquired only one hold memory of the special view 2, the jackpot game is executed in the second rotation time-short, or the jackpot game is not executed in the second rotation Do not let the game ball pass through the specific area (V winning switch 650e3) during the hit game, and execute the special figure 1 fluctuation (second preparation period) executed for the third time saving, and execute the new special figure 2 It is possible to select whether to execute a game for which the retention memory is acquired.

  Thereby, based on the number of pending storages of Toku-zu 2 acquired during the first preparation period, one pending storage of Toku-zu 2 is discarded to aim to acquire more pending storage of Toku-zu 2 or acquired. Since it is possible to select whether or not the jackpot game based on the hold storage of the special figure 2 is to be executed reliably, the player can arbitrarily select the game content suitable for the player.

  Furthermore, in this example, as the type of jackpot executed based on the reserve storage of the special figure 2, there is a type for giving time saving state after the end of the jackpot game, and a type for not giving it. When the big hit game (V prize big hit) based on the small hit game is executed in one state of the pending storage, there is a possibility that the time saving state may end after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, the game result after that can be largely varied depending on which game content the player selects, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

  The notification indicating the type of the big hit game based on the small hit game performed in the above-described second time reduction may be performed by a notification unit (for example, the effect display by the third symbol display device 81). Thereby, the player can select the game content with reference to the notification content by the notification means. In this case, as the notification content by the notification means, it is preferable to notify the game content that is advantageous to the player in a notification mode that allows the player to grasp. For example, if the jackpot performed based on the small hit game performed at the second time of the hour reduction is a jackpot to which a short time status is given after the end of the jackpot game, it is preferable to set a notification mode to indicate that effect. . As a result, the player can safely pass the ball through the specific area (V winning switch 650 e 3) in the small hitting game of the second rotation.

  In addition, in this example, the time-saving termination condition is that the number of times of variation in Special figure 1 is 2 or the number of times of variation in Special figure 2 is 4 (or the combined number of times of variation in Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 is 4). Since it is assumed that the game is performed, the game for selecting the above-mentioned game contents can be executed only when the special figure 2 is suspended during the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed in the first time reduction. It is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to acquire the reserve memory of the special view 2 as soon as the state is given.

  In addition, since the time saving end condition is set so that the number of changes in special figure 1 is smaller than the number of changes in special figure 2, for example, with respect to the number of changes in special figure 2 executed during the time saving state. Thus, it is possible to reduce the number of fluctuations of the special figure 1. As a result, even if a plurality (for example, two) of the reserved memory of special figure 2 is stored during one special figure 1 change, the second change of special figure 1 is executed during the time saving state. And the opportunity to select the game content described above can be increased. In this example, as the time-saving end condition, the number of changes in Special figure 1 is 2 times, or the number of changes in Special figure 2 is 4 times (or the total number of changes in Special figure 1 and Special figure 2 is 4). However, the time reduction end condition based on the number of changes in the special figure 2 may be set to increase the number of changes rather than the time reduction end condition based on the number of changes in the special figure 1.

Third Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 93 to 100, a pachinko machine 10 according to a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol variation (general drawing variation) executed during the time saving state, and the number of times of drawing of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state Was configured to be stable. Further, in the second embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions under which the time saving state ends are provided in order to change the time duration during the time saving state, and are further executed during the time saving state. It is configured to be able to set a plurality of fluctuation times of the special figure 1.

  On the other hand, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol to be executed during the time saving state can be set from a plurality of times, and can be performed during the time saving state according to the contents of the game. It was configured to make the lottery number of symbols different.

  Thereby, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm in order to execute lots of lottery of normal symbols in the time saving state and to acquire the special figure 2 suspension. In addition, since it is possible to vary the number of lottery times of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state, it is possible to set the time saving state which is advantageous for the player and the time saving state which is disadvantageous to the player. it can.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration of the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the partial configuration of the RAM 203, and the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Is a process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the contents of the game in the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to make the time saving state provided based on the drawing of the special drawing 1 different from the time saving state provided based on the drawing of the special drawing 2. Furthermore, different time saving states are provided based on the gaming state when the time saving state is given. By providing different time saving states in this manner, it becomes possible to prepare a plurality of game properties in the time saving state, and it is possible to make the player execute a game rich in change.

  Specifically, by setting different time saving states, the game characteristics during the time saving state are made different by changing the variation time of the normal symbol executed during the time saving state. That is, as described in the above-described first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 wins the normal symbol during special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state, causes the electric role object 640a to be opened, and the second ball entry is performed. Since the game of acquiring the special figure 2 reserve is executed by entering the ball in the mouth 640, the variation number of the normal symbol is made different so that the number of lottery times of the normal symbol executed during the time reduction (( The number of changes) can be made different.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the variation time of the normal symbol is configured to be different based on the number of times of lottery of the normal symbol (the number of variation) executed during the time saving state. Specifically, when the number of times (variation number of times of lottery) of the regular symbol executed during the time saving state exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 40 times), a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is set. ing. By configuring in this manner, by executing a large number of normal symbol variations during the time saving state, it is possible to further increase the number of times of lottery of the normal symbols (the number of changes), It is possible to execute the middle game. In addition, by shifting to a state in which a fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is set, it is possible to increase the number of balls entering the second entrance 640 per unit time as a result. Can provide an advantageous game.

  As described above, by providing a plurality of time saving states in which the variation time of the normal symbol is different, it is possible to set an advantageous time saving state and a disadvantageous time saving state for the player, thereby improving the interest of the game. .

  First, referring to FIG. 93, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 93A is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen in the time saving state. Here, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 93 (a), points different from the above-described first embodiment (points different from the display content of FIG. 15 (a)) will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 93 (a), "39/40" is displayed at the lower right of the first display area Dm. This is a display mode described in the common drawing fluctuation display area for displaying the number of common drawing fluctuation during the short time state (during special figure 1 fluctuation in the short time state), and the value "39" is executed. In the common drawing fluctuation number display mode for showing the number of times, the value “40” is a common drawing target fluctuation number display mode showing a threshold value at which the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes short. Further, in the sub display area Ds, a guidance display for guiding a period until the fluctuation time of the normal symbol becomes short is displayed.

  The game proceeds from the state shown in FIG. 93 (a), and when the number of spreads in the time reduction state reaches 40 times, as shown in FIG. 93 (b), the spreads change time is shortened to the gaming state The characters "super charge time entry" for indicating the transition are displayed, and in the sub display area Ds, a guidance display for guiding the player that the general drawing fluctuation time has become short is displayed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Third Embodiment
The present third embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the contents of the ROM 202 and the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 94 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment, a time saving state selection table 202f is added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The time saving state selection table 202f is a table to be referred to when selecting the time saving state based on the jackpot symbol (special figure 1 and special figure 2) and the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 203s, It is referred to in the jackpot control process 3 (see FIG. 99) described later (see S1871 in FIG. 99).

  Here, in the third embodiment, the time saving A and the time saving B more advantageous to the player than the time saving A can be selected as the gaming state to be set. Specifically, the jackpot symbol is a special figure 1 (first special symbol), and the gaming state stored in the gaming state storage area 203s is normally (that is, the jackpot is won or a specific area (V prize winning) In the case where the ball passes the switch 650e3), the time saving A is selected as the time saving state, and in other cases, the time saving B is selected as the time saving state as shown in FIG.

  That is, when the gaming state is the normal state, a big hit is made based on the drawing of the special figure 1, and the time saving A is given as a short time status only when the time saving state is given after the big hit game is ended. As a short time B is given.

  When time saving A is set as the time saving state, 3 seconds is set as the variation time of the normal symbol (see S2409 in FIG. 98), and when time saving B is set, the time variation is the time of the normal symbol A fluctuation time (2.5 seconds or 1.5 seconds) shorter than when A is set is set (see S2405 and S2406 in FIG. 98). By this, when entering for the first time in the continuous mode, the game during the short time state of normal symbol fluctuation time is normally (4 seconds) is played, and when the short time state is entered again during the continuous mode, the normal pattern is The fluctuation time can be made shorter than usual. Therefore, when the consecutive mode advantageous to the player continues, it is possible to make it difficult to shift from the continuous mode to the normal gaming state.

  FIG. 94 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment. A RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the third embodiment has a gaming state storage area 203s, a time saving state storage area 203t, and a common drawing frequency counter 203u added to the first embodiment. The other configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The game state storage area 203s is an area for storing the game state when the start of the jackpot is set, and is referred to when selecting the type of time saving state to be granted after the jackpot end. In this gaming state storage area 203s, after the start of the jackpot is set in the special symbol variation processing 3 (see FIG. 96), the gaming state is stored (see S271 in FIG. 96), and the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99). (S1811 in FIG. 99: Yes) and when the jackpot type is not B or D (S1814 in FIG. 99; No), it is referred to when setting the time saving state (S1871). ).

  The time saving state storage area 203 t is an area for storing the type of the selected time saving state (time saving A, time saving B), and is referred to when setting the variation time of the normal symbol in the time saving state. At this time, when the short time state is selected in the jackpot control processing 3 (see FIG. 99), the short state storage area 203t stores the selected short time state (see S1871 in FIG. 99), and the fluctuation time setting (see FIG. 98). In the above, the information stored in setting the variation time of the normal symbol is referred to (see S2401 in FIG. 98).

  The common drawing frequency counter 203u is a counter for measuring the number of times of fluctuation of the normal symbol during the time saving state, and in the fluctuation time setting process (see FIG. 98), every time the normal symbol is fluctuated during the time shortening state 1 is added (see S2403 in FIG. 98). In this embodiment, when the value measured by the common drawing frequency counter 203u becomes a predetermined value (40), the setting process of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is made different.

Regarding Control Processing in Third Embodiment
The control process in the third embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment with respect to the other processes in which the contents of the control process in the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 are changed with respect to the first embodiment. And the detailed description is omitted.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 to 99. In the third embodiment, the special symbol variation process is changed to the special symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 96) and the normal symbol variation process is changed to the normal symbol variation process 3 (see FIG. 97) with respect to the first embodiment. The difference is that the jackpot control process is changed to the jackpot control process 3 (FIG. 99). The other elements are the same, so the same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In special symbol variation processing 3 (see S104 in FIG. 96), the processing of S201 to S219 is executed as in the first embodiment described above, and when the processing of S219 is finished, the current gaming state is stored in the gaming state storage area 203s. Store (S271). And processing of S220-S225 is performed like a 1st embodiment mentioned above, and this processing is ended.

  That is, in the third embodiment, unlike the above-described first embodiment, the gaming state at the time when the start of the jackpot is set can be temporarily stored. Thus, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game can be set based on the gaming state at the jackpot start time (when the jackpot is won).

  In the present embodiment, the variation time of the special drawing has passed, and the gaming state at the timing of setting the start of the big hit is stored in the gaming state storage area 203s, but for example, the variation of the special symbol is started The game state of the timing to perform (for example, the timing when the special symbol variation start process (refer to S213 in FIG. 96) in the special symbol variation process 3 is executed) may be stored.

  Next, in the normal symbol variation processing 3 (see S106 in FIG. 97), the processing of S901 to S912 is executed as in the first embodiment described above, and thereafter, the variation time setting processing is executed (S951). Here, the fluctuation time setting process (S951) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation time setting process (S951).

  When the fluctuation time setting process (S951) is executed, it is first determined whether the current time saving state is the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401), and it is determined that the time saving A (time saving state A). (S2401: Yes), the variation time of the normal symbol (common figure variation time) is set to 3 seconds (S2409), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2401 that the current time saving state is not the time saving A (time saving state A) (S2401: No), next, whether the value of the common drawing number counter 203u is larger than “1” Is determined (S2402).

  If it is determined in the process of S2402 that the value of the common drawing frequency counter 203u is not larger than "1" (S2402: No), "1" is set to the value of the common drawing frequency counter 203u (S2403), and S2404. Transfer to processing of On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2402 that the value of the common drawing frequency counter 203u is larger than “1”, the process proceeds to the process of S2404 (S2402: Yes).

  In the process of S2404, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing frequency counter 203u is "40" or more (S2404). If it is determined in the process of S2404 that the value of the common drawing number counter 203u is not "40" or more (less than 40), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (common drawing fluctuation time) is set to 2.5 seconds (S2405). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the common drawing fluctuation time set in the process of S2409 is set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2404 that the value of the common drawing frequency counter 203u is "40" or more, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (common drawing fluctuation time) is set to 1.5 seconds (S2406). In this case, a fluctuation time shorter than the common drawing fluctuation time set in the process of S2405 is set. Then, when the processing of S2405 or S2406 is finished, "1" is added to the value of the common drawing frequency counter 203u (S2407), a common drawing frequency command is set (S2408), and this processing is ended.

  The common drawing frequency command set in the process of S2408 is a command output to the audio lamp control device 113, and the output processing is performed in the same manner as the various commands set in the main control device 110 described above. .

  As described above, in the third embodiment, different common drawing fluctuation times are set based on the type of the time saving state to be set and the number of common drawing fluctuations performed during the short timing state. By configuring in this way, the number of times of generalization fluctuation performed during the time saving state can be made different based on the type of time shortening state and the number of times of generality fluctuation performed during the time shortening state. It is possible to improve the interest to the game of winning the popular game and acquiring the reservation memory of Toku 2.

  In addition, when "time reduction B", which is more advantageous than "time reduction A" (a short fluctuation time is set as the common drawing fluctuation time) is set as the time reduction state, the common drawing fluctuation number is equal to or more than a predetermined number In the case of becoming a), since it is configured to set a still shorter common map fluctuation time, it is possible for the player to continuously play the game in the time saving state.

  In the third embodiment, although a specific spread map fluctuation time is set based on each short time state or spread time, the configuration may be other than that, for example, each short time state or spread time may be set. A common drawing fluctuation time selection table to be referred to in order to set common drawing fluctuation time corresponding to the number of times of drawing fluctuation is provided, and based on the predetermined acquired value (for example, counter acquired value) from the common drawing fluctuation time selection table It is also possible to select the common map fluctuation time. In this case, in the common drawing fluctuation time selection table corresponding to each short time state and the common drawing fluctuation times, provide a table in which a long common drawing fluctuation time is easy to select and a table in which a short common drawing fluctuation time is easy to be selected. Then, as in the third embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation time which is easy to be selected based on each short time state (time short A, time short B) and the common drawing fluctuation frequency can be made different. You can improve the interest to the game of winning

  Further, in the third embodiment, two types of “time saving A” and “time saving B” are provided as the type of time saving state, but more types may be provided. In addition, although one trigger is provided to make the common drawing fluctuation time selected based on the common drawing fluctuation count one time (the common drawing fluctuation count is 40), two or more may be provided.

  Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the general drawing fluctuation time shorter than the normal time is selected (it is easy to be selected) when the predetermined condition is satisfied, but a specific upper limit condition (for example, general drawing If the number of changes exceeds 50 times, or if the number of pending storages in Special Figure 2 reaches the upper limit), a time longer than normal (for example, 10 seconds) is selected as the generalization change time selected ) May be selected. This makes it possible to suppress giving extra benefits to the player due to excessive execution of the map change.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 99, the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot control process 3 (S1704). This jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is different from the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above in that it is determined that it is the timing of the jackpot end, and the process is the same, otherwise the same process Is executed. The description of the same processing is omitted.

  When the jackpot control process 3 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1814 are executed as in the jackpot control process of the first embodiment, and in the process of S1814, the jackpot type is "big hit B" or "big hit D (S1814: No), the time saving state is set based on the time saving state selection table 202f, and the set time saving state is determined. It stores in time saving state storage area 203t (S1871). Then, the value of the hour / minute counter 203 g is set to “1” (S 1815), and this processing ends.

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The third embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the command determination process is changed to command determination process 3 (see FIG. 100). The other elements are the same, so the same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing command determination processing 3 (S3112). When the command determination process 3 (S3112) is executed, the processes of S3201 to S3214 are performed as in the command determination process of the first embodiment. Then, if it is determined that the notification command has not been received in the process of S3213 (S3213: No), it is then determined whether a general drawing frequency command has been received (S3251). If the drawing frequency command has been received (S3251: Yes), the display drawing frequency command is set (S3252). The display common drawing frequency command set here is output to the display control device 114 in the same manner as other display commands, and the common drawing fluctuation executed during the time saving state on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 The number is displayed (see FIG. 93).

<Modification 1 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a first modification of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, in order to restrict the ball from entering the right first ball entrance 64 b disposed in the right area of the game board 13, the storage device 750 and a non-motorized character 710 were provided. This reliably prevents the ball from entering the right first ball entry port 64b unless the non-motor-operated part 710 is in the open state. On the other hand, in the first modification, a configuration is used in which the ball entering into the first right ball entrance 64b is restricted without using the storage device 750 and the non-motorized part 710. Specifically, the movable valve 1500 is always provided above the first right ball entrance 64b to restrict the ball from entering the first right ball entrance 64b.

  Further, in the configuration of the game board 13 according to the first embodiment described above, the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640 are disposed in the first flow path 701, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. The second ball inlet below the through gate 67 so that the ball passes in a shorter period (0.2 seconds) than the fluctuation time (3 or 4 seconds) of the normal symbol (general drawing) executed based on By arranging 640, it was suppressed that the ball which passed through gate 67 entered ball 2nd ball entrance 640 directly. On the other hand, in this modification, the through gate 67 is disposed in the first flow passage 701, and the second ball inlet 640 is disposed in the second flow passage 702. Thereby, it is possible to physically prevent the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 from entering the second ball entrance 640.

  The difference between the configuration of the game board 13 according to the present modification 1 and the configuration of the game board 13 according to the first embodiment described above is that the storage device 750, the non-motor-operated role 710, and the specific general ball entry port 630 are excluded. The point is that the arrangement position of the right first ball inlet 64b is changed, and the arrangement position of the second ball inlet 640 is changed from the first channel 701 to the second channel 702. The other configuration is the same. About the same composition, the same numerals are attached and the explanation is omitted.

  FIG. 101 is a front view showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the first modification. As shown in FIG. 101, in the gaming board 13 of the first modification, the movable member 1500 is always provided along the ball rolling surface of the uppermost stream portion of the first flow passage 701, and the movable member 1500 is always movable. Is movable to the open position (in the open state), the ball is configured to be able to enter the right first ball inlet 64b.

  Here, the operation of the movable member 1500 will be described in detail. The constantly movable valve 1500 is configured to be varied between an open position (open state) and a closed position (closed state) at a predetermined timing based on the pachinko machine 10 being powered on. There is. Specifically, in the movable member drive processing (not shown) executed every four milliseconds in the main processing (see FIG. 53) of main controller 110, operation control based on the movable scenario stored in ROM 203 It is done. In this movable scenario, the movable member 1500 is constantly opened for 0.1 second and then repeatedly closed for 1.2 seconds.

  That is, in the gaming board 13 of the first modification, the balls fired in the right-handed game flow into the first flow path 701 at intervals of 1.2 seconds, and the movable member 1500 is constantly disposed. Flow down in the downstream direction while rolling on the surface. The ball flows into the first flow path 701, and the timing when it rolls on the movable member 1500 at all times (or always falls on the movable member) coincides with the timing at which the movable valve 1500 is always opened. The ball passes through the open movable member 1500 and enters the right first ball inlet 64b.

  The timing at which the movable member 1500 constantly rolls (or falls constantly on the movable member) is at an interval of 1.2 seconds, and the timing at which the movable valve 1500 is always in the open state is 0 in 1.3 seconds. Since it is one second, the timing at which the two coincide is once in about 15.6 seconds. That is, when the right-handed game is continuously executed, approximately four balls enter the first right ball entrance 64b in one minute.

  That is, in the gaming state where the right-handed game is continuously executed, such as during a big hit game or during a short time game, the ball enters the right first ball inlet 64b regularly, so the big hit game is It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state where there is no hold of the special figure 1 when it has ended and shifted to the short time state. In addition, since a period (0.1 seconds) in which it is difficult for the player to hit the target is set as the period in which the movable valve 1500 is always opened at one time, the first left ball entry is made in the normal state. The right hitting game can be more disadvantageous to the player than the left hitting game aiming at the mouth 64a.

  Specifically, if the gaming state is the normal state, when the left hitting game is performed, about 15 shots enter the first left ball entry port 64a out of 250 fired balls. It is designed, and five balls will be paid out when the ball enters. In addition, it is designed that approximately 5 shots enter the general entrance 63, and when the ball enters, 5 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the left-handed game, when firing 250 balls, it is possible to cause approximately 20 balls to enter the first left ball entrance 64a, considering that the winning balls to be paid out are also fired again. It becomes.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the right-handed game is played, about nine shots are designed to enter the first right ball entrance 64b out of 250 balls fired. If you hit the ball, two balls will be paid out. Moreover, the general ball entrance 63 is not provided in the right side area | region. Therefore, in the right-hand game, even if it is considered that the winning balls to be paid out will be fired again when firing 250 balls, approximately 10 balls should be allowed to enter the first right ball entrance 64b. I can only do. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is possible to suppress the player from playing the right-handed game.

  In the present embodiment, the general entrance 63 is not provided in the game area (right area) through which the ball fired in the right-hand game passes, but in the normal state, the right-hand game is more than the left-hand game The general ball entrance 63 may be provided based on a design concept that the player is not advantageous to the player. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls to be paid out as the winning balls in the right-handed game during the time saving state or the big hit state.

  Next, among the configurations disposed in the right side area of the game board 13 in the present modification 1, the difference between the through gate 67 and the second ball entry port 640 with the configuration of the game board 13 of the first embodiment described above The explanation will focus on points.

  In the first modification, the through gate 67 is disposed at the downstream portion of the first flow path 701 having the bending path 701 a, and the second entrance to the downstream portion of the second flow path 702 (the lower end portion of the fifth flow path 704 b). A ball mouth 640 is provided. With this configuration, the spheres flowing into the second flow path 702 can be made to flow down toward the second ball entrance 640 at intervals of 1.2 seconds without decreasing the flow-down speed of the balls. Therefore, since the flow-down interval of the balls flowing down the second flow path 702 can be made constant, the balls are connected in the second flow path 702 and a plurality of balls enter the second ball entry port 640 simultaneously. Can be suppressed. In addition, when it is notified that the electric symbol 640a is opened by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 23B) without noticing that the electric symbol 640a is opened, it is promptly performed. The ball can enter the second entrance 640.

  In addition, different flow paths (first flow path 701,) through which the distributing member 700 can distribute the through gate 67 serving as a trigger for executing the lottery of the normal symbol and the electric role product 640a whose operation is controlled by winning of the normal symbol. Since it arranges in the 2nd flow path 702), when the distribution member 700 is destroyed so that a ball may be made to flow down only to either flow path (when the distribution function is invalidated), the second ball entrance It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter 640. That is, when the through gate 67 and the motorized accessory 640a are disposed in one of the flow paths distributed by the distribution member 700, the distribution member 700 is broken, and a state in which the ball flows down in only one flow path is created. This makes it possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, but using the configuration of this modification allows the ball to enter the second entrance 640 illegally. It is possible to suppress the creation of a state that is easy to cause.

<Modification 2 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a second modification of the game board 13 in each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In the first embodiment described above, as described with reference to FIG. 2, in order to restrict the ball from entering the right first ball entrance 64 b disposed in the right area of the game board 13, the storage device 750 and a non-motorized character 710 were provided. This reliably prevents the ball from entering the right first ball entry port 64b unless the non-motor-operated part 710 is in the open state. On the other hand, in the second modification, the movable plate 1700 is always provided between the storage device 750 and the specified general ball entry port 630, and the ball passed the storage device 750 when the storage device 750 is released. However, the case where the ball enters the specific general entrance 630 and the case where the ball does not enter are provided.

  Specifically, the movable plate 1700 can be constantly moved to a guidance position (protrusion position) capable of guiding a ball to the specified general entrance 630 every one second, and an unguided (difficult) open position (retraction position) Variable control means for controlling the flow of the spheres passing through the storage device 750 by variable control by the variable control means.

  The constantly movable plate 1700 is operation controlled by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. Specifically, a movable plate solenoid (not shown) which causes variable movement of movable plate 1700 at all times is in an on state (a state in which movable plate 1700 is always protruded) and in an off state (a state in which movable plate 1700 is always withdrawn). A variable control means for changing is provided, and the variable control means determines a predetermined variable scenario based on a predetermined counter value updated each time the main processing of the main control device 110 is executed. Variable control is executed along the

  The movable plate solenoid used in the present modification is configured such that the movable plate 1700 is always positioned at the retreat position in the energized state. As described in the above-described embodiments, this is the first condition during the time saving state as the ending condition of the game period (time saving state period in which it is easy to obtain the pending storage of special figure 2) which is advantageous to the player. This is because the condition is set that the variation (lottery draw) of the special symbol (special figure 1) is performed once. That is, unless this termination condition is satisfied, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (general drawing) becomes shorter than the normal state (general drawing fluctuation time 3 seconds), and it is executed when the normal symbol (general drawing) is hit and won. This is because the opening operation pattern of the motorized role product 640a to be played back is also continuously executed in the opening operation pattern (long opening) which is advantageous to the player. As described above, in the absence of the reserve storage of the special view 1, the variation of each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the reserve storage of the special view 2 is acquired. Instead (time-saving waiting state), only the variation of the normal symbol (general drawing) will be executed. In this case, the time saving state is continued until the ball is hit on the second ball entry port 640 by winning on the popular map. In order to prevent such a situation from being intentionally created, the movable plate 1700 is always positioned at the projecting position when the movable valve solenoid is powered off. As a result, even if the action of intentionally stopping the supply of power to the movable valve solenoid is executed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a large damage.

  In the configuration of the present modification described above, to the first right ball entrance 64b by the timing when the storage device 750 is released (that is, the timing when the big hit game is started) and the variable state of the movable plate 1700 at all times. It is possible to regulate the entry of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect a jackpot game to be started at which timing.

  A configuration that allows different timings to be set as the timing for causing the storage device 750 to be in the released state may be added to the above-described modification. Specifically, depending on the jackpot type selected at the time of jackpot winning of the special symbol (special figure), the jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a of the storage device 750 and the jackpot type for not releasing are preset. Furthermore, the first timing (for example, the timing for starting the first round) and the second timing (for example, the timing for starting the third round) may be set in advance as a jackpot type for releasing the storage valve 750a. Configure.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the storage device 750 is released and the ball passes the storage device 750. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the timing when the big hit game is started and the variable state of the movable plate 1700 is always the advantageous timing for the player, and the player even after the big hit game is started Can play a game with a sense of expectation. In addition, it is possible to suppress the action of starting the jackpot game in an advantageous timing for the player.

  In addition, you may use for each embodiment mentioned above the structure which sets the presence or absence of cancellation | release of the storage apparatus 750 mentioned above, and several cancellation | release timing by big hit classification. Thereby, more complicated game characteristics can be provided, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 3 of the game board 13 in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 103, a third modification of the game board 13 according to the first embodiment described above will be described. The present modification 3 is different in that the arrangement positions of the storage device 750 and the specific general ball entry port 630 are different with respect to the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) of the first embodiment described above, The configuration of is the same. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in the third modification, the storage device 750 and the specified general entrance slot 630 are disposed on the right side of the central lower portion of the game board 13. By configuring in this manner, the rightward game is easier to store the balls in the storage device 750 than the leftward game. Specifically, among the balls fired by the right-handed game, the ball that has flowed down on the first variable winning device 65 is configured to be most easily stored in the storage device 750.

  And in the state where a ball is stored by storage device 750, it is constituted so that the ball after the next flows down above the stored ball. Specifically, the upper surface position of the ball stored in the storage device 750 is lower than the extension direction of the flow-down direction of the ball flowing down on the first variable winning device 65 (the first variable winning device 65 A storage device 750 is disposed on the upper surface of the provided unit so as to have a downward step. Therefore, the ball stored in the storage device 750 does not affect the subsequent ball flow. In the third modification configured as described above, when the right-handed game which is advantageous to the player is started, the suspension of the special view 1 can be ensured more reliably.

  You may each apply each modification of the game board 13 demonstrated above to each embodiment mentioned above. Thereby, a more complicated game can be provided to the player, and the interest can be improved.

<Modification of motorized role piece 640a>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 104 to 107, modified examples of the motorized part 640a used in the above-described embodiments will be described. In each embodiment mentioned above, the game board by which the 2nd ball entrance 640 is arranged so that two or more balls may not enter the second ball entrance 640 while the motorized role product 640a is in the opening operation. It was configured to regulate the ball flow in the right side region of 13. In other words, a countermeasure is taken to restrict the ball flow so that a plurality of balls do not flow in continuously at the same time with respect to the motorized product 640a. On the other hand, the motorized prize A200 described in this modification has a configuration in which two or more balls can not enter the second ball entry port 640.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the shutter portion A222 is curved in a cross-section perpendicular to the pivoting shaft portions 223 and 223 into a substantially square shape, and the pivoting door A220 has the side start winning opening A40A. It consists of a door main wall A222A located on the front side and standing substantially vertically when closed, and a winning auxiliary wall A222B extending rearward from the upper end of the door main wall A222 in this state. The door main wall A222A has a V-shaped cross section to prevent biting of the game balls. Further, the door main wall A222A is located apart from the pivoting shaft 223, 223, and pivots from a substantially horizontal state to the front as it pivots from the open state of the pivoting door A220 to the closed state. Therefore, it stands up almost vertically. In the state where the rotation door A220 is opened, the winning auxiliary wall A222B is inclined so as to go down toward the back side of the side start winning opening A40A.

  The width of the shutter portion A222 is slightly smaller than the width of the side start winning opening A40A, while the width of the pair of side walls is wider than the width of the side start winning opening A40A. Then, with the pivoting door A220 completely closed, the front of the side wall abuts the side edge of the side start winning opening A40A, and the turning door A220 further closes the side starting prize opening A40A. I'm preventing it from turning.

  Among the pair of side walls, door pivoting projections A224 and A224 are provided on the side opposite to the shutter portion with respect to the pivoting shaft portion. Further, positioning abutment portions A225 and A225 are formed on the side wall and located at the back of the door pivoting protrusion A224 and projecting downward when the pivoting door A220 is in the completely open end position. ing.

  A detection sensor is accommodated in the above-mentioned switch accommodating portion 215B of the resin housing. The detection sensor is in the form of a flat rectangular parallelepiped, and a gaming ball passage hole is vertically formed at the rear end of the detection sensor. Through holes are formed on both upper and lower surfaces of the switch housing 215B corresponding to the game ball passing holes, and the game balls entering the tongue piece housing 215A pass through the game ball passing holes 281 to receive the switches. It is designed to move downward of the part 215B. In addition, below the switch accommodating portion 215B, a duct (not shown) is provided which takes in the gaming ball and guides it to the ball circulation system of the game arcade.

  A movable tongue piece A 230 is accommodated in the tongue piece accommodating portion 215A of the resin housing. The movable tongue piece A 230 has a flat structure in which the lateral width direction is short with respect to the front and rear direction and the thickness is reduced in the vertical direction, and is supported so as to slide back and forth while sliding on the inner surface of the tongue piece accommodation portion 215A.

  When viewed from above, the movable tongue A 230 has a symmetrical shape, and the front end portion thereof is provided with a projecting / retracting projecting portion which is narrowed in a step-like manner from the whole. The projecting and projecting piece portion is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball, and has a width that can be inserted into the lower wide portion of the side start winning hole A40A.

  Among the upper surfaces of the projecting and projecting pieces, on both sides in the lateral width direction, a pair of outer downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S inclined so as to go down to both sides are formed. In addition, a pull-in inclined surface which is extremely gently inclined toward the center and gently inclined downward toward the rear between a pair of outer downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S of the projecting and retracting piece part 240 H is formed. Further, on the upper surface of the projecting and retracting piece portion, there is formed a guiding inclined surface 240Y which is relatively steeply falling rearward from the rear end of the lead-in inclined surface 240H.

  The movable tongue piece A230 has a shape rearwardly projecting from the projecting and projecting piece part when viewed from above, the trapezoidal protrusion 231D being projected rearward from the center in the width direction of the rear end of the substantially square base part There is. And, at the center in the width direction of the base portion, a ball passage long hole is vertically formed penetrating from the front end position to the rear end position. The ball passage long hole has a width such that one game ball can pass exactly and is slightly smaller than the width of the projecting and retracting tab portion. In addition, the front end of the ball passage long hole is semicircular and a part reaches the base end of the projecting and retracting piece, and the rear end of the ball passage long hole is parallel to the bottom of the trapezoidal projection 231D. It has reached the rear end position of the base portion.

  A pair of doors extending vertically along both side edge portions of the ball passage long hole in a range of the movable tongue A 230 extending from the base end portion of the projecting and retracting portion to the intermediate position in the longitudinal direction of the base portion The drive projecting wall is formed to protrude. And the power receiving portion A 230 P is thickened in the vertical direction so that the entire rear side portion of the base portion behind the door drive protrusion wall has an upper surface flush with the upper surface of the rear end portion of the door drive protrusion wall.

  A pair of connection concaves is formed in a depression on the opposing inner side surface of the power receiving portion A 230 P which is opposed to the ball passage long hole. Each connection recess is formed from a substantially triangular interference avoidance recess in which the lower end side is narrowed, and an engagement groove which is formed in the back surface on the side away from the ball passage long hole of the interference avoidance recess and extends in the vertical direction Become. The front sliding contact surface 236A disposed on the front side of the engagement groove extends straight in the vertical direction. The lower sliding contact surface 236B of the engaging groove portion, which is disposed on the rear side, protrudes forward from the middle position in the vertical direction, and serves as the seesaw stopper portion according to the present invention. The stopper contact surface 237S at the upper end of the seesaw stopper portion is slightly inclined so as to descend toward the front sliding contact surface 236A.

  Each door drive projection wall has an intermediate depression at an intermediate position in the front-rear direction, and the front side of the intermediate depression becomes the front pressing projection A 241 according to the present invention, and the rear side of the intermediate depression according to the present invention. It has a protrusion A 242. The rear side pressing protrusion A 242 has the same height as the power receiving portion A 230 P, and the front side pressing protrusion A 241 is lower than the power receiving portion A 230 P. Also, the bottom surface of the middle depression is a horizontal flat middle depression flat surface 233N. The rear surface of the front side pressing projection A241 is a closing pressing portion A241K according to the present invention, and stands vertically from the intermediate depressed flat surface 233N. Further, the upper surface of the front side pressing projection A241 is a door stopper portion A241J according to the present invention, and is horizontally flat. On the other hand, the front surface of the rear side pressing projection A 242 is an open pressing portion A 242 Z according to the present invention, which also vertically rises from the middle depression flat surface 233 N. The front surface of the front pressing projection A241 is parallel to the closing pressing portion A241K which is the rear surface, is gently inclined to the front from the middle, and extends to the rear ends of the outer downward inclined surfaces 240S and 240S described above .

  The lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 is engaged with the connection recess in the movable tongue A230, and the door pivoting projections A224 and A224 of the pivoting door A220 are engaged with the door driving projection wall of the movable tongue A230. doing. Thereby, the movable tongue A 230 is driven by receiving power from the solenoid via the seesaw member A 250, and the pivoting door A 220 is driven by received power from the movable tongue A 230.

  First, transmission of power from the seesaw member A 250 to the movable tongue A 230 will be described. The connection arms of the seesaw member A250 are received in the interference avoidance recesses among the connection recesses of the movable tongue A230, and the lower end connection protrusions A255 and A255 of the connection arms are in the engagement grooves of the connection recesses. It is engaged.

  Here, when the solenoid is not excited, as shown in FIG. 104, the plunger projects forward, and at this time, the lower end connection convex portions A255 and A255 are located at the lower end portion of the engagement groove portion. At this time, the movable tongue A 230 is disposed at the rear end position of the linear movable range, and the projecting and retracting tab portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A 40A. In this case, that is, in a state where the projecting and retracting part is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A, the leading end of the projecting and projecting piece is retracted to a position where the inside of the side starting winning opening A40A is completely covered. Therefore, the ball can be reliably prevented from colliding with the side start winning combination opening A 40A in the retracted state.

  In this state, when the solenoid is excited and the plunger is attracted rearward, the seesaw member A250 pivots about the pivot shaft portions A253 and A253, and the connection arm pivots forward, thereby The lower end connecting convex portions A255 and A255 press the front side sliding contact surfaces 236A and 236A forward while sliding on the front side sliding contact surfaces 236A and 236A. As a result, the movable tongue A 230 is pushed forward of the gaming machine, and as shown in FIG. 104, the projecting and receding projecting piece projects from the side start winning opening A 40A to the front side of the gaming board. Then, for example, the end face of the base portion of the movable tongue A230 abuts against the opening edge of the side start winning opening A40A from the rear surface side, and the movable tongue A230 is positioned at the "front end working position" according to the present invention As a result, the projecting and retracting projection 240 protrudes from the side start winning opening A40A as much as possible (see FIG. 106).

  When the excitation of the solenoid is stopped in a state where the movable tongue piece A 230 is disposed at the front end operating position (the state of FIG. 106), the plunger projects forward by the compression coil spring A 276. Then, the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 pivots rearward about the pivot shaft portions A253 and A253, and the lower end portion of the seesaw member A250 extends from the front position to the rear position with respect to the pivot shaft portions A253 and A253. Moving. At this time, the lower end connection convex portions A255 and A255 are in sliding contact with the rear side sliding contact surfaces 236B and 236B of the engagement grooves and are pushed backward. As a result, the movable tongue is drawn rearward of the gaming machine, and the projecting and retracting tab portion retracts to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A (see FIG. 107).

  In detail, when the excitation of the solenoid is stopped and the lower end of the connection arm in the seesaw member A250 is rotated backward, the upper edge E1 of the stopper recess provided in the lower connection projection A255 (first The rear end edge of the 1 plane M1 abuts on the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion. Then, the lower end connection convex portion A255 is in sliding contact with the rear sliding contact surface 236B with the rotation of the seesaw member A250, and the lower end connection convex portion A255 is positioned rearward of the pivot shaft portions A253 and A253 of the seesaw member A250. When the lower edge portion E2 (lower end edge of the second flat surface M2) of the stopper concave portion abuts on the lower side portion of the rear sliding surface 236B than the seesaw stopper portion, the rear side slide of the engaging groove portion The contact surfaces 236B and 236B are pushed backward. Thus, the movable tongue can be returned to the initial position (rear end retracted position) by the resilient force of the compression coil spring A276.

  By the way, in the case where an act of pulling out the movable tongue A 230 retracted to the back of the side start winning opening A 40 A to the front of the gaming board with a wire inserted from a gap of the gaming machine is performed, for example, become that way. That is, the power is not transmitted from the solenoid to the seesaw member A250, but the power of the seesaw member A250 is transmitted from the movable tongue A230, and the connecting arm of the seesaw member A250 is pushed forward by the rear sliding surface 236B of the engagement groove 236 Then, the first flat surface M1 in each stopper recess of the lower end connection convex portions A255 and A255 comes in surface contact with the stopper contact surface 237S of the seesaw stopper portion. When the movable tongue piece A230 is further pulled forward from this state, the pulling force becomes an upward force F1 orthogonal to the stopper contact surface 237S of the step portion, and the center of the first plane M1 and the pivot shaft portion The direction is substantially parallel to the direction connecting the center of A253, that is, the direction substantially orthogonal to the rotation direction of the stopper recess. As a result, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is restricted, and it becomes impossible to pull the movable tongue A230 forward to project the projecting and retracting tab part forward of the side start winning opening A40A. Further, even if the seesaw member A250 is slightly lifted obliquely upward by the upward force F1, the triangular ridge formed on the connecting wall 252 of the seesaw member A250 engages with the flange portion 274F of the plunger. Thereby, the rotation of the seesaw member A250 is more reliably prohibited.

  Next, transmission of power from the movable tongue A 230 to the pivoting door A 220 will be described. The door pivoting projections A224 and A224 of the pivoting door A220 are respectively engaged with the door driving projecting wall of the movable tongue, whereby the pivoting door A220 is pivoted by receiving power from the movable tongue A230. Do. Specifically, in a state where the movable tongue piece A230 is disposed at the rear end retraction position, and the entire emergence and projection piece portion is retracted to the back side of the side start winning opening A40A, the door rotation projection A224 presses the front side It is arrange | positioned above the stopper part A241 J for doors in the protrusion 241 (state of FIG. 104). At this time, the pivoting shaft portion of the pivoting door A220 is located obliquely forward of the door pivoting projection A224. At this time, a first space AS1 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224 and the release pressing portion A242Z of the rear side pressing protrusion A242.

  Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 advances from the rear end retracted position, as shown in the changes to FIGS. 104 to 107, the front pressing projection A241 moves forward, and the lower end portion of the door pivoting projection A224 The door stopper portion A241J of the front side pressing projection A241 does not face up and down in the vertical direction, and the lower end of the door pivoting protrusion A224 faces the middle depressed flat surface 233N in the up and down direction, and the middle depressed flat surface 233N A pivoting space of the door pivoting projection A 224 is secured between them.

  Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 moves further forward, the lower end portion of the door pivoting protrusion A224 moves the above-mentioned first space AS1, and while the movable tongue piece A230 moves forward, the pivoting door Is kept stopped. Then, as shown in FIG. 105, when the projecting and retracting tab portion of the movable tongue piece A230 protrudes from the side start winning opening A40A by a predetermined amount, the lower end portion of the door pivoting protrusion A224 is of the rear side pressing protrusion A242. It abuts on the front face A242Z. Then, when the movable tongue advances further, the door main wall A222A of the pivoting door A220 is lifted, the side start winning opening A40A is opened (see FIGS. 105 and 106), and the movable tongue A230 is the front end When the operation position is reached, the pivoting door A220 is fully opened, and the game ball can be won in the side start winning opening A40A. More specifically, when the pivoting door A 220 is pushed by the rear side pressing projection A 242 and rotated by a fixed angle, the pivoting door A 220 pivots toward the open end position by its own weight. In other words, the pivoting door A220 starts the pivoting operation when the projecting and projecting piece part projects about half from the side start winning hole A40A, and the projecting and projecting tab part protrudes about half and then completely protrudes During a relatively short period of time, the side start winning opening A40A becomes fully open from fully closed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the front door opening winning prize is achieved by the operation of two steps in which the movable door A230 starts to move forward and the rotating door A220 is stopped halfway through and the rotating door A220 starts to open halfway The mouth A40A is opened. Then, when the game ball falls on the upper surface of the appearing and retreating piece portion 240 protruding from the side start winning opening A40A, the gaming ball is guided to the appearing and retreating piece portion 240 and wins to the side starting winning hole A40A. The game ball is detected by the detection switch.

  When the pivoting door A220 is completely opened, as shown in FIG. 106, the positioning abutment portion A225 of the side wall abuts on the upper surface of the rear side pressing projection A242, and the pivoting door A220 is open Positioned in position. Thereby, rattling of the pivoting door A 220 is regulated. Further, in this state, a second space AS2 according to the present invention is formed between the lower end portion of the door rotation protrusion A224 and the release pressing portion A242Z of the rear side pressing protrusion A242.

  Also, when the movable tongue piece A 230 is retracted from the front end working position, as shown in the changes to FIGS. 106 to 107, the front pressing projection A 241 moves rearward. At this time, the lower end portion of the door pivoting protrusion A224 moves relatively in the second space AS2 toward the front pressing protrusion A241. Thereby, a part of the projecting and retracting part 240 in the movable tongue A230 moves into the front opening winning hole A40A (from a state where the door rotation projection A224 is in contact with the opening pressing part A242Z While moving in the second space AS2 until contact), the pivoting door A220 is maintained in the open state. Then, the front opening winning prize is performed by a predetermined amount (the distance by which the movable tongue piece A230 moves in the second space AS2 from the state where the door rotation protrusion A224 contacts the opening pressing part A242Z to the contact closing part A241K) When moved into the mouth A40A, the closing pressing portion A241K of the front side pressing protrusion A241 abuts on the lower end portion of the door turning protrusion A224. At this time, the projecting and retracting tab portion 240 of the movable tongue A 230 is accommodated about half in the side start winning opening A 40A. Then, when the movable tongue piece A230 is further retracted, the pivoting door A220 operates to close along with the retreat of the movable tongue piece A230, and when the projecting / retracting tab portion is completely retracted, the pivoting door A220 is closed. The side start winning opening A40A is completely closed and stopped, and the movable tongue A230 is further retracted on the back side of the side starting winning opening A40A, and the lower end portion of the door turning protrusion A224 is the door stopper portion A241J up and down It returns to the initial state opposed in the direction. As described above, in the present embodiment, the front door opening winning prize is achieved by the operation of two steps in which the movable door A 230 starts retreating and the rotating door 220 is stopped halfway through and the rotating door A 220 starts closing halfway The mouth A40A is closed.

  By the way, in the state where the side start winning opening A40A is closed (the state of FIG. 104), for example, when trying to open the pivoting door A220 with a wire etc., the door pivoting projection A224 pivots to the opening side The contact portion abuts on the door stopper portion A241J of the front side pressing projection A241 in the vertical direction. Thereby, unauthorized opening of the pivoting door A220 is prohibited. Here, the direction of the force by which the door pivoting protrusion A224 pushes the door stopper portion A241J of the front pressing protrusion A241 is in the vertical direction, and is orthogonal to the movable direction (longitudinal direction) of the movable tongue A230. Therefore, when an incorrect external force is applied to the pivoting door A220, the door stopper portion A241J of the movable tongue A230 is reliably prevented from opening the pivoting door A220 without being moved in the movable direction. Can.

<Other effect example 1 using the configuration of each embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 108, another example of effects performed using the configuration of each embodiment described above will be described. In the second embodiment described above, as the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 15 (a), each symbol (the special figure 1, the special figure 2, the second display area Dn) It was configured to display the number of reservations of each symbol and each symbol. On the other hand, in the effect example to be described with reference to FIG. 108, an effect of displaying the symbol display of the special view 1 and the number of reservations is displayed in the sub display area Ds. In this sub-display area Ds, it is displayed in a variable display mode in which a specific display mode (for example, a number) is varied in accordance with the symbol of the special figure 1 being varied (special figure 1 variation being executed). In the variable display mode, the number of reservations of the special figure 1 is configured to be displayed in a suggestion display mode that suggests a display mode to be displayed next. Here, the contents of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIG. 108 (a).

  The display screen of FIG. 108 (a) is a display screen showing an example in the case where the special figure 1 is not held during the special figure 1 fluctuation during the time saving state (first time reduction). As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the special display 1 variable display area Ds3 of the sub display area Ds is referred to as "remaining time second" as an auxiliary display mode for giving meaning to the variable situation of the variable display mode. A display of "10" is displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as a display and a variable display mode indicating that the special view 1 is changing. By varying the display mode (“10” in FIG. 108 (a)) displayed in the variable display area Ds4, it is configured to notify that the special view 1 is fluctuating during the variable display. There is.

  Note that the display mode (for example, "10") displayed in the variable display area Ds4 while the special figure 1 is fluctuating is that the player mistakenly recognizes that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped in the display mode. In order to prevent this, the display mode is configured to be changed to the next display mode after being displayed temporarily for a pause (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the player can recognize the display mode in a slightly shaken state. The display mode (for example, “∞” (see FIG. 108 (b)) displayed in the variable display area Ds4 when the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is stopped is the game mode of the special figure 1 in the display mode of the player. It is configured to stop for a period (for example, one second) longer than the above-described temporary stop display (for example, 0.5 seconds) in order to recognize that the fluctuation has stopped.

  With this configuration, the player can easily grasp the content of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4. It should be noted that as long as the player can easily grasp the contents of the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4, any other structure may be used. For example, a period during which Special Figure 1 is variably displayed. The display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4, changing the color of the background image of the special view 1 variable display area Ds3, changing the display content of the auxiliary display mode, and the period when the special view 1 is stopped and displayed. You may change the color or thickness of the characters. As a result, the player can easily understand the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4.

  Further, according to the configuration used in the present production example, the special figure 1 is fluctuating depending on the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4, and the fluctuation remaining period of the special figure 1 can be notified. ing. Thereby, a plurality of pieces of information related to the fluctuation of the special view 1 can be displayed in one display area (variable display area Ds4).

  In the present production example, in order to inform the player that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the special effect 1 is displayed to cause the time to be counted down in the variation display area Ds3. For example, it is possible to use a story development type effect display such as an effect for giving an answer and giving an answer or an effect for achieving a mission. Even when configured in this way, it is possible to notify the player that the special figure 1 is changing by changing the content displayed in the special figure 1 change display area Ds3.

  Then, among the sub display area Ds, the number-of-holds suggesting mode for indicating the number of pending in the special figure 1 is displayed based on the number of pending in the special figure 1 in the special view 1 pending display area Ds5 (FIG. a) see). This number-of-retentions suggesting mode is displayed in a display mode that suggests the display mode to be displayed in the variable display area Ds4 subsequently. That is, in the display mode displayed corresponding to each holding number suggestion mode, the display mode is also changed each time the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 is changed.

  According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), in the special view 1 reserve display area Ds5, four reserve number suggestion modes are displayed, and any one of "V", "9" and "∞" The display mode of is displayed. The display mode displayed as the number-of-retentions suggestion mode implies the display mode displayed in the variable display area Ds4 as described above, and the "V" display mode is based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 It is suggested that the “9” display mode suggests the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1 and the “∞” display mode implies that the reserved memory of the special figure 1 is absent.

  According to the gaming state shown in FIG. 108 (a), since there is no hold storage of the special view 1, display setting is made so that the number of display of "と し て" increases as the hold number suggestion mode. Thus, the display mode of each number-of-holds suggestion mode displayed in the special figure 1 reserve display area Ds5 is the lottery result of the special figure 1 during variation, the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 during variation, and the special figure Since the display content is set based on the number of holding balls of 1, the player predicts the progress of the future game based on the display mode displayed in the special view 1 holding display area Ds5. It can be carried out.

  According to the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (a), although four pending number suggestion modes are displayed, regardless of the pending number of the special figure 1, four pending number suggestion modes are always displayed. Are configured to be That is, in the special view 1 reserve display area Ds5, the number of reserve of special view 1 is notified (suggested) to the player by the display contents of each reserve number suggestion mode, not the number of indications of reserve number suggestion mode There is. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current number of reservations.

  In the example of this effect, the display number of the number-of-holds suggestion mode displayed in the special view 1 reserve display area Ds5 is configured to always be displayed four (regardless of the number of reservations in special view 1), A configuration other than that may be used, and is displayed in the special view 1 reserve display area Ds 5 based on, for example, the number of reservations in special view 1, the remaining fluctuation time in special view 1, and the lottery result in special view 1. The number of indications of the number-of-retentions suggestion may be different. In this case, for example, when the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 becomes short (for example, when the remaining time becomes 10 seconds), the number of display of the number-of-holdings suggestion aspect displayed in the special figure 1 reserve display area Ds5 decreases. You should configure. This makes it possible to reduce the choices predicted by the player and to improve the player's prediction accuracy.

  Furthermore, as in the second embodiment described above, in the gaming machine configured to execute a game advantageous to the player when the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 does not exist at the time when the time saving state ends. By suggesting (displaying) the presence or absence of the number of reservations in the special view 1 as in the present rendering example, it is possible to execute the game in the time saving state while expecting the player to the end.

  Then, when the effect display of FIG. 108 (a) elapses and the fluctuation of the special view 1 stops, the display screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is displayed. The display screen shown in FIG. 108 (b) is a display screen showing an example in the case where there is no suspension of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in the state where the variation of the special figure 1 executed during the short time state is stopped. is there. As shown in FIG. 108 (b), when the first time reduction is finished in the state of no special figure 1, special figure 2 suspension, the change of the special symbol is not started (the special figure change of the second time reduction is Without being started), I will be waiting for a while. During this short standby time, by continuing to execute the right-handed game, a game is performed in which the normal symbol is continuously fluctuated (lottery) and the ball is made to enter the second ball entry port 640.

  In the configuration of the game board 13 described above with reference to FIG. 2, even if a right-handed game is executed during the time saving state, the ball does not enter the right first ball entrance 64 b, so FIG. 108 (b) The state shown in is a gaming state in which the time saving state is continuously maintained until the ball enters the second entrance 640. On the display screen, the common figure main symbol Dmc corresponding to the normal symbol is variably displayed in the first display area Dm, and the special figure 1 reserve display area Ds5 is displayed instead of the display showing the reserve number of the special figure 1 at present. The characters “Super Ejection Mode Entry” are displayed to indicate that the time is on standby for a short time, and the special display 1 variation display area Ds3 displays the special view 1 not changing, in the variable display area Ds4. The characters “remaining time 秒 seconds” in which the display mode “∞” is stopped are displayed.

  As described above, according to the presentation example described above, the player is allowed to display a display mode that causes the display screen to display the change status (lottery result, remaining change time) of the special figure 1 during the time saving state Since the effect display is performed so as to predict the progress contents of the subsequent game, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, the example of the effect mentioned above shifts to a short time waiting state which can occur in the state without special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 both ("∞" display mode is stopped and displayed in variable display area Ds4) The effect display for suggesting is also executed, but it is decided to determine whether or not to execute this effect display based on the number of pending storages (presence or absence of suspension) of Toku 1 and Toku 2 For example, when the number of pending storages of the special view 2 is one or more, the above-described effect display may not be performed.

  In the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state at the timing when the variation (lottery) of the normal symbol is executed and the gaming state at the timing when setting the operation pattern of the electrically operated accessory 640a are both time saving states, Although the operation pattern (long open) which is advantageous to the player is set as the operation pattern of the motorized role object 640a, other configurations may be used, and for example, fluctuation (lottery) of a normal symbol is performed Instead of the timing when it is determined (the timing at which the determination by the determination means is performed), the timing at which the ball has passed through the through gate 67 may be detected (the timing when the determination condition is satisfied).

  Further, the timing at which the operation of the motorized combination 640a is executed (the timing at which the operation is performed) is not the timing at which the operation pattern of the motorized combination 640a is set (the timing at which the operation mode is set by the operation mode setting means). ) May be used.

  Furthermore, when the operation pattern of the motorized combination 640a is operated a plurality of times, the operation content may be determined at each timing when each operation of the motorized combination 640a is performed. . Specifically, an operation pattern for opening the motorized accessory 640a three times is provided as an operation pattern of the motorized accessory 640a, and when an operation pattern (long opening) advantageous to the player is set, each release is performed. When the period is set to 2 seconds and the operation pattern (short open) which is disadvantageous to the player is set, when each open period is set to 0.2 seconds, the long opening is performed as the operation pattern of the motorized prize 640a. Is set, and when the time saving state ends between the second opening and the third opening, the opening period of only the third opening may be set to 0.2 seconds. By configuring in this manner, the player can return to the normal state while the game playing state is shifted to the normal state while the motorized role product 640a is operated so as to be advantageous to the player until the end during the short time state to be advantageous to the player. It is easy to suppress providing an overly advantageous state.

  In this case, only the operation pattern of the electric part 640a may be set in advance, and the opening period may be set at the timing when the electric part 640a is opened according to the operation pattern. The timing at which the operation of the motorized accessory 640a is started and the operation content may be controlled individually for each operation without setting the operation pattern of the object 640a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second ball entry port 640 in a state in which the electrically operated part 640a is open, the balls are provided at the second ball entry port 640. It is possible to enter the second entrance ball 640 in order to prevent one ball from entering into the opening operation ending condition of the motorized symbol 640a and to prevent a plurality of balls from entering the second entrance ball port 640 simultaneously. A sorting means is provided for alternately distributing the spheres into the first flow path (first flow path) and the second entrance ball passage 640 (the second flow path), and the first flow path Although it was configured so that the distance between the balls flowing down would be wide. A configuration other than that may be added to more reliably prevent the plurality of balls from entering the second entrance 640 simultaneously.

  For example, a gear type sprocket mechanism is provided on the upstream side of the second entrance 640 out of the channels (first paths) capable of entering the second entrance 640, for example, the first flow Even if a plurality of balls flow down continuously in the path, the flow-down interval of the balls may be extended by the sprocket mechanism guiding the balls one by one downstream. Thereby, it can be physically prevented that a plurality of balls enter the second entrance 640 simultaneously. As described above, in the case where the ball feeding member for feeding the ball in the downstream direction is provided on the upstream side of the second ball entry port 640 so that the flow-down interval of the ball becomes constant, the above-described distributing member may not be used. . The ball feeding member may have a configuration other than the above-described sprocket mechanism. For example, a magnetic body movable by a certain operation is provided, and the ball is sent down at a predetermined timing according to the movement position of the magnetic body ) Configuration may be used.

  Moreover, although the structure which distributes the ball | bowl fired in the right-handed game to two flow paths is used by the distribution member (distribution apparatus 700) in this embodiment, the structure which distributes a ball to three or more flow paths May be used. In this case, one distribution member may use a configuration in which the balls are distributed to three or more flow channels, or by using a plurality of distribution members in combination, the balls can be distributed to three or more flow channels. You may constitute so that it may distribute. As a result, it is possible to further widen the interval at which the ball flows down in the flow passage capable of entering the second entry port 640.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the distributing member (distributing device 700) capable of distributing the balls equally to a plurality of flow paths is used, but it is necessary to make the distribution ratio of the balls to the respective flow paths uniform. Alternatively, for example, a distributing member may be provided such that the number of balls flowing down the first flow channel 701 and the number of balls flowing down the second flow channel 702 become 1 to 2, or the distribution destination of the balls is A configuration may be provided that is randomly selected. This allows the player to be interested in the flow-down mode of the ball.

  In the second embodiment described above, a plurality of conditions for ending the time saving state are provided, and the configuration for ending the time saving state is used when any of the conditions is satisfied, but other configurations may be used. The time saving state may end when all of the set conditions for ending the time saving state are satisfied. In this case, it is preferable to use a configuration in which the player can output one of the plurality of time saving state end conditions which has already satisfied the conditions so that the player can grasp it.

  Furthermore, in the second embodiment described above, one of the conditions for the termination condition of the time saving state is that the variation (lottery) of the first special symbol is executed a plurality of times (twice) as the number of times the time saving is continued. Although such a configuration is used, the following game characteristics may be performed.

  In the third embodiment described above, when the time saving state B is set for the purpose of providing various game characteristics by changing the variation time of the normal symbol when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the time saving state is further provided. In the case where the number of times of common drawing fluctuation exceeds 40 times, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened to provide an advantageous state for the player, but the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is made different It may be configured to provide the player with a disadvantageous state, for example, a plurality of spread map fluctuation times based on the type of the symbol winning a win, and the gaming state at the time of winning a win. In the configuration in which one selection table is selected from the selection tables and the common drawing fluctuation time to be executed is selected from the selected common drawing fluctuation time selection table, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state Also IHiroshizu varying time (Hiroshizu length variation time) may be used can become configuration selection.

  In this case, when the common drawing length variation time is selected, it is not possible to execute more normal symbol lottery during the time saving state, so that the gaming state advantageous to the player is substantially ended. By configuring in this manner, the player grasps how long the substantial short time state (the gaming state is short time state and the common drawing length change time is not selected as the normal symbol change) will continue until Can provide difficult gameplay.

  In addition, when selecting the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (general drawing), the general drawing fluctuation time may be selected in advance based on the number of times of the general drawing fluctuation, or a configuration in which the fluctuation time is set in advance may be used. When setting the fluctuation time of the symbol (general drawing), a configuration may be used in which the fluctuation time corresponding to the counter value acquired from among the plurality of fluctuation times is selected based on a predetermined counter value. Furthermore, when starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol (general drawing), a predetermined lottery is executed, and when the lottery result is the predetermined lottery result, the time reduction state is being performed as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (general drawing) The common drawing fluctuation time (common drawing length fluctuation time) longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in (for example, 150 seconds) may be selected.

  As described above, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the symbol time change state which is advantageous to the player can be ended by lengthening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, thereby the player can be made to the player. It is possible to play a game while concentrating on always having a sense of tension.

  Furthermore, when predetermined conditions are satisfied, the third symbol display device 81 is executed in a configuration in which a general drawing variation time (general drawing length variation time) longer than the variation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state is selected. As the effect to be performed, when the regular drawing length variation time is selected, it is preferable to cancel the notification of the right hitting game and guide the left hitting game even if it is in the time saving state. In this case, since the special figure 1 fluctuation of the time saving state is actually still being executed, the third symbol display device 81 reduces the time saving state until the special figure 1 fluctuation of the short time is ended at that time. It is preferable to execute an effect notifying that the (continuous mode) has ended. This makes it possible for the player to think that the special figure 1 fluctuation in the time saving state is ended and the time saving state is ended.

  In addition, as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, except for the above mentioned common drawing length fluctuation time (150 seconds), it is shorter than that, but the common drawing fluctuation time (for example, longer than normal common drawing fluctuation time (3 seconds) 30 seconds or 50 seconds) may be settable. In this case, when the fluctuation time in the common drawing is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect display that seems to be the end of the time saving state, as in the case where the common drawing length fluctuation time is set. The timing at which the fluctuation time in the normal drawing ends, or immediately before the fluctuation time in the general drawing ends (for example, corresponding to the normal fluctuation time of the normal drawing) while making the player think that the time saving state has ended. It is preferable to display the effect display during the time saving state again 3 seconds before). As a result, it is possible to make the player think that he has transitioned to the time saving state a plurality of times using one time saving state, and it is possible to provide the player with a surprising game.

  Furthermore, by combining the two common drawing fluctuation configurations described above, the time short state end effect performed when the set common drawing fluctuation time exceeds the remaining period of the short time state, and the common drawing fluctuation time set It may be configured to be able to display both of the short-time-state end indication effect performed when the time is shorter than the remaining period of the short-time state. As a result, even after the time saving state end effect is executed, it is possible to play the game eagerly while giving an expectation to shift to the time saving state immediately.

  In the first embodiment described above, the operation pattern of the motorized accessory 640a is set so that the ball can not enter the second entrance 640 in the normal state (non-time-shortened state). If a ball enters the second entrance 640, game stopping means may be provided to stop the game. In this case, as the game stopping means, means for executing a firing prohibition process in which the ball is not fired even if the operation handle 51 is operated, or the ball fired by operating the operation handle 51 is the game area (game board 13 Ball collection processing to be collected before reaching the front surface), and release restriction processing to control the emission intensity of the operation handle to the emission intensity disadvantageous to the player (emission intensity that can not reach the game area) Even if a ball enters each entrance provided in the game area, it may be considered as a game invalidation processing to invalidate all the benefits (a bonus for paying out the winning balls, a bonus for executing the lottery).

  In addition, as processing for executing the game stopping means, first, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a time saving state If it is determined that the time saving state is not in effect, it is next determined whether or not the jackpot game is currently being played. Then, when it is determined that there is no jackpot game, it is preferable to determine that the current ball entry is an incorrect ball entry and to execute the game stop processing by the above-described game stop means.

  Furthermore, in the game stop means execution process described above, when it is determined that the ball has entered the second entrance 640 during the big hit game, a special benefit effect is executed instead of executing the game stop means. It is good to do. That is, during the jackpot game, although it is not in the time saving state, since it is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is played, a ball may enter the second ball entry port 640 rarely. In this case, the game stopping means is not executed, but instead, a dedicated effect for blessing the player is executed, thereby realizing that the player has had a very rare experience. The effect can be enhanced.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute the dedicated effect described above, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed in a mode that allows the player to recognize the common view variation display during the big hit game, and the electric role object 640a The timing of release (short release timing) may be predicted. As a result, the player can digest the jackpot game while paying close attention to the general drawing variation display displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

<Other Effect Example 2 Using the Configuration of the Third Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 109 to 111, the other effect example 2 using the configuration of the third embodiment will be described. In this effect example, the configuration for setting the variation time of the normal symbol is different from the third embodiment described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is a common drawing variation pattern provided according to the gaming state The setting is made based on the selection table 203aa. Here, with reference to FIG. 109, the contents of the effect performed in the present effect example 2 will be described.

  FIG. 109 shows an example of the display screen of the effect to be executed in the present effect example 2. FIG. 109 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display screen when the time saving state is started. 109 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen when a long variation is set as a variation time of a normal symbol during the time saving state. In addition, about the element same as each embodiment mentioned above, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), on the display screen of the second production example, a picture imitating a bomb is displayed as the end indication display mode Dm10 that is a trigger for reducing the remaining period of a short period, and the sub display area Ds is displayed. In the second sub-display area Ds2, the characters “Pinch when bomb explodes” indicating the content of the end indication display mode Dm10 is displayed.

  Then, when a variation time longer than the remaining period of a short period is set as the variation time of the normal symbol, the end indication display mode Dm10 is displayed in a display mode in which the end is suggested to explode, as shown in FIG. In the second sub-display area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds, the characters "Sorry end" are displayed, and the remaining time is displayed in "? Seconds".

  In this way, although it is determined that the actual short term (the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 in which the fluctuation is started during the short time) does not change, but the fluctuation of the normal symbol (general drawing) does not end within the short time then. Since the motorized character 640a does not perform the opening operation (long opening) which is advantageous to the player during a short period of time, the state advantageous to the player is substantially ended.

  In addition, in the second effect example, the display screen shown in FIG. 109 (b) is configured to be displayed when a fluctuation time longer than the remaining time period is set as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. However, if it is possible to set a fluctuation time (for example, 10 seconds) longer than the normal fluctuation time (3 seconds) as the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the same display screen is displayed even if the fluctuation time is selected Good. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the player think that the advantageous period has ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa used in the present production example 2 will be described. FIG. 110A is a schematic view in which the contents of the common drawing fluctuation pattern selection table 202aa are defined. As shown in FIG. 110 (a), when the gaming state is the time saving A, the regular drawing variation pattern selection table 202aa refers to the normal common figure variation pattern selection table 202aa1 referred to when the gaming state is the normal state. The reference time variation A common pattern variation pattern selection table 202aa2 to be referred to and the time variation B additional diagram variation pattern selection table 202aa3 to be referred to when the gaming state is B are defined, and are different according to each gaming state The variation pattern selection table is referred to.

  As shown in FIG. 110 (b), the normal spread variation pattern selection table 202aa1 is defined so that a variation pattern (variation time) of 4 seconds is always selected. As shown in FIG. 110 (c) and FIG. 110 (d), the 202aa2 and the time-saving-B attached figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202a3 respectively indicate the value of the fluctuation type counter and the normal symbol (common figure) fluctuation during the time-shortened state The variation pattern (variation time) is selected based on the number of times.

  In addition, since it is the same as that of 3rd Embodiment mentioned above about the measurement means of the number of times of a normal symbol (general drawing) fluctuation in a time saving state, the detailed description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the normal symbol variation processing 4 executed in the present production example 2 will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 4. The normal symbol variation processing 4 is different from the above-described normal symbol variation processing (refer to FIG. 45) in that the processing (S914, S915) for setting the variation time is changed, and the other is the same. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. The normal symbol variation process 4 is executed, and if it is determined that the time is not short in the process of S912 (S912: No), or if the process of S913 is finished, the variation time is set based on the common drawing variation pattern selection table 202aa And the process ends.

  As described above, according to the present effect example 2 described above, the time period (period in which the electric character 640 a is long open) which is advantageous to the player during a short period of time may be varied depending on the fluctuation time of the set normal symbol. Because it can, the player can always keep an eye on how long the advantageous period will last.

  In addition, based on the common drawing prize information command output from main control device 110, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol stored on hold is determined in advance, and the display screen of third symbol display device 81 based on the determination result May be set. In this case, for example, the end indication display mode Dm10 may not be displayed when there is no fluctuation in the fluctuation time that would exceed the short remaining period in the prior discrimination information of the fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to provide a period in which the player can play a game with peace of mind.

  Moreover, you may change an effect display mode according to the presence or absence of pending | holding memory of the special figure 2. FIG. In this case, it is preferable to display the end indication display mode Dm10 only in a state where there is no pending storage in the special view 2. As a result, it is possible to execute a game in which the player is given a sense of crisis, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

<Another Example Using the Configuration of Each Embodiment Described Above>
In each embodiment mentioned above, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) (per symbol) and when a ball passes through a specific area (V prize switch 650 e 3) ( An example using a pachinko machine 10 (so-called, 1 type 2 mixed type) in which a big hit game is executed was described in V prize winning), but the configuration of each embodiment mentioned above adopts only the symbol mentioned above You may use for the game machine (what is called, 1 type type). Next, a gaming machine will be described in the case where the configuration of each embodiment described above is used for one type.

  In the gaming machine used in other examples, the jackpot game is executed when the jackpot is won in the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) lottery, and the predetermined condition is satisfied depending on the type of jackpot that is won A game machine capable of giving a definite change state in which the probability of winning a big hit by drawing a special symbol is set higher than that of the normal state (so-called, 1 until the special symbol changes 5 times) A certainty variation type)) A bonus that is more advantageous to the player if the jackpot based on the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the jackpot based on the first special symbol (a jackpot game with a large number of rounds or a jackpot that a probability change state is likely The game is configured to be easily awarded.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state shifts to a definite change state, a change pattern having a long change time (for example, 150 seconds) is selected as a change pattern (change time) of the first special symbol as in the above-described embodiments. Make it easy. And, in a state having both the first special symbol holding storage and the second special symbol holding storage, the change (lottery) based on the second special symbol holding storage is configured to be preferentially executed (So-called special figure 2 priority change).

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to perform a game in which the holding storage of the second special symbol is acquired in the state in which the long time variation of the first special symbol is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to actively play the game during the predetermined period (during the first special symbol fluctuation in the probability change state). In addition, when using such a configuration, the first ball-loading means serving as an opportunity to acquire the pending storage of the first special symbol by playing a game (for example, right-handed game) aiming at a predetermined location in the game area Each ball entry is possible so as to be able to enter either of the (first ball entry port 64) and the second ball entry means (second ball entry port 640) that triggers the acquisition of the reserved memory of the second special symbol. It is good to arrange means. In addition, it is preferable that the second ball entering means is more difficult to enter the ball than the first ball entering means.

  Thereby, in a definite change state, a change pattern having a short change time is selected as a change pattern of the first special symbol, and during a predetermined period in which the positive change state continues (a period until the number of times of the change of the special symbol ends). A game in which the variation of the first special symbol is executed (unfavorable game) without the lottery of the second special symbol being executed (without the ball entering the second ball entry means) or the first special A fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is selected as a fluctuation pattern of the symbol, and a lottery of the second special symbol is executed during a predetermined period (period in which the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol ends five times). (A ball enters the second ball entry means), and any game with a game (advantage game) in which the variation of the second special symbol is executed will be executed.

  In this manner, the variation pattern of the first special symbol set in the definite variation state causes the probable variation state advantageous to the player and the disadvantageous variation state to be executed, so the variation of the special symbol performed in the definite variation state Can make the player pay attention to the player. Moreover, similarly to the above-described embodiments, even when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, it is possible to continue the game in which the holding storage of the second special symbol is acquired.

  In the other examples described above, although the type 1 probability variation type gaming machine has a configuration in which the probability variation state is terminated when the number of times the variation of the special symbol reaches the predetermined number, other configurations may be used, For example, each time a configuration is made to continue the definite variation state until the next jackpot is won, or each time a variation (lottery) of special symbols is executed, a lottery is performed to determine whether to end the definite variation state or not. You may use the structure which terminates a definite variation state.

  Moreover, in the other example mentioned above, the change (lottery drawing) based on the reserve memory of Toku-zu 2 is carried out using the structure by which priority is given to the change (lottery draw) based on the reserve storage of Toku-zu 2 However, the invention is not limited thereto, and the special symbol variation (lottery) may be executed in the order of acquisition of the reserved memory (in the order of winning) regardless of the special figures 1 and 2. Furthermore, the number of consecutive times (upper limit number of times) to which the definite variation state is to be applied may be set in advance, and when the upper limit number of times is reached, the positive variation state may not be applied after the big hit ends.

  Next, in the first embodiment described above, by acquiring the pending storage of the second special symbol (special figure 2) during the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed during the time saving state, Although the configuration in which the time saving state is provided again after the end of the jackpot game based on the holding storage is used, the upper limit (for example, 5 times) may be set to the number of times the time saving state is continuously provided. .

  In this case, the number of jackpots executed until the number of consecutive grants in the time-saving state reaches the upper limit is made different depending on the number of jackpot rights acquired during one time-saving state (the number of reserved memories in special figure 2). be able to. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to acquire the number of pending storages of Special Figure 2 more.

  In the first embodiment described above, although the time saving state is always provided after the end of the jackpot game based on the suspension storage of the special view 2, the jackpot gaming of the basis of the suspension storage of the special view 2 You may be comprised so that the jackpot type to which a time saving state is not provided after completion may also be selected. Thus, by continuously digesting the reserved memory of the special view 2, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times the time saving state is provided when the jackpot is continuously executed.

  That is, for example, in the case where there are four consecutive big hit games based on the pending memory with the pending memory of the special figure 2 being four, when the four pending memory of the special figure 2 is digested, The variation of the next special symbol is executed with the number of consecutive grants of the status being 4 times, but based on the pending storage that is finally digested among the big hit games based on the pending storage of the special figure 2 When the jackpot is time-saving and the others are not time-saving, the number of times of time-saving state continuous application becomes one when the four retention memories of Toku 2 are digested.

  Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether or not the number of times of continuous grant of time saving state has reached the upper limit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, since it is possible to vary the maximum jackpot count in the case where the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state reaches the upper limit depending on the jackpot type of the reserved memory of the special view 2 acquired, the player is provided with a surprising game. be able to.

  In addition, as a measuring method of the number of times of continuous application of the time saving state, it may be a method of measuring the number of times for which time saving is set with respect to the continuous big hit May be used. When the latter measurement method is used in the above-described first embodiment, when the number of times of continuous application of the time-saving state reaches the upper limit (five times) in one continuous mode, a maximum of 25 jackpots (specially If the number of pending storages in Figure 2 is the upper limit (4) each time, and the variation result in special figure 1 is the big hit every time), the jackpot of 5 times at a minimum (the number of pending storages in special figure 2 is 1 each time Each time the fluctuation result in FIG. 1 is out) is provided. As described above, when the upper limit is set to the number of consecutive grants in the time saving state, since the number of big wins executed during one continuous running mode can be varied, the player can receive the continuous running mode during the continuous running mode. It is possible to play the game eagerly.

  In addition, in a right-handed state (for example, a time reduction state or a probability change state) which is advantageous to the player, an advantageous special symbol (second special symbol) which is advantageous to the player among the special symbols and a disadvantage than the advantageous special symbol The special symbol (the first special symbol) to be the is configured to be variable (lottery), and during the right-handed state, the second special symbol is configured to be easier to meet the variation execution condition than the first special symbol In the gaming machine, when it is determined that the second special symbol is changed by the determination means which determines the type of the special symbol which is changed during the right-handed game, the display means (the third symbol display device 81) 2 Perform the effect display to display the identification information for showing the lottery result of the special symbol in a variable manner, and if it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuated by the discriminating means, the lottery result of the first special symbol is shown Of identification information for Rather than showing it, the guidance display (for example, "Reserve the reserve for the special figure 2") is urged to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 which urges the user to acquire the reserve storage of the second special symbol during the fluctuation period. It may be configured as follows.

  In this way, in the specific gaming state, based on the type of the special symbol to be executed, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 (especially, the variation display mode of the special symbol) is set to be currently set. An appropriate gaming method can be notified to the player based on the current gaming state and the current gaming content. Thus, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In addition, discrimination means is provided for discriminating the fluctuation time of the first special symbol executed during the right-handed game, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol being executed by the discrimination means is a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). If it is determined that the above is the case, the above-described guidance display may be displayed. Thereby, the player can be made to grasp the contents of the guidance display, and the game contents of the game being executed can be corrected. Further, the period in which the guidance display is displayed becomes short, and it can be suppressed that the player is confused.

  Furthermore, in each embodiment described above, the opening pattern of the motorized accessory 640a in the short time state is a total of 11 seconds of opening patterns of 3 seconds for the first opening period, 5 seconds for the closing period, and 3 seconds for the second opening period (long opening ) When the opening scenario corresponding to the set opening pattern is completed, or when one ball enters the second ball inlet 640 during the opening operation of the electric Although the condition (end condition) for ending the opening operation of the object 640a is established, different opening patterns and end conditions are set as the opening pattern of the motorized part 640a, and the above-described embodiments and May constitute a gaming machine having different playability.

  In each of the embodiments described above, the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 640 is the number of balls that enter the second ball entry port 640 when the electric powered object 640a is released during the time saving state (when the winning symbol is won in the normal symbol lottery during the time saving state). By limiting the number to one, it has been suppressed that the player is given an excessive benefit. However, by using such a configuration, a bonus provided to the player when the player wins a hit in the normal symbol lottery during the short time state (a bonus that the ball to the second entrance 640 is likely to enter) Is always constant, and there is a problem that the player's willingness to play decreases.

  Therefore, in order to solve the above-described problem, as the opening pattern (long opening pattern) of the motorized accessory 640a to be executed during the short time state, the interval at which the ball reaches the motorized accessory 640a (the ball An opening pattern is used in which an opening scenario that repeats opening for 0.2 seconds five times at 1.2 second intervals, which is an interval to be distributed, is set, and the opening scenario is ended as an end condition of the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which the end condition is set to the case where four balls enter the second ball entry port 640 during the opening operation of the motorized accessory 640a.

  By configuring in this way, when the timing at which the motorized symbol 640a is released in the long opening pattern matches the timing at which the ball reaches the motorized component 640a, one opening operation of the motorized symbol 640a is performed. , It is possible to enter up to four balls into the second entrance 640. Therefore, the game status (the ball's firing timing), a bonus (a bonus that makes it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640) to be awarded to the player when the player wins a hit in the normal symbol lottery during time saving state. The timing at which the ball reaches the motorized role object 640a) can be made different, and it can be suppressed that the game becomes monotonous.

  Furthermore, when the opening interval of the motorized role object 640a is continuously executed in the right-handed game (when the game of firing 100 balls per minute is being executed), the ball for the motorized role object 640a is used. Because it is set to 1.2 seconds as well as the timing when it arrives, it is easy to make many balls enter the second ball entrance 640 for the player who is actively playing the right-handed game. can do.

  Further, as described above using the first embodiment, the distributing member 700 for distributing game balls alternately and the flow of balls distributed by the distributing member 700 in the right area of the game board 13 The ball is configured to reach the motorized character 640 through the flow straightening means (the bending path 701a and the passage immediately below the ball falling speed) for making the distance constant, so that the right-handed game is The accuracy of the interval at which the fired ball reaches the motorized accessory 640a can be further improved when continuously executing.

  In addition, when such a configuration is used, it may be configured to execute a suggestion notification for suggesting to the player the opening timing of the motorized role product 640a. By executing this suggestion notification, it is possible to cause the player to play a game by aiming for a timing at which the ball can be easily entered into the second ball entry port 640.

  In each of the above-described embodiments, the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation as the operating means that can be operated by the player. Operation means configured as a lever that can be operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, or it can be determined that the player is operated by contact or proximity Alternatively, a touch sensor type operation means or a wireless type operation means capable of determining that the operation has been made by transmitting a predetermined radio wave may be used.

  In each embodiment mentioned above, although the 3rd symbol display for showing a player the lottery result of each symbol is performed by one display means (3rd symbol display device 81), it uses composition of other than that. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be displayed emphatically to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. In addition, as a configuration of the display means, a configuration other than a liquid crystal display may be used, and a display applying an organic electroluminescence (EL) phenomenon which emits light when voltage is applied to a layered structure using a certain organic compound. The surface of the device (organic EL display) or various three-dimensional objects (characters etc.) provided in the pachinko machine 10 is used as a screen, and the position of the three-dimensional surface (protrusion, burial relationship) is identified and then the image is displayed using a projector You may use the display apparatus (project mapping) to irradiate.

  In the case of using the above-described project mapping as display means, irradiation of image data is performed based on the data of the three-dimensional surface of the movable part provided in the pachinko machine 10 and the position data of the movable part at the time of irradiation. By configuring so as to determine the position and the content, it is possible to perform free display and enhance the rendering effect. In addition, in consideration of a case where an abnormality occurs in the movable combination that can be a screen, it is determined whether the movable condition of the movable combination is normal, and it is determined that the determination result is not normal. It is preferable to execute abnormal control so as to irradiate image data with a portion as a screen. Thus, it is possible to suppress the problem that the player can not grasp the display content displayed on the display means due to the abnormality of the movable combination.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 112 to 125, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fourth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment described above, a game (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game) for aiming the right area of the game board 13 during a jackpot state is played, and a jackpot such as the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 The ball is made to enter a winning device that enables the ball to enter during the game, and the ball is configured to be won.

  In the first embodiment configured in this manner, during the jackpot game, only the game for causing the first variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 650 to enter a ball is performed, and the game is monotonous. And there is a problem that you get bored with the game early.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, a general entrance B630 capable of entering the ball by playing a right-handed game is provided, and a ball is entered into an entrance other than the variable winning device described above during the big hit game. In addition to the winning balls that are paid out when the variable winning device is caused to enter the ball, a winning ball can be obtained. Furthermore, the prize ball for the ball entering the general ball entrance B630 is added up within a specific period during the jackpot game (for example, within the round game playing period in which the variable winning device is opened), and the third symbol display device 81 It was configured to display on.

  By configuring in this way, as a winning ball that can be obtained by the player during the big hit game, a winning ball for entering the ball into the variable winning device in which the ball can enter during the big hit game, and a general ball entry port It is possible to provide a winning ball for entering the ball to B 630, and it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly even during the jackpot game. In addition, it is displayed at a time by adding and displaying the number of winning balls for the ball entering the general entrance B 630 within a specific period (for example, during a round game playing period in which the variable winning device is opened). It is possible to increase the number of winning balls and give a strong impression to the player.

  Furthermore, the ball which entered the general ball entrance B 630 during the jackpot game can be stored in a place visible to the player during a specific period (period until the end of the jackpot round (one round)). A device (pseudo storage device) B710 is provided, and the effect of covering the opening of the out port B660 so that the stored balls enter the out port B660 only when the storage state of the pseudo storage device B710 is released A service item B 660 a is provided, and the number of award balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the ball enters the out port B 660.

  That is, in practice, the winning balls are paid out each time the ball enters the general entrance B 630, but in the present embodiment in which the number of winning balls is added for a specific period and displayed, the general ball entering within the specific period The ball entered into the mouth B630 is stored in a pseudo manner, and the number of winning balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by entering the ball into the simulated entrance (out port) B660 at the timing when the specific period has elapsed. It is possible to interlock the timing of adding and displaying and the timing of the ball entering the simulated ball entry port (out port) B 660. Therefore, a large number of prize balls paid out based on the fact that a large number of balls enter the ball entrance (out port) B 660 at a time (for a short period of time) to the player as a third symbol display device It can be made to think that it is displayed on 81, and it can be made to be interested in the game in a jackpot game.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment in the configuration of the game board 13 in that the configuration of the right area is changed, the partial configuration of the RAM 203, the main Processing executed by the MPU 201 of the control device 110 is processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the first embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 112 to FIG. 115, the configuration of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 112, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment has two flow paths through which a ball flowing down the area on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as right-handed area) It has a configuration for distributing to Next, various components provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 according to the fourth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 113 is an enlarged schematic view of the right hitting area of the game board 13. The ball that has been fired to the right-handed area and has flowed down the first flow passage B 701 a (see FIG. 112) passes through the distribution device B 700 and is distributed to the second flow passage B 701 b or the third flow passage B 701 c. The detailed configuration of the distribution device B700 will be described with reference to FIG. 114 described later, but the balls having flowed down the first flow passage B 701 a are divided into three in the second flow passage B 701 b and the third flow passage B 701 c: It is configured to be distributed at a ratio of one.

  The second flow path B 701 b is formed such that the ball which has flowed down can enter the first variable winning device 65, and the ball that has flowed out of the second flow path B 701 b is opened by the first variable winning device 65 ( When the open / close door 65b is open and the specific winning opening 65a is open), it flows down on the open / close door 65b to flow into (enter) the specified winning opening 65a. On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 65 is closed (the opening and closing door 65b is closed and the specific winning opening 65a is closed) (see FIG. 13), the front side of the first variable winning device 65 (opening and closing door 65b And the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) to flow into the out port 66 (see FIG. 112).

  In the fourth embodiment, when the first variable winning device 65 is open, the ball that has flowed out of the second flow path B 701 b is always configured to win the first variable winning device 65. A configuration other than that may be used, for example, a distribution member (nail, distribution device, etc.) for distributing the flow-down direction of the ball between the outlet of the second flow path B 701 b and the first variable winning device 65. When the first variable winning device 65 is open, only a part of the ball that has flowed out of the second flow path B 701 b may be configured to win the first variable winning device 65.

  Also, in the fourth embodiment, the first variable winning device 65 and the second flow passage B 701 b are configured separately, but for example, the surface through which the ball of the second flow passage B 701 b passes is the first variable winning device 65 You may comprise so that it may become the opening-and-closing door 65b. With this configuration, when the first variable winning device is open, the ball flowing down the second flow passage B 701b can be reliably made to enter the first variable winning device 65.

  Next, the ball distributed to the third flow path B 701 c by the distribution device B 700 flows into the inlet (inflow port) B 702 of the fourth flow path B 703 and flows down the fourth flow path B 703 to the fourth flow path It flows out from the exit part (outlet) B704 of B703. The fourth flow path B 703 is covered by a cover member (not shown) so as to be difficult to be recognized visually by the player, and a predetermined number (4 balls) of award balls are paid out on the basis of passage of the balls in the middle. A ball mouth B630 is provided.

  The ball after passing through the general entrance B 630 provided in the fourth flow path B 703 is already a winning ball, so that it does not flow down the game area on the game board 13 again. It is comprised and it is comprised so that it may flow in into a dedicated out port (out port B66, B660).

  That is, all the flow paths through which the balls flowed out from the fourth flow path B 703 described later flow down to the discharge ports (discharge ports B 66 and B 660) for discharging the balls completed with winning to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 It becomes a flow path for As described above, the player can visually recognize the flow path in which the ball that has won (entered) the ball that has won (entered) a prize in the winning opening (ball entrance) can be viewed, thereby providing various effects to the player. (Simulated effect) can be provided, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Referring back to FIG. 113, the description will be continued. The sphere that has flowed out from the outlet portion (outlet) B704 of the fourth flow path B703 reaches the storage device B 710 capable of storing the sphere, and in the storage state (the state where the storage valve B 710a is closed), It is stored in storage area B 710 b. In the fourth embodiment, the storage device B 710 is configured such that up to seven balls can be stored in the storage area B 710 b.

  In the flow path located below (downstream side) the storage device B 710, the discharge port B 660 is disposed on the upstream side of the flow path, and the discharge port B 66 is disposed downstream of the discharge port B 660 The ball which has flowed down the storage device B 710 (the ball stored in the storage device B 710, the ball which passes without being stored in the storage device B 710) flows into either the outlet B 660 or the outlet B 66, and a pachinko machine It is discharged to the outside of ten.

  In addition, as an adjustable means that can be changed into an open state in which the ball can enter the outlet B660 at the outlet B660 and a closed state in which the ball can not enter the ball at the outlet B660 (hard) B660a is arranged so as to accompany, and when the rendering service B660a is set in the open state, most (all) of the balls which flow down the storage device B710 flow into the outlet B660. The outlet B 660 and the rendering utility B 660 a are configured.

  In the fourth embodiment, the outlet B660 is provided over the entire area in the width direction of the flow path where the ball which has flowed down the storage device B710 flows down, so that the entire surface of the outlet B660 is covered. Are configured so that all balls that flow down the storage device B 710 flow into the outlet B 660 and are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 when the rendering product B 660 a is in the open state. However, other configurations may be used. For example, when the rendering service B 660 a is in the open state, all balls having flowed down from the storage device B 710 can be received and accepted by the rendering service B 660 a. The size (length in the width direction) of the outlet B 660 is set in the width direction of the flow path in which the balls flowing down the storage device B 710 flow if all of the balls are configured to be guided toward the outlet B 660. It remote may be short, may be longer.

  When the rendering product B 660 a is closed, the ball flowing down from the storage device B 710 flows downstream without flowing into the outlet B 660, flows into the outlet B 66, and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 Ru.

  As described above, in the flow path unit B 720 provided in the right hitting area of the gaming board 13 according to the fourth embodiment, an effect using a ball entering the general ball entry port B 630 (simulation effect) as described above A storage device (pseudo storage device) B 710 and a rendering use product B 660 are provided to execute an effect using a ball that has already entered a ball. In addition, because the side wall forming the flow path unit B720 separates the game area of the game board 13 and the area in which the effect (simulated effect) using the ball entered into the general ball entrance B630 is executed. Even if the effect (pseudo effect) is executed so that the player can visually recognize on the game board 13 using the ball which has already entered the ball entrance, the ball which has already entered the ball entrance again , Does not flow into the game area of the game board 13.

  Next, the structure of a distribution device B700 provided in the flow path unit B720 and distributing the inflowing ball into two flow paths will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 (a) to (d). FIGS. 114 (a) and 114 (b) are schematic diagrams showing the configuration of the distribution device B 700, and FIGS. 114 (c) and 114 (d) are the spherical flow and distribution of the first channel B 701a. It is the model which showed the relationship with apparatus B700 typically.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (a), the distributor B700 is a rotating body configured to be pivotable about an axial center, and in four directions (four directions at intervals of 90 degrees) of the rotating body. The blade member (1st blade member B700a, 2nd blade member B700b) which can contact | abut on a ball | bowl is provided. The first blade member B700a has a flat shape so that the ball having flowed down to the distribution device B700 flows down to the third flow path B701c (to flow down to the side of the rotating body of the distribution device B700) The second blade member B 700 b is such that the ball having flowed down to the distribution device 700 flows down to the second flow path B 701 b (so as to flow downward to the lower side of the rotating body of the distribution device B 700) It is comprised by the shape of a plane plate shape.

  In the fourth embodiment, since the rotator having one first blade member B700a and three second blade members B700b is used as the distribution device B700, the number of balls distributed to the second flow passage B701b and the number of balls The number of balls distributed to the three flow paths B 701c is configured to be 3: 1. Furthermore, a metal piece B700c is embedded in the side surface of the rotating body of the distribution device B700, and it can be determined whether a rotating body is rotating or not by a detection sensor (not shown). In this way, the act of modifying the distribution device B700 improperly and causing the spheres flowing into the flow path unit B720 to flow down only to one flow path (the second flow path B701b or the third flow path B701c) is performed. Can be easily determined.

  Next, referring to FIGS. 114 (c) and (d), the flow path provided in the flow path unit B720 (the flow path provided with the first flow path B701a and the distribution device B700) and the distribution device The arrangement relationship with B700 will be described. FIG. 114 (c) is a schematic view showing a state in which the second blade member B 700 b is located in the flow path. In this state, when the ball flows down the first flow passage B 701 a, the ball abuts on the second blade member B 700 b and is distributed to the third flow passage B 701 c. Then, the second blade member B700b in contact with the ball rotates 90 degrees (downwardly 90 degrees) along the flow-down direction (downward direction in FIG. 114C) of the ball, and the first blade member B700a It will be located inside.

  When two spheres pass through the sorting device B 700 from the state shown in FIG. 114 (c), transition to the state shown in FIG. 114 (d) (the state where the first blade member B 700a is positioned in the flow path) Do.

  As described above, by bringing the ball flowing down the distribution device B 700 into contact with the blade members provided on the rotating body, the flow direction of the ball is changed, and the rotating body is rotated. Since the rotor can be rotated and the blade members that can come into contact with the ball can be changed each time the wheel passes, the balls can be distributed reliably.

  Next, the display screen executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of a display screen in the time saving state. Here, with respect to the display screen shown in FIG. 85 (a), points different from the above-described first embodiment (points different from the display content of FIG. 15 (a)) will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the fourth embodiment, a configuration (simulation effect) using a storage device (pseudo storage device) provided in the flow path unit B 720 of the game board 13 and a rendering use product B 660 a is performed The third symbol display device 81 displays an effect display corresponding to the pseudo effect.

  Here, the pseudo effects performed in the fourth embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when a plurality of balls that entered the general entrance B 630 during the big hit game are stored in the storage area B 710 b of the storage device B 710 and the storage state of the storage device B 710 is released (storage valve B 710 a) An operation is performed in which the rendering use product B 660 a is in the open state so that the plurality of balls stored in the storage device B 710 flow into the outlet B 660 provided below the storage device B 710. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the ball entering the general ball entrance B630 during the jackpot game is entered into a plurality of balls (general ball entrance B630) in the discharge port B660. After being flashed, the balls stored in the storage device B 710 are summed up and displayed according to the inflow timing.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, period (remaining period) information display (for suggesting) to indicate a period (remaining period) in which the storage device B 710 is in the storage state, and the number of balls stored in the storage device B 710 An effect display for notifying the player of the storage number information display (for suggesting) to show is performed.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the ball is newly stored in the storage device B 710 in a state where the number of balls stored in the storage device B 710 is a predetermined number (for example, two) or more, the current game Among the contents, an effect of notifying the player of the game content not notified to the player (for example, the type of the game state set after the end of the current big hit game, the game information stored on hold, etc.) is executed.

  Next, an example of the display screen displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the pseudo effect executed during the big hit game will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 (a) to 118 (b). FIG. 116 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display content displayed immediately after the pseudo effect is started, and FIG. 116 (b) is a state in which the ball is stored in the storage device B710. FIG. 117 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the display content of the corresponding pseudo effect to be executed. FIG. 117 (a) is executed corresponding to the case where the storage device B 710 shifts from the storage state to the release state FIG. 117 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the display content of the pseudo effect (the second half of the pseudo effect), and FIG. 117 (b) shows another example of the display content displayed at the same timing as FIG. 117 (a) described above. FIG. 118 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of display contents of the pseudo effect to be executed after the jackpot game progresses, and FIG. 118 (b) is an end of the jackpot game Shows an example of the display content displayed on the screen And a schematic diagram.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), first, when the jackpot game is started, the value for showing the number of winning balls (number of winning balls) accompanying entering the first variable winning device 65 is the jackpot ball In the state shown in FIG. 116 (a), “150P” is displayed as a value for indicating the number of big hit balls in the number display area Dz1. In addition, “right-handed” is displayed in the guidance display area Dm4 to indicate the gaming method in the big hit game, and in the second sub display area Ds2, the number of rounds of round games currently being executed in the big hit game “ROUND2” is displayed as the number of rounds to indicate.

  Furthermore, when the pseudo effect is started during the jackpot game, “Please catch a large amount of fish by the time the Ami breaks!” Is displayed as explanatory information for explaining the contents of the effect of the pseudo effect in the main display area Dm. Storage number display area Dn10 in which a storage number display mode for displaying the number of balls stored in storage device B710 is displayed, and period information for indicating a period in which storage device B710 continues to be in a storage state is displayed The period information display area Dn11 and the suggestion display area Dn13 in which fish that can be captured during the pseudo-representation are displayed are formed.

  The display screen shown in FIG. 116 (a) is a display screen displayed immediately after the pseudo effect is performed, and the storage device B710 is set to the storage state, and one sphere is stored in the storage device B710. It is a display screen which shows a non-existing state. Therefore, a state in which there is no “fish”, which is a storage number display mode indicating that the storage device B 710 stores the spheres, is displayed in the storage number display area Dn10. Further, in the period information display area, “Ami” made of paper is displayed as a period display mode for indicating period information. As described later with reference to FIG. 116 (b), FIG. 117 (a), etc., “Ami”, which is the display mode Dn12 of this period, is scratched from the state of a new item (see FIG. 116 (a)). A transition is made to the attached state (see FIG. 116 (b)), and it is displayed to transition to the broken state (see FIG. 117 (a)) finally.

  In FIG. 116 (a), although "Ami" made of paper is displayed as the period display mode, a plurality of materials and shapes of "Ami" are prepared, and the storage device B 710 is continuously stored. The period display mode may be changed based on the length of the obtained period. By configuring in this manner, the simulated effect is started, and the player can view the display mode of the period display mode Dn12 displayed in the period information display area Dn11 for a period during which the storage device B 710 can be continuously stored. The length can be grasped, and it is possible to play a game while predicting the content of the pseudo effect to be executed from now on and the game result at the time when the pseudo effect is finished.

  In addition, when the storage device B 710 can be kept in the storage state for a long time, the player can be notified of the effect immediately after the pseudo rendering is performed. It is possible to execute the game being played.

  In the present embodiment, “Ami” is used as the period information display mode Dn12, but any display mode can be used as long as the player can grasp the period progress information (or the remaining period information). May be

  In addition, as long as the period information display mode Dn12 is displayed, any display mode may be used as long as the player can grasp (predict) the length of the currently set period.

  When the jackpot game proceeds from the state shown in FIG. 116 (a) and two balls are stored in the storage device B 710, the display screen shown in FIG. 116 (b) is displayed. In FIG. 116 (b), "210P" is displayed in the jackpot ball number display area Dz1 as a value for indicating the jackpot ball number. Furthermore, two fish are displayed as a storage number display mode for indicating the number of balls (two) stored in the storage device B 710 in the storage number display region Dn 10, and the storage device in the period information display region Dn 11 A “damaged texture” indicating that a period in which B710 continues to be stored and has been set has elapsed (the remaining period has decreased) is displayed as a period information display mode Dn12.

  Then, in the first sub-display area Ds1, “Ami has broken” is displayed as a comment indicating that the display mode of the period information display mode Dn12 has changed. By displaying in this manner, it is possible to visually notify the player of the number of balls stored in the storage device B 710 and the period (remaining period) in which the storage state of the storage device B 710 is set. The contents can be easily understood by the player.

  In the present embodiment, the number of balls stored in the storage device B 710 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the storage status of the storage device B 710 can be directly viewed by the player. However, the player may be notified of the storage status of the storage device B 710 using only at least one of them.

  When the jackpot game progresses further from the state shown in FIG. 116 (b) and the round 2 game is over, the pseudo effect (the second half of the pseudo effect) shown in FIG. 117 (a) is displayed. FIG. 117 (a) is displayed when the storage state of the storage device B 710 is canceled and the ball stored in the storage device B 710 flows into the out port B 660 based on the end of the round 2 game. It is a display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), when the storage state of the storage device B 710 is released, the five storage number display modes Dn10a displayed in the storage number display area Dn10 (the storage number is 5 in FIG. 117 (a)). B) a bag showing “20P” is displayed as a combined award ball number display mode Dn14 for showing the number of winning balls corresponding to b)), and a bonus ball number for entering the ball into the general ball entrance B630 “20P” is displayed as the number-of-winning-balls display mode Dn15.

  Further, in the state of FIG. 117 (a), since the storage state of the storage device B 710 is released, it indicates that there is no remaining period in which the storage state of the storage device B 710 is set in the period information display area Dn11. "Ami Torn" is displayed.

  When the specific display mode Dn10b is displayed in the stored number display area Dn10 in a state where the storage state of the storage device B710 is released, as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the number-of-totaled balls display mode Dn14 The display mode is changed, and a display mode more luxurious than the normal display mode (the display mode shown in FIG. 117 (a)) is displayed. Further, as the contents of a benefit given when the specific display mode Dn10b is obtained, “premium bonus earned” is displayed in the main display area Dm.

  In the present embodiment, the storage device B 710 stores the player according to the change of the display mode of the period information display mode Dn 12 displayed in the period information display area Dn 11 (change until the new item breaks). Although it is comprised so that the period set to a state may be grasped | ascertained, you may be comprised so that the period which the storage apparatus B710 is a storage state may be alert | reported using several period information display mode Dn12. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the period information display mode Dn12 displayed in the period information display area Dn11 at the time when the pseudo effect is started is displayed during the storage device B 710 is in the storage state. It is preferable to display "new brand new" as a new term information display format Dn12 after displaying "a broken Ami" which is a display mode indicating that the period has ended.

  By this configuration, it is possible to make the player temporarily think that the period in which the balls can be stored in the storage device B 710 has ended, and the stage effect can be enhanced. In addition, bonus information (for example, a gaming state (for example, which is advantageous to the player after a big hit game) which internally determines such an effect (so-called, revival effect) but does not notify the player to that effect 118 is configured to be executed when there is a transition to a definite change state etc.), and as shown in FIG. 118 (a), the suggested display mode Dn13a displayed in the suggested display area Dn13 is displayed. It is preferable to execute an effect of changing to the specific suggestion display mode Dn 13 b.

  When the jackpot game is over and the ending display of the jackpot is started, as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the jackpot ball number “2250P” acquired during the present jackpot and the bonus ball number “140P” “2390P” is displayed as total award ball number information in which “1” and “2” are added together, and “premium bonus acquisition” indicating that the specific display mode Dn10b has been acquired during the pseudo rendering is displayed.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fourth Embodiment
In the fourth embodiment, in contrast to the first embodiment, a dummy service solenoid B 229 serving as a drive source for driving the dummy lamp (storage valve B 710 a and rendering product B 660 a) to the voice lamp control device 113. The point is that the pseudo storage solenoid B 229a and the pseudo open solenoid B 229b are connected, and the content of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The pseudo storage solenoid B 229a is a drive source for changing the storage valve B 710a to the open position (the position where the storage device B 710 is in the released state) or the closed position (the position where the storage device B 710 is in the storage state) The storage valve B 710 a is positioned at the closed position by setting the storage solenoid B 229 a to ON, and the storage valve B 710 a is positioned at the open position by setting the storage solenoid B 2 a to OFF. It is set to ON based on (e.g., the start condition of the even round) being established, and is set to off based on that the predetermined end condition (e.g., the end condition of the even round) is established.

  The pseudo open solenoid B 229 b can change the effect character B 660 a to an open position (a position where the ball can flow into the out port B 660 a) or a closed position (a position where the ball can not flow into the out port B 660 a (difficult)) It is a drive source to make it turn on, and by setting the pseudo opening solenoid B 229 b to ON, the rendering character B 660 a is positioned at the opening position, and by setting it to OFF, the rendering character B 660 a is positioned to the closing position. In the jackpot game, it is set to ON based on that a predetermined start condition (for example, an even round end condition) is satisfied, and a predetermined end condition (for example, an odd round start condition) is satisfied. Set to off based on what you do.

  In the present embodiment, when the storage device B 710 is in the released state and the stored spheres flow down (drop) from the storage device B 710, the simulated storage solenoid B 229 a and the simulated open solenoid so that the balls flow into the out port B 660 The B 229 b is controlled to drive. That is, before the storage valve B 710 a of the storage device B 710 in the storage state is changed to the open position, the drive control of each solenoid is performed so that the effect role product B 660 a is opened. By comprising in this way, the ball | bowl by which the storage apparatus B710 was stored can be reliably made to flow in out port B660.

  FIG. 119 is a schematic view schematically showing an electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 119, in the fourth embodiment, a pseudo storage solenoid B 229a and a pseudo open solenoid B 229b are connected to the sound lamp control device 113 as a pseudo product solenoid B 229. The pseudo-feature solenoid B 229 is a solenoid that is set to operate when performing a pseudo-effect to perform a ball entry in a pseudo manner as described above with reference to FIG. 113, and the pseudo storage solenoid B 229 a is a pseudo It is a solenoid for changing the storage device (storage valve B 710) to a storage state in which balls can be stored or a release state in which storage is not possible (hard). By setting the pseudo storage solenoid B 229 a to ON, the pseudo storage device (storage valve B 710) is placed in the storage state, and the pseudo storage solenoid B 229 a is set to OFF, the pseudo storage device (storage valve B 710) is It is configured to be in the released state.

  The pseudo opening solenoid B 229 b is a solenoid for operating the rendering character B 660 a, and when it is set to ON, the rendering character B 660 a opens and the ball can enter the out port B 660 and is off. By setting to be, the rendering service B 660 a is closed, and the ball is in a closed state where the ball can not enter the out port B 660 (it is difficult).

  Next, the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, a pseudo effect flag 223 ya, a pseudo effect end flag 223 yb, a pseudo storage device closing flag 223 yc, a pseudo open flag 223 yd, a pseudo effect second half flag 223 ye, an end round number counter with respect to the first embodiment described above. The difference is that 223yf, an entering counter 223yg, a stored number counter 223yh, a pseudo release counter 223yi, and a pseudo entering counter 223yj are provided.

  The pseudo effect flag 223 ya is a flag set to ON when a condition for executing the pseudo effect is satisfied. The pseudo effect flag 223 ya receives a round number command in the win-related processing 5 (see FIG. 122) (S3603: Yes), and turns on when it is determined that the current round is even (S3653: Yes). It is set and referred when determining whether to execute the pseudo rendering process (S3651), and in the second half of the pseudo rendering process (see FIG. 124), the value of the pseudo entry counter and the value of the storage number counter are the same. If it is determined (S7103), it is set to OFF (S7109).

  The pseudo effect end flag 223yb is a flag set to ON based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the pseudo effect (first half of the pseudo effect) executed during the even round of the jackpot. The pseudo effect end flag 223yb is set to ON when it is determined that the odd round (except for the first round) of the big hit is finished in the win-related processing 5 (see FIG. 122) (S3658), and the pseudo effect process ( In FIG. 123), reference is made to perform operation control of the pseudo product solenoid B 229 (S7010), and among the pseudo product solenoid B 229, when the pseudo open solenoid B 229 b is set to ON, it is set to OFF (S 7014). ).

  The pseudo storage device closing flag 223 yc is a flag for indicating that the pseudo storage device B 710 is in the storage state (the storage valve B 710 a is in the closing position), and is set to ON to store the pseudo storage device B 710 in the storage state. And set to OFF, indicating that the simulated storage device B 710 is in the released state. The pseudo storage device closing flag 223yc is set to ON when the pseudo rendering process (see FIG. 123) is started (S7003), and it is determined that the value of the pseudo release counter 223yi is 1000 (S7015: Yes) ), Off (S7017).

  The pseudo opening flag 223yd is a flag for indicating the open / close state of the rendering service B 660a, and is set ON to indicate that the rendering B 660a is set at the opening position, and is set OFF This indicates that the rendering use product B 660 a is set at the closed position. The pseudo release flag 223yd is set to ON (S7011) when the pseudo open solenoid B 229b is set to ON in the pseudo effect process (see FIG. 123), and the pseudo effect second half process (see FIG. 124). When it is determined that the value of the pseudo ball entry counter 223yj is the same as the value of the storage number counter 223yh (S7103: Yes), the process is set to OFF (S7104).

  The pseudo effect second half flag 223ye is a flag for indicating that it is the second half period of the pseudo effect (period of effect to be executed after the storage device B 710 is in the release state), and is set to ON by It indicates that it is the second half period of the pseudo effect. When it is determined that the value of the pseudo release counter 223 yi is 1000 in the pseudo rendering process (see FIG. 123) (S 7015: Yes), the pseudo rendering second half flag 223 ye is set to ON (S 7019). It is referred when determining whether or not to execute the process (S7019), and it is determined that the value of the pseudo entry counter 223yj and the value of the storage number counter 223yh are the same in the second half of the pseudo rendering process (see FIG. 124). If it is (S7103: Yes), it is set to OFF (S7108).

  The end round number counter 223yf is a counter used to determine the number of rounds ended in the big hit game, and is a counter to which 1 is added each time one round game is finished during the big hit game. When it is determined that the round end command has been received (S3655: Yes), the end round number counter 223yf is incremented by 1 (S3656), and the pseudo effect end flag 223yb is turned on. It is referred when determining whether or not to set (S3657). Although not shown, the finish round number counter 223yf determines that the big hit finish command has been received in the win-related processing 5 (see FIG. 122) (S3606: Yes), that is, when the big hit game is finished, The value is cleared to 0.

  In the present embodiment, each time a round end command is received, the value of the end round number counter 223yf is incremented by 1 to determine what round in the big hit game the ended round is. For example, a value corresponding to the number of rounds set for the jackpot game to be executed this time is the jackpot game start (from the start of the opening period to the start of the first round). Even if it is set as the number of remaining rounds based on any timing between them, it is configured to subtract the value corresponding to one round from the value for indicating the number of remaining rounds every time a round end command is received. Good. By configuring in this manner, in addition to the number of rounds already ended in one jackpot game, it is possible to grasp the number of remaining rounds. In addition to that, when a new round game is started in the jackpot game, the round number determination means for determining what round the round game to be started this time is, and the number of rounds storage storing the determination result Means configured to determine, on the basis of the number of rounds stored in the number-of-rounds storage means, what number round of the round game ended this time when the round end command is received It is also good. In addition, it is configured to add information (round number information) for indicating the number of rounds of the finished round to the round end command output from the main control unit 110 and output the command output from the main control unit 110 The present invention may be configured to determine what round the round game ended this time was based on the contents of.

  The ball entry counter 223yg is a counter for counting the ball that has entered the first variable winning device 65 during the round game of the jackpot game, and when determining the period until one round ends. It is referred to.

  The storage number counter 223 yh is a counter for counting the number of balls stored in the storage device B 710, and is incremented by one when a sphere newly flows into the storage device B 710.

  The pseudo release counter 223 yi is a counter for counting a period during which the rendering character B 660 a is open, and the control to open the storage valve B 710 a is executed based on the value of the counter becoming a predetermined value. Be done. As described above, by configuring the storage valve B 710 a to be opened after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the rendering service B 660 a is opened, the rendering service B 660 a is always required when the storage device B 750 is released. It can be in an open state.

  The pseudo entering counter 223 y j is a counter for counting the number of balls entering the out port B 660, and counts a value detected by a detecting unit (not shown).

Regarding Control Process in Fourth Embodiment
The control process in the fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that a part of the control process in the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 is changed. It is the same, and the detailed description is omitted.

  In the first embodiment described above, the main control device 110 executes control for driving the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 as control processing during the big hit game, and the voice lamp control device 113 performs the first control. The control for performing an effect based on the operation of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650 is performed.

  On the other hand, the fourth embodiment is different in that control processing for causing the sound lamp control device 113 to perform pseudo effects is added as control processing in the jackpot game. As described above, it is possible to enhance the effect in the jackpot game by configuring the pseudo effect during the jackpot game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, the jackpot control process 5 (S1704) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 5 (S1704). This jackpot control process 5 (S1704) is executed in the main interrupt process (see FIG. 53), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, or 1) A process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a.

  In the jackpot control process 5, first, it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801). Specifically, if the big hit start flag 203h is set to ON by the process of S219 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), it is determined that the big hit of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1801, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1801: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF (S1802), and the opening command is set (S1803).

  The jackpot start command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the jackpot start command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display jackpot start command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives a display jackpot start command, an effect of starting a jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. When the process of S1803 ends, the storage cancellation flag 203p is set to ON (S1804), and this process ends.

  On the other hand, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started in the process of S1801 (S1801: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1805). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. Specifically, the determination is made based on whether or not the big hit medium flag 203i is on. If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol in the process of S1805 (S1805: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1805, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S1805: Yes), it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round (S1806). If it is the start timing of a new round (S1806: Yes), the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is opened (S1807), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set ( S1808). After the round number command is set, this processing ends. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1701) of the main process (see FIG. 53) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display round number command according to the round number to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, a new round effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the continued jackpot is executed in the audio lamp control device 113, a display round number command according to the cumulative number of round numbers is transmitted. Therefore, the accumulated number of rounds in the continued jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the jackpot has continued for a long time, so that the interest of the player can be improved.

  On the other hand, in the process of S1806, if it is not the start timing of a new round (S1806: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after opening the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, or a predetermined number of balls (for example, the first variable winning device 65) In the case of winning a total of 10 pieces, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

  In the process of S1809, when the closing condition of the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is closed. (S1810), a round end command is set (S1851), and this processing ends. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the first specified winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65 is not satisfied (S1809: No), it is determined whether it is the timing of the big hit end (S1811). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds) in which a lot of prize balls are paid out from the normal time is finished, it is determined that it is the timing of the big hit end.

  In the process of S1811, when it is the timing of the big hit end (S1811: Yes), the big hit end command is set (S1812), and the big hit flag 203i is set off (S1813).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special game being executed was a jackpot B (S1814). If it is determined in the process of S1814 that the jackpot is not B (7R: 7: 00) (S1814: No), the hour-time middle counter 203g is set to 1 (S1815), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1814 that the jackpot is B (7R hour short nonstop) (S1814: Yes), the process of S1815 is skipped, and the process ends.

  The jackpot end command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. Upon receiving the jackpot end command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects a display mode of the jackpot end effect based on the winning information stored in the special drawing prize information storage area 223 a of the RAM 223. Then, a display jackpot end command according to the display mode of the selected jackpot end is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot end command, the third symbol display device 81 starts an effect of jackpot end.

  If it is determined in the process of S 1811 that the present is not the timing of the big hit end (S 1811: No), it is next determined whether or not the ball has entered the specified winning opening (S 1852). Here, if it is determined that the ball has entered the specified winning combination (S1852: Yes), the corresponding ball entry command is set (S1853), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1852 that it is not the timing for entering the specified winning combination (S1852: No), the process is ended.

  In the present embodiment, in the process of S1853, a ball entry command for indicating that the ball has entered the specified winning combination port is set, and the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ball entry command received. Although it is configured to determine what number in the jackpot game this time the ball entry command is in the game by calculating, other configurations may be used, for example, the jackpot control process 5 (S1704 In the reference), when entering the specified winning a prize is determined, the number of entered balls determined during the round currently being executed is added, and information for showing the addition result during each round in the jackpot game It may be set as a ball entry command indicating the ball number. Thereby, the process performed by the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 side can be reduced. In addition, the main lamp control unit 110 and the voice lamp control unit 113 execute processing to calculate the number of balls, and the processing result is compared on the voice lamp control unit 113 side, thereby achieving higher accuracy. An effect using information can be executed, and it can be determined whether each control device is normal.

  Next, the hit-related processing 5 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the hit-related processing 5 (S3212). The hit related process 5 (S3212) is a process that is executed when it is determined in the command determination process (see FIG. 61) that a hit related command has been received.

  In the hit-related processing 5, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command has been received (S3601). When it is determined that the jackpot start command has been received (S3601: Yes), the display jackpot start command is set (S3602), and the process ends. The display jackpot start command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 60) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display jackpot start command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display an effect indicating (informing) the start of the jackpot.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S3601: No), it is then determined whether a round number command has been received (S3603). If it is determined in the process of S3603 that the round number command has been received (S3603: Yes), 1 is added to the round number accumulation counter (S3604). Thereafter, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter (S3605).

  After the process of S3605, next, it is determined whether the value of the round number accumulation counter is an even number, that is, whether the current timing is the start timing of the even round (S3653), and it is the start timing of the even round When it is determined that (S3653: Yes), the pseudo effect flag is set to ON, and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the current timing is not the start timing of the even round (the start timing of the odd round) (S3653: No), the present processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3603 that the round number command has not been received (S3603: No), it is determined whether the round end command has been received (S3655). If it is determined in the process of S3655 that the round end command has been received (S3655: Yes), 1 is added to the end round number counter (S3656). Next, it is determined whether the value of the end round number counter 223yf is an odd number excluding one (S3657). If it is determined that the value is an odd number excluding one (S3657: Yes), the pseudo effect end flag 223yb is turned on. Is set (S3658), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number is not an odd number except 1 (1 or an even number) (S3657: No), the processing of S3658 is skipped, and the present processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S3655 that the round number command has not been received (S3655: No), it is determined whether the big hit end command has been received (S3606). If it is determined in the process of S3606 that a big hit end command has been received (S3606: Yes), a big hit end command for display is set (S3607), and the process ends. Although not shown, when it is determined in the process of S3606 that a big hit end command has been received, a process is executed in which various flags set during big hit game or various counters are all set to initial values. Ru.

  In the fourth embodiment, only the control process related to the big hit game is shown as the hit related process 5 (FIG. 122), and the control process related to the small hit game is omitted, but when the small hit game is executed, Processing similar to that of the first embodiment described above is performed. In the case of executing the above-mentioned simulated effect during the small hitting game, the start condition for starting the pseudo effect process during the small hitting game and the ending condition for ending the pseudo effect process are set, When each condition is satisfied, the same process as that of the fourth embodiment may be performed. As described above, if the pseudo effect is configured to be executed even during the small hitting game, the frequency of executing the pseudo effect can be increased, and the effect can be further enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the start condition of the pseudo effect is established during the big hit game, the pseudo effect is configured to be executed, but other than that, the gaming state in which the right-handed game is executed is set In the meantime, the start condition of the pseudo effect may be established. For example, when the variation pattern for indicating the lottery result of the special view 2 executed during the definite variation state is a specific variation pattern, the pseudo effect may be performed.

  Further, the start condition of the pseudo effect may be established while the gaming state in which the left hitting game is executed is set. As a result, it is possible to bring about a change in the game operation for the player who has been performing the left-handed game continuously for a long time. Furthermore, when the game state is set to the normal state and the left-handed game is executed, it is configured to execute the pseudo effect during the variation of the symbol winning in the special figure hit, and as a result of the pseudo effect The player may be notified of the winning.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 123, the pseudo rendering process (S3652) executed in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo rendering process (S3652). This pseudo effect process (S3652) is a process of controlling the driving of the storage valve B 710a and the effect for use product B 660a of the storage device B 710 as a pseudo effect to be executed during the big hit game, and the third symbol display device 81. It is a process for determining the display content to be displayed.

  When the pseudo rendering process (S3652) is executed, it is first determined whether the pseudo storage device closing flag 223yc is on (S7001), and when it is determined that it is not on (is off) (S7001: No) Then, the pseudo storage solenoid B 229a is set to ON (S7002), the pseudo storage device closing flag 223yc is set to ON (S7003), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S7001 that the pseudo storage device closing flag 223yc is on (S7001: Yes), the third symbol display device is based on the value of the ball entry counter 223yg and the value of the storage number counter 223yh. A display pseudo rendering command for display on 81 is set (S7004).

  After the process of S7004, the information stored in the special drawing winning information storage area 223a is read (S7005), and it is determined whether there is winning information indicating a big hit among the read information (S7006). If it is determined that there is no winning information indicating a jackpot (S7006: No), it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a probability variation hit (S7007). In the process of S7006, when it is determined that there is winning information indicating a big hit (S7006: Yes), or when it is determined in the process of S7007 that the present big hit is a definite variation hit (S7007; Yes), the stored number counter It is determined whether the value of 223yh is 2 or more (S7008). If it is determined that the value is 2 or more (S7008: Yes), a display specific display mode command is set (S7009), and the process proceeds to S7010. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number is less than 2 (1 or less) (S7008: No), the process of S7009 is skipped and the process proceeds to S7010.

  That is, in the case where a predetermined benefit condition (there is winning information indicating a winning or the present jackpot is a probability variation winning) is established when the pseudo rendering is being performed, the benefit condition is indicated. The privilege information (display specific display mode) is configured to be notified when a predetermined notification condition (the value of the stored number counter 223yh is 2 or more) is satisfied.

  That is, the bonus information that is advantageous to the player is displayed using a pseudo-effect for adding and displaying the number of prize balls to be paid out based on having entered the general entrance slot B 630 during the big hit game for a specific period. Since the notification is made, it is possible to give an interest by pseudo-representation. In addition, since it is set such that storing a predetermined number or more (two or more) of balls in the storage device B 710 is a condition for notifying benefit information, it is desirable to store many balls in the storage device B 710. The player can actively play the game, and by storing many balls in the storage device B 710, the number of prize balls to be paid out based on having entered the general entrance slot B 630 during the big hit game. Can increase the impact of the combined display of the number of winning balls.

  In the present embodiment, information indicating that there is winning information indicating a win, or information indicating that the current jackpot is a probability variation win is set as a benefit that can be notified as a pseudo effect, but Information other than the above may be used as a benefit. For example, it is determined whether or not to display a benefit video that can not normally be viewed by the player, and it is determined that the benefit video can be displayed based on the determination result. The bonus image may be set as a bonus that can be notified as a pseudo effect. In addition, a plurality of benefits may be settable, and a special notification mode may be provided which is executed only when the plurality of benefits are determined as redundantly notifyable benefits. As a result, it is possible to make the player more interested in the contents of the effect to be executed in the pseudo effect, and the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

  Referring back to FIG. 123, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the current jackpot is not a definite change in the process of S7007 (S7007: No), or if the value of the stored number counter 223yh is not 2 or more in the process of S7008 (S7008: No), or If the processing has been completed, it is next determined whether the pseudo effect end flag 223yb is set to on (S7010). If it is determined in the process of S7010 that the pseudo effect end flag 223yb is set to ON (S7010: Yes), the pseudo open solenoid B 229b is set to ON (S7011), and the pseudo open flag 223yd is set to ON ( In step S7012, the value of the pseudo release counter 223yi is set to 1 (S7013), the pseudo effect end flag 223yb is set to OFF (S7014), and the processing ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S7010 that the pseudo effect end flag 223yb is not on (S7010: No), it is then determined whether the value of the pseudo release counter 223yi is 1000 (S7015). If it is determined that the value of the pseudo release counter 223 yi is 1000 (S 7015: Yes), the pseudo storage solenoid B 229 a is set to OFF (S 7016), and the pseudo storage device closing flag 223 yc is set to OFF (S 7017). The value of the release counter 223 yi is cleared to 0 (S 7018), the pseudo effect second half flag 223 ye is set to ON (S 7019), and this processing ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S7015 that the value of the pseudo release counter 223yi is not 1000 (less than 1000) (S7015: No), it is determined whether the pseudo effect second half flag 223ye is on (S7020). When it is determined that is, the second half of the pseudo rendering processing is executed (S7021), and the present processing is ended. When it is determined that the latter is turned off, the present processing is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 124, the second half of the pseudo effect process (S7021) executed in the pseudo effect process (see S123) will be described. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the contents of the second half process (S7021) of the pseudo effect. In this second half of the pseudo effect processing (S7021), among the pseudo effects executed during the big hit game, the contents (see FIG. 117) of the effect (second half of the pseudo effect) to be executed after the storage state of the storage device B 710 is released. It is a process for making a decision.

  When the second half of the pseudo effect processing (S7021) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entry in the pseudo winning opening (out port B660) (S7101). This determination is made based on the detection result of a ball detection sensor (not shown) provided in the out port B660. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113, the width of the out port B660 is configured to be three balls, and three balls are flowed into the out port B660 at one time. There is. Then, three flow paths (not shown) in which three balls are aligned and flow down are formed in the out port B 660, and ball detection sensors (not shown) are disposed at intervals in each of the three flow paths. It is put and placed. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow a plurality of balls to flow into the out port B 660 in a short period of time, and to simultaneously detect the balls in each flow path can be suppressed. Therefore, it can suppress that a pseudo rendering process is extended, and can improve a rendering effect.

  If it is determined in the process of S7101 that there is no ball entry in the pseudo winning opening (out port B660) (S7101: No), this processing is ended and the ball is inserted in the pseudo winning opening (out port B660). If it is determined that there is a sphere (S7101: Yes), the value of the pseudo entry counter 223yj is incremented by 1 (S7102), and it is determined whether the value of the pseudo entry counter 223yj is the same as the value of the storage number counter 223yh. It discriminates (S7103).

  In the process of S7103, when it is determined that they are not the same (S7103: No), that is, when all the balls stored in the storage device B 710 have not entered the simulated winning opening (out port B 660), This process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S7103, if it is determined that they are the same (S7103: Yes), that is, if all the balls stored in the storage device B710 enter the pseudo winning opening (out port B660) The open solenoid B 229 b is set to OFF (S 7104), a display pseudo prize command is set (S 7105), the value of the pseudo ball entry counter 223 yj is cleared to 0 (S 7106), and the value of the stored number counter 223 yh is cleared to 0. (S7107), the pseudo effect second half flag 223ye is set to off (S7108), the pseudo effect flag 223 ya is set to off (S7109), and the process ends. In this embodiment, a command (display pseudo winning command for display) indicating the content of the second half of the pseudo effect is set when it is determined that all the balls stored in the pseudo winning opening (out port B 660) have entered. It is composed of This makes it possible for the player to think that the winning balls have been paid out based on the ball entering the pseudo winning hole (out port B 660). The timing for setting a command (pseudo prize winning command for display) indicating the content of the second half of the pseudo effect may be other timing, for example, based on the fact that the storage valve B 710 a is released (the storage device B 710 is released It may be set based on the setting, or may be set based on the timing when it is determined that one ball has entered the pseudo winning opening (out port B 660).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 125, the counter updating process 5 (S3111) executed in the main process (see FIG. 60) of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the contents of counter update processing 5 (S3111). The counter update process 5 (S3111) is different from the counter update process (S3111) of the first embodiment described above in that a process for updating the value of the pseudo release counter 223yi is added. The same processes as the counter updating process (S3111) of the first embodiment described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  When the counter updating process 5 (S3111) is executed, first, the processes of S4101 to S4106 are performed as in the counter updating process of the first embodiment described above. Next, it is determined whether the value of the pseudo release counter 223 yi is 0 (S 4151). When it is determined that it is not 0 (S 415 1: No), the value of the counter is incremented by 1 (S 4152), and this processing ends Do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4151 that the value of the counter is 0 (S4151 Yes), the present process ends.

  As described above, one second after the pseudo open solenoid B 229 a is set to ON by executing the process of updating the value of the pseudo open counter in the counter update process 5 executed at an interval of 1 millisecond (the pseudo open When the value of the counter 223 yi is updated to 1000), the pseudo storage solenoid B 229 a can be set to ON.

  As described above, in the fourth embodiment, a general entrance B 630 capable of entering the ball by playing a right-handed game is provided, and a prize ball can be expected other than the above-described winning device during the big hit game. Configured. Furthermore, it is comprised so that the prize ball with respect to the ball which entered the general ball entrance B630 within the specific period in a big hit game may be collectively displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81.

  By configuring in this way, as a winning ball that can be obtained by the player during the big hit game, a winning ball for entering the ball into a winning device capable of entering the ball only during the big hit game, and a general ball entry port B630 And a winning ball for entering the ball, and the player can play the game with enthusiasm during the jackpot game. In addition, it is possible to increase the number of winning balls displayed by collectively displaying the number of winning balls for the ball entering the general entrance B 630 within a specific period, which gives a strong impression to the player. Can be given.

  Furthermore, a storage device capable of storing a ball that has entered the general entrance B 630 during the big hit game in a spot visible to the player for a specified period (a period until the end of the big hit round (one round) A storage device B 710) is provided, and an effect for covering the opening of the out port B 660 so that the stored balls enter the out port B 660 only when the storage state of the pseudo storage device B 710 is released. The object B 660 a is provided, and the number of award balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that the ball enters the out port B 660.

  That is, in practice, the winning balls are paid out each time the ball enters the general entrance B 630, but in the present embodiment where the number of winning balls is collectively displayed for a specific period, the general entrance within a specific period The balls that entered the ball in B630 are stored in a pseudo manner, and the number of winning balls is summarized in the third symbol display device 81 by entering the ball into the false ball entrance (out port B660) at the timing when the specific period has elapsed. It is possible to interlock the timing at which the display is displayed with the timing at which the ball enters the simulated entrance (out port B 660). Therefore, for the player, a large number of prize balls paid out are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fact that a large number of balls enter the simulated entrance (out port B 660) at one time. It can be made to think that it is being done, and it can make the game in the jackpot game interested.

  In addition, the ball fired to the right area of the game board 13 by the sorting device B700 is used as a ball flow path (second flow path B701b) in which the ball can enter the first variable winning device 65 and a simulated storage device B710. Because it is configured to be distributed to the ball flow channel (third ball flow channel B 701c) where the balls can be stored at a ratio of 3: 1, during the jackpot game (the first variable winning device 65 a predetermined number of balls (round The number of balls flowing down the second flow path B 701 b can be limited in a period of several x 10 spheres). Thereby, it is possible to suppress the game in which the ball is kept entering the general ball entrance B 630 without entering the ball in the first variable winning device 65 during the big hit game.

  In the fourth embodiment, most of the balls having flowed down the second flow path B 701b are configured to be able to enter the first variable winning device 65 during opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Between the outlet of the second flow passage B 701 b and the first variable winning device 65, an adjustment member (such as a nail) capable of distributing and adjusting the flow-down direction of the ball may be provided. In this case, if the adjusting member is adjusted so that the winning ratio to the first variable winning device 65 of the ball which has flowed down the second flow path B 701 b by the right-handed game becomes low, the third flow path B 701 c flows down during the big hit game The number of balls increases, and the number of balls entering the general ball entrance B 630 during the jackpot game can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively disadvantageous gaming machine by adjusting the adjustment member.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the ball fired to the right area of the game board 13 is distributed by the distribution device B 700 to the second flow path B 701 b and the third flow path B 701 c at a ratio of 3: 1. However, the balls may be distributed at other ratios (for example, 4: 1). In this case, even if the right-handed game is executed when the gaming state is the normal state, the ball is paid out from the gaming machine rather than the number of balls fired by the player based on the ball entering the general entrance B630. It may be configured to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the number of winning balls is increased (the popping rate exceeds 100%), for example, the third flow path compared to the fourth embodiment. In the case where the distribution device B700 is configured to cause many balls to flow down to B701 (when the distribution channel B701b and the third flow channel B701c are distributed at a ratio of 2: 1), the third A second distribution device is provided between the channel B 701c and the general inlet port 630, and a half of the ball flowing down the third channel B 701c is configured to enter the general inlet port B630, or a general inlet Prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the ball mouth B630 There may be or configured to be two. Thereby, the right-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set, and it is possible to suppress the game in which the ball is illegally acquired.

  In addition, when it is determined that the right-handed game is being continued for a predetermined period while the normal state is set, the third symbol display device displays a guidance display for restricting the game method to the player. A fraud monitoring process may be provided to display at 81 or to notify using another device or to stop the game. Thereby, the right-handed game is performed in the state where the normal state is set, and it is possible to further suppress the game in which the ball is illegally acquired.

  In the fourth embodiment, a period in which the simulated storage device B 710 is put into the storage state is set as a period in which a specific round in the jackpot game is executed (period in which even round starts and the next odd round ends). Therefore, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stored in the pseudo storage device B 710 during one period in which the storage state is set can be determined in advance.

  Accordingly, since it is not necessary to design the storage space of the pseudo storage device B 710 larger than necessary, the limited area of the game board 13 can be effectively utilized. In addition, when detecting the state where the sphere above specified number of spheres is stored to the pseudo retention device B710, for example, only one sphere which flows into the simulated storage device B710 exceeding the predetermined upper limit number is a specific place The storage space of the pseudo storage device B 710 is formed to be able to be stored, and when it is detected that a ball has been stored in the specific location, it is determined that the game machine is abnormal and the notification of the abnormality is notified to the outside The abnormal signal may be output or abnormal processing may be executed to stop the game.

  In such a situation, for example, when the sorting apparatus B 700 breaks down (damages) and balls can not be properly sorted, or a ball clogging occurs in the second flow path B 701 b, the first variable winning apparatus This occurs when the ball no longer reaches 65. Therefore, by executing the abnormal processing, it is possible to suppress the situation where the game is continuously performed with the abnormal state.

  In the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 114, since the second flow passage B700b is disposed immediately below the distribution device B700, for example, a blade member of the distribution device B700 (first blade When the member B 700a and the second blade member B 700 b) are broken and the ball reaching the distribution device B 700 passes without rotating the distribution device B 700, the ball flows in the second flow passage B 700 b. It is configured to flow down. By configuring in this manner, even if the wing members of the sorting apparatus B 700 are broken due to the collision of the balls, a benefit (the entering of the balls into the first variable winning device 65) becomes advantageous to the player. Can be provided). In addition, in such a state, although the game which makes a ball enter the first variable winning device 65 during the big hit game can be executed continuously, the ball can be made to enter the general ball entrance B630. For example, detection means for detecting a ball flowing down the first flow passage B 701 a and detection means for detecting the rotation of the distribution device B 700 are provided, and vibration is applied to the ball flowing down the first flow passage B 701 a. Detection means for determining whether or not the dividing device B 700 is rotating properly, detection means for detecting a ball flowing down the second flow path B 701 b, detection means for detecting a ball flowing down the third flow path B 701 c , And a determination means for determining whether the ratio of the number of balls flowing down each flow channel satisfies a predetermined condition, or the number of balls that entered the first variable winning device 65 during a big hit game And the jackpot It may be or provide a discriminating means for discriminating whether the ratio of the sphere number that ball entrance generally ball entrance opening B630 in technique meets predetermined conditions. This makes it possible to determine whether a proper game is being executed during the jackpot game.

  In the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot game, the timing to start a predetermined round (even round) is defined as a condition (storage start condition) for setting the simulated storage device B 710 in the storage state, but the jackpot A condition different from the fourth embodiment may be defined as the storage start condition as long as the pseudo storage device B 710 can be set to the specific period storage state during the game. For example, when a predetermined number (more than a predetermined number) of balls are made to enter into the first variable winning prize device 65 during one big hit round (the number of balls which are larger than the number of balls which is the round end condition is the first variable winning) The storage start condition may be a case where the ball is entered into the device 65 (so-called, overflow winning). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to play a game eagerly to cause the first variable winning device 65 to enter many balls. In addition, the storage start condition may be changed according to the type (special figure 1, special figure 2) of the special symbol that has won the jackpot, and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot type or the jackpot. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot which is easy to store the balls in the simulated storage device B 710 during a jackpot game and a jackpot which is hard to store balls, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect during the jackpot. Furthermore, when a jackpot game is started, one storage start condition may be randomly set among a plurality of storage start conditions.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, in the jackpot game, a condition for setting the timing at which the predetermined round (odd number round) ends to shift the pseudo storage device B 710 from the storage state to the release state (storage release condition) However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage release condition is satisfied when a specific period (for example, 20 seconds) elapses after the pseudo storage device B 710 is set to the storage state. You may In this case, it is possible to play the game eagerly in order to store many balls in the simulated storage device B 710 within a limited period. In addition, by setting the storage release condition of the pseudo storage device B 710 to the timing when the round ends as in the fourth embodiment, the operation of causing the ball stored in the pseudo storage device B 710 to flow downward during the inter-round interval It is possible to As a result, the player can be made interested during the closing of the first variable winning device 65 (during the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

  In the fourth embodiment described above, the number of winning balls for the ball entering the general entrance B 630 during the specific period (during the period when the pseudo storage device B 710 is set to the storage state) is added after the specific period. The third symbol display device 81 is configured to be displayed. As a result, since it is possible to collectively display the winning balls for the balls entering other than the first variable winning device 65 (general ball entry port B 630) during the jackpot, the number of winning balls having an impact on the player is obtained. It can be displayed.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, among the spheres entering the general entrance B 630 during the specific period, the spheres for which the number of winning balls is not displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are stored in the pseudo storage device B 710 As described above, the player can view the storage situation so that the player can predict the number of winning balls to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the future. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game in an effort to make the simulated storage device B 710 store balls.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, according to the situation in which the ball is stored in the pseudo storage device B 710 and the situation in which the ball stored in the pseudo storage device B 710 enters the out port (pseudo ball inlet) B 660 The third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute a pseudo effect for displaying a winning ball. As a result, the ball enters the simulated entrance B660 for the player due to the operation status of the simulated storage device B710 and the simulated entrance B660 and the simulated effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be made to think that a prize ball is paid out based on a thing, and a presentation effect can be heightened.

  Furthermore, when the number of balls stored in the pseudo storage device B 710 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, two) as a pseudo effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), Since the effect of suggesting the gaming state after the end of the currently-performing jackpot game and the lottery result of the special symbol stored on hold is configured to be executed, a pseudo-effect is given to the player. While being able to make you pay more attention, it is possible to play a game eagerly in order to make a simulated storage device B 710 store balls so that a simulated effect proceeds.

  Further, in the simulated effect executed in the fourth embodiment, since the period progress information corresponding to the passage of the period in which the simulated storage device B 710 is continuously stored is also displayed, the storage state for the player It becomes possible to grasp the remaining period for which is set. In this way, it is possible to play the game eagerly in order to store the balls in the simulated storage device B 710 within the remaining period.

  The above-described fourth embodiment is configured such that a corresponding winning ball is paid out based on the fact that the gaming ball has actually entered (passed) the general entrance B630. That is, there is a time difference between the timing at which the winning balls are actually paid out and the timing at which the number of winning balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, in the fourth embodiment, while the payout of the winning balls for entering the ball to the first variable winning device 65 is being performed during the jackpot game, the pseudo effect using the above-described pseudo storage device B 710 is performed. As executed, the storage start condition of the pseudo storage apparatus B 710 is an even round (the second round at the shortest).

  That is, when the timing at which the first round (the first round (odd round)) of the jackpot game is started is set as the storage start condition, before the first variable winning device 65 enters the ball in the first round In some cases, the ball may enter the general ball entrance B630, and a prize ball may be paid out. When such a situation occurs, there is a problem that the player is easily noticed that the effect using the pseudo storage device B 710 is a pseudo effect, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

  On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the ball has entered the first variable winning device 65, and the simulated storage device B 710 is operated during the period when the payout of the winning balls is executed for the entering ball. Because it is configured to execute the pseudo-representation used, the payout ball for the ball entering the general entrance B630, the prize ball for the ball entering the first variable winning device 65 It is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the effect using the simulated storage device B 710 is a pseudo effect, and to suppress the decrease in the effect of the effect. .

  In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problem, for example, as the payout process of winning balls for the ball entering the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, the winning balls are immediately paid out in the first round In the second and subsequent rounds, the payout speed may be controlled to be continued to be performed (the payout speed may be slower than in the first round) so that the payout balls are continuously dispensed. As a result, during the jackpot game period, the period in which the winning balls for the ball entering the first variable winning device 65 can be paid out can be extended, and effects using the above-described simulated storage device B 710 can be performed. The period can be increased.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the execution start condition of the pseudo effect using the pseudo storage device B 710 is the start timing of the even round, but in addition to that, the remaining number of rounds and the payout of the present prize ball are completed. It may be determined whether or not to execute a simulated effect using the simulated storage device B 710 based on the number of balls that are not present.

  Further, during the jackpot game, depending on the timing, a ball may be collected in the out port B66 without being stored in the simulated storage device B710 despite entering the general winning port B630. In this case, the number of balls collected to the out slot B 66 during the jackpot game, and the number of winning balls for that ball (the number of balls paid out when passing through the general entrance B 630 before being collected to the out slot B 66 A means may be provided to calculate and store the number, and the winning ball number may be added by a pseudo effect to be executed immediately after. As a result, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on having entered the general ball entrance B 630 during the jackpot game can be added up more and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Furthermore, in the fourth embodiment, although it is configured to immediately pay out the winning balls based on the ball entering (passing) the general entrance B630, the ball is sent to the general entrance B630. The number of award balls to be paid out may be determined based on entering (passed), and the determined number of award balls may be paid out at a timing corresponding to the pseudo effect.

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, the second flow path B 701 b for causing the balls to flow down to the area where the first variable winning device 65 is disposed by the sorting device B 700, the general ball entry port B 630 and the simulated storage device B 710 are arranged. Although the configuration in which the ball is distributed to the third channel B 701 c that causes the sphere to flow down to the provided area is used, a configuration in which the distribution device B 700 is not provided may be used. In this case, the ball fired when the player plays a game (right-handed game) aiming at a specific area (for example, the right area) of the game board 13 is either the first variable winning device 65 or the general ball entrance B630. Also, it may be configured to be capable of entering a ball, and may be configured to be able to store a sphere that has entered the general entrance B630 into the simulated storage device B710.

  Furthermore, when configured without using the sorting apparatus B700, it may be difficult to provide an upper limit to the number of balls stored within the period in which the pseudo storage apparatus B710 is set to the storage state, If a predetermined number or more of spheres reach the pseudo storage device B 710 in which the storage state is set, the spheres may overflow without being stored in the pseudo storage device B 710. In this case, means for calculating and storing the number of overflowed balls and the number of winning balls for the overflow ball may be provided, and the number of winning balls may be added by a pseudo effect to be executed immediately after. As a result, the number of winning balls to be paid out based on having entered the general ball entrance B 630 during the jackpot game can be added up more and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Fifth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 126 to 132, a pachinko machine 10 according to a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment described above, the third symbol display device 81 is executed at a timing different from the timing at which the ball is actually dispensed (the timing at which the award ball is dispensed based on the ball entering the general entrance B630). It is configured to display the number of winning balls, and by adding and displaying the number of winning balls paid out during a specific period, it is possible to provide the player with the number-of-hits ball display having an impact. In addition, the number of prize balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a timing different from the timing at which the balls are actually dispensed (the timing at which the prize balls are dispensed based on the ball entering the general entrance B630). To execute the control of the operation of the simulated storage device B 710, the simulated entrance B 660, and the simulated effect using the third symbol display device 81 in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Configured.

  On the other hand, in the above-described fifth embodiment, during the jackpot game, the ball before entering the general entrance C 630 is temporarily stored in the storage device C 710, and a plurality of balls are once (shortly) Was configured to enter the general entrance C630. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate (shorten) the time difference between the timing at which the balls are actually paid out and the timing at which the number of winning balls added to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. can do.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment is different from the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment in configuration in that a partial configuration in the flow path unit C 720 of the game board 13 is changed, and the main control device 110 The process executed by the MPU 201 is a process executed by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. The other various processes are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. Hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as the fourth embodiment, and the illustration and the description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth embodiment, “C” is described in the reference numeral attached to each element, but this is described for the convenience of description, and the elements not described below are the same as those described above. It is the same as the code (code in which "B" is described in the head) attached to each element of the four embodiments.

  First, with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129, the difference between the configuration of the flow path unit C 720 in the fifth embodiment and the flow path unit B 720 in the fourth embodiment described above will be described. FIG. 126 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment, FIG. 127 is an enlarged view schematically showing the channel unit C 720, and FIG. 128 (a) is a gaming state It is a figure explaining a ball flow in channel unit C720 at the time of performing right-handed game, when is a normal state, and Drawing 128 (b) is a storage state in storage device C 710 in a big hit game. FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the ball flow in the channel unit C 720 when the right-handed game is executed, and FIG. 129 is when the right-handed game is executed when the storage device C 710 is in the released state during the big hit game. It is a figure explaining the ball flow in channel unit C720.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the flow passage unit C 720 in the fifth embodiment has the point that the general ball entrance B 630 provided in the fourth flow passage B 703 of the flow passage unit B 720 in the fourth embodiment described above is deleted. , And the configuration of the storage device C710 and the configuration of the flow channel of the ball dropped (downflowed) from the storage device C710, and the out port B660 provided in the flow channel unit B720 of the fourth embodiment, And it differs in the point which replaced with presentation service B660a and provided the general ball entrance C630.

  Here, the configuration in the flow path unit C 720 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 127, the balls distributed to the third flow path C 701 c by the distribution device C 700 pass through the fourth flow path C 703 and the storage device C 710, and either the general entrance C 63 or the out C 66. Flow into The general ball entrance C63 is configured such that 15 winning balls are paid out based on the ball entering.

  The storage valve C 710 a of the storage device C 710 is formed in a flat plate shape that inclines downward toward the flow path (the flow path on the left side among the flow paths partitioned by the nails CK 1 to CK 4) that easily flows into the out port C 660 When there are few balls stored in the storage device C 710 (for example, one ball), it is difficult for the stored balls to enter the general ball entrance 63 when the storage device C 710 is in the released state. Is configured.

  Further, the outlet C704 of the fourth flow path C703 is provided at a position facing the flow path on the left side among the flow paths partitioned by the nails CK1 to CK4, and when the storage device C710 is in the released state, Most of the spheres flowing down the fourth flow path C703 are configured to flow into the out port C66.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128 and FIG. 129, the ball flow in the flow path unit C 720 of the fifth embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 128 (a), when the player plays a right-handed game in the normal state, one ball is distributed to the third ball by four balls by the distribution device C700 as in the fourth embodiment described above. It is distributed to the path C 701 c and flows down the fourth flow path C 703. And the ball which flowed out from the 4th channel flows down the channel on the left side among the channels divided by the nails CK1 to CK4 without being stored in the storage device C710 and flows into the out port C66. .

  As described above, in the normal state in which the storage device C 710 is not in the storage state, it is difficult to cause the ball to enter the general entrance C 63 even if the player executes the right-handed game. By performing a right-handed game during the normal state, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally acquiring a prize ball. In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the general ball entrance B630 (prize ball 4) is not provided at a position where all the balls distributed to the third flow path B701c by the distribution device B700 can enter. Therefore, even if the number of winning balls of the general entrance C63 is specified to a large number, it is possible to suppress that the player is given an excessive benefit.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 128 (b), the ball flow in the flow path unit C 720 during the jackpot game will be described. As shown in FIG. 128 (b), when the first variable winning device 65 is in the open state during the jackpot game (specifically, when the jackpot round number is an even round), the storage device C 710 is set to the storage state, and it is configured such that five spheres can be stored at maximum in the storage area C 710 b of the storage device C 710.

  Here, specifically explained, in the present embodiment, a period until the balls distributed to the third flow path C 701 c by the distribution device C 700 reach the storage device C 710 is approximately 0.6 seconds. Each flow path is configured, and a period until the ball distributed to the second flow path C 701 b by the distribution device C 700 reaches the first variable winning device 65 is about 1.8 seconds. Since the present pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to fire a maximum of 100 balls per minute, the ball flows into the sorting device C 700 once every 0.6 seconds at the shortest. The distribution device C700 is configured to distribute one ball to the third flow path C701c for four balls and the remaining three balls to the second flow path C701b.

  That is, every time one ball is stored and stored in the storage device C 710, when the ball that first reaches the distribution device C 700 after the even round of the jackpot game is started is distributed to the third flow path C 701 c. Three balls will enter the first variable winning device 65. Therefore, the ball next to the fourth ball distributed to the third flow path C 701 c by the distribution device C 700 becomes the tenth ball entering the first variable winning device 65.

  Then, during the period (1.8 seconds) in which the tenth ball flows down the second flow path C 701 b, the subsequent ball flows into the distribution device C 700, and the tenth ball to the first variable winning device 65 At the timing of entering the ball, the ball flowing into the distribution device C 700 three times after the tenth ball (after 1.8 seconds) is distributed to the third flow path C 700 c. As described above, when all the balls flow down regularly at equal intervals and at the same speed, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stored in the storage device C 710 during one round game period is four, but the round game is Since the error for 0.6 seconds occurs due to the balls already flowing down in the third flow path C 701 c at the time of the start, the difference in the flow-down speed of each ball, etc. The upper limit of the number of balls that can be stored in C 710 is set to five.

  As shown in FIG. 128 (b), in a state where five spheres (denoted P1 to P5 in the order of being stored) are stored in the storage device C 710, the first stored sphere P1 is stored Among the channels divided by the nails CK1 to CK4 when the storage state of the device C710 is released, it is stored at a position flowing down the left channel (hereinafter referred to as the left channel), and the second one The stored state of the storage device C 710 is because the nail CK 1 is disposed such that the center point of the stored sphere P 2 is on the right side of the nail CK 1 (right side in the viewpoint of FIG. 128 (b)) Of the channels divided by the nails CK1 to CK4 are stored at positions flowing down the right channel (hereinafter referred to as the right channel).

  Next, the ball flow of the storage ball (P1 to P5) when the storage device C 710 is released from the state shown in FIG. 128 (b) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 129, the sphere P1 flows down the left channel, the spheres P2 and P3 flow down the right channel, and the sphere P4 flows down the left channel more easily than the right channel (figure At 129, the left channel is shown to flow down), and the sphere P5 flows down so that it is easier to flow down the right channel than the left channel.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment, in the right-handed game executed during the jackpot game, the first variable winning device 65 is made to enter a ball, and a storage device C 710 stores many balls. Thus, it is possible to execute a game in which a ball is made to enter the general entrance C 63 and to play the game vigorously even during the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, the storage device C 710 is configured to change the storage state or the release state based on the opening / closing control of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game. Since most of the balls flowing down the second flow path C 701b reach a position where they can enter the first variable winning device, a large number of balls are stored in the storage device C 710 and the game is excessive. It is possible to suppress the provision of prize balls to In addition, the period in which the storage device C 710 is continuously stored is defined to be the same as the period of one round game, and is made to flow toward the first variable winning device 65 by the distribution device C 700. Since a configuration is used in which the balls and the balls that flow down toward the storage device C 700 are regularly distributed, the upper limit of the number of balls stored in the storage device C 710 during the period when the storage device C 710 is continuously stored is Since regulation can be performed, it is not necessary to make the storage area C 710 b of the storage device C 710 larger than necessary, and the game board 13 which is a limited space can be effectively used. Moreover, when the ball more than the upper limit is stored in the storage device C 710 (when a new ball flows into the storage device C 710 in a state where the ball is stored up to the upper limit amount), it can be determined as abnormal Thus, it is possible to quickly detect a game abnormality. In addition, it is not necessary to provide a flow path for bypassing the ball overflowing from the storage device C 710, and space saving of the device can be achieved.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Fifth Embodiment
The present fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that storage valve C 710 a (solenoid for driving storage valve C 710 a) is connected to main controller 110 as shown in FIG. 130. The other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Regarding Control Processing in Fifth Embodiment
The control process in the fifth embodiment is the same as that in the first embodiment, except that the contents of the control process in the main control device 110 are changed with respect to the first embodiment. The description is omitted. Moreover, about the control processing of the audio | voice lamp control apparatus 113 in the 5th Embodiment, the control processing similar to 4th Embodiment mentioned above is performed, and the effect similar to the effect shown to FIGS. 116-118 is the 3rd. It is displayed on the symbol display device 81. In the fourth embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above, the type of information used for effect (for example, in the fourth embodiment, information obtained by counting the number of paid balls for the general entrance B630) is used. On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, only the information obtained by counting the ball before winning in the general entrance C 63 is different, and the information notified as the effect, that is, the number of stored balls is indicated. Storage number information, period information for indicating a period (remaining period) in which the storage state continues, and a display mode for displaying each information as effect, that is, storage number information display for indicating storage number information The mode (fish displayed in the storage number display area Dn10 in FIG. 116), the period information display mode for displaying period information (Ami displayed in period information display area Dn11 in FIG. 116), and the like are the same. I omit the explanation .

  Next, control processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. The fifth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the jackpot control process is changed to a jackpot control process 6 (see FIG. 131). The other elements are the same, so the same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the jackpot control process 6 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process 6 (S1704).

  When the jackpot control process 6 (S1704) is executed, the processes of S1801 to S1808 are performed as in the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above, and then the jackpot operation start process (S1871) is executed. This jackpot operation start process (S1871) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (a).

  In the same manner as the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above, the process of S1809 is executed, and when it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (S1809: Yes), the jackpot operation end process (S1872) Execute and complete this process. This jackpot operation end process (S1872) will be described later with reference to FIG. 132 (b). When it is determined in the process of S1809 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is not satisfied (S1809; No), the processes of S1811 to S1815 are executed similarly to the jackpot control process of the first embodiment described above. , End this process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (a), the jackpot operation start process (S1781) will be described. FIG. 132A is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation start process (S1781). The jackpot operation start process (S1781) is for executing a process for closing the storage valve C710a in order to put the storage device C710 into the storage state.

  When the jackpot operation start process (S1781) is executed, first, the large opening is opened (the open / close door 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is set to the open state) (S7201), and then the round started this time Is determined to be an even round (S7202). In the process of S7202, if it is determined to be an even round (S7202: Yes), the storage valve C710a is closed (S7203), and a closing command indicating that the storage valve C710a is closed (the storage device C710 is in the storage state) The (storage state command) is set (S7204), and the process ends.

  As described above, the main controller 110 is configured to set the closing command according to the timing at which the storage valve 710 a is closed and to output the closing command to the voice lamp control device 113. The operation content of the storage device C 710 whose operation is controlled on the side can be easily grasped on the audio lamp control device 113 side.

  Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth embodiment, when it is determined that the storage valve C 710 a of the storage device C 710 is closed on the audio lamp control device 113 side, the pseudo of the fourth embodiment described above A flag equivalent to the effect flag 223 ya is set on, and the pseudo effect is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 132 (b), the jackpot operation end process (S1782) will be described. FIG. 132 (b) is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot operation termination process (S1782). The jackpot operation termination process (S1782) is a process for opening the storage valve C710a in order to shift the storage device C710 from the storage state to the release state.

  When the jackpot operation end process (S1782) is executed, first, the large opening is closed (the open / close door 65b of the first variable winning device 65 is closed) (S7301), and the storage valve C710a is opened (S7302) ), An open command indicating open of the storage valve is set (S7303), and the present process ends.

  As described above, in the fifth embodiment described above, the timing at which the ball is actually paid out (the winning balls are paid out based on the fact that the ball enters the general ball entry port B630) with respect to the configuration of the fourth embodiment. Of the award balls on the third symbol display device 81 at a timing different from the timing at which the game is played), and by combining and displaying the number of prize balls paid out during a specific period, the player is impacted Provided a certain ball number display. In addition, the number of prize balls is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at a timing different from the timing at which the balls are actually dispensed (the timing at which the prize balls are dispensed based on the ball entering the general entrance B630). To execute the control of the operation of the simulated storage device B 710, the simulated entrance B 660, and the simulated effect using the third symbol display device 81 in order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. Against the configuration, during the big hit game, the ball before entering the general entrance C 630 is temporarily stored in the storage device C 710, and a plurality of balls are sent to the general entrance C 630 once (shortly) I was configured to let the ball enter. Thereby, it is possible to eliminate (shorten) the time difference between the timing at which the balls are actually paid out and the timing at which the number of winning balls added to the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. can do.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, while the normal state is set as the gaming state, the storage device C 710 is configured to be in the release state, and the ball that has passed through the storage device C 710 in the release state is generally accepted. It is comprised so that the flow path which is hard to enter into ball mouth C630 may flow down. In this way, it is possible to perform a right-handed game in the normal state, and to suppress the action of causing the general entrance C 630 to enter a ball.

  Furthermore, when the storage device C 710 shifts to the release state in a state where a plurality of balls are stored in the storage device C 710, a flow in which some of the stored plurality of balls easily enter the general entrance C 630 Since it will flow down the path, it is possible to make it easier to enter a plurality of balls into the general entrance C 630 during the jackpot game. In addition, by configuring in this way, even if the number of winning balls to be paid out is set based on the fact that the ball enters the general entrance C630, the popping rate in the normal state exceeds 100%. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation, and it is possible to enhance the value of entering the ball into the general entrance C 630 during the jackpot game.

  Furthermore, in the fifth embodiment, the storage valve constituting the storage device C710 is configured to incline downward toward the flow path which is difficult to enter the general ball entrance C630. Thereby, it can be made easy to make a ball enter the general ball entrance C630 more easily if the storage device C710 stores many balls in the storage state. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to store many balls in the storage device C 710.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the second flow path C 701 b and the storage device allow the balls to flow down to the area where the first variable winning device 65 is disposed by the distribution device C 700. The ball is made to flow down at a ratio of 3: 1 to the third flow path C 701 c which causes the ball to flow down to the area where the C 710 is disposed, and control for setting the storage device C 710 to the storage state or release state The configuration is the same as that of the fourth embodiment described above. Therefore, since the upper limit of the number of balls stored in the storage device C 710 can be set, and there is no need to design the storage space of the storage device C 710 larger than necessary, the limited area of the game board 13 is effectively used. can do. Moreover, when the state where the ball more than the predetermined number of balls is stored in the storage device C 710 is detected, for example, only one ball that has flowed into the storage device C 710 exceeding the predetermined upper limit number can be stored in a specific location The storage space of the storage device C 710 is formed to be as described above, and when it is detected that a ball has been stored in the specific location, an abnormality signal for discriminating as an abnormality of the gaming machine and notifying the outside of the abnormality. , Or may be configured to execute an abnormal process for stopping the game.

  Furthermore, since it may be difficult to set the number of balls that can be stored in the storage device C 710 in advance when the distribution device C 700 is not used, in such a configuration, it is stored in the storage device C 710. There is a dedicated channel (overflow channel) where balls that can not be dropped can flow down, and balls that flow down the overflow channel can easily enter the general ball entry port C630 (specifically, in the storage device C710) It is good to comprise so that it may ball-fill in the ratio more than the ratio which ball-fills in general ball entrance C630 among the stored balls. As a result, it is possible to cause the player to actively play the game while the storage device C 710 is set to the storage state.

  Next, a modified example of the fifth embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment described above, the balls stored in the storage device C710 are disposed by inclining the storage valve C710a downward toward the sixth flow path C711a side where it is difficult to enter the general entrance C63. When the storage device C 710 is released, the ball is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the general entrance C 63. On the other hand, the present modification is different in that the shape of the storage valve D710a and the configuration for causing the balls stored in the storage device D710 to flow down the fifth flow path D711b and the sixth flow path D711a are changed. doing. The other configuration is the same as that of the fifth embodiment described above. The same elements will be denoted by the same reference symbols and the detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the fifth embodiment, “C” is described in the reference numeral attached to each element, but this is described for the convenience of description, and the elements not described below are the same as those described above. It is the same as the code (code in which "B" is described in the head) attached to each element of the four embodiments.

  As shown in FIG. 133, in the present modification, the configuration configuring the storage area D 701 b of the storage device D 710 is different from the above-described fifth embodiment. Specifically, the shape of the storage valve D710a is a step shape, the ball P1 stored first is stored at a position where it can easily flow down to the left channel D711a, and the ball P2 stored next is already stored. By colliding with the upper part of the sphere P1 and flowing down to the right, it flows down to the storage space formed on the right side of the storage valve D710a and is stored at a position where it can easily flow down to the right flow path D711b. Subsequently, the balls P3 to P5 are stored as shown in the figure. Then, as shown in FIG. 133, the sphere P5 is stored, so that even if the subsequent sphere flows into the storage device D710, no more spheres are stored. ing. In addition, a flow path regulation piece D712 is disposed above the storage valve D710a, and the ball that has flowed into the storage device D710 when the storage device D710 is in the released state, or 1 that has flowed into the storage device D710 when in the storage state. The second ball is configured to flow down to the left channel (D711a).

  Even when the storage device D 710 is configured in this manner, the ball is played even if the player performs the right-handed game in the normal state in which the storage device D 710 is not in the storage state, as in the fifth embodiment described above. By making it difficult to cause the player to enter the general ball entrance D63, it is possible to suppress an act of illegally acquiring a prize ball by performing a right-handed game during the normal state. In addition, as in the fourth embodiment described above, the general ball entrance B630 (prize ball 4) is not provided at a position where all the balls distributed to the third flow path B701c by the distribution device B700 can enter. Therefore, even if the number of winning balls of the general entrance D63 is specified to a large number, it is possible to suppress the player from being given an excessive benefit.

  In addition, in the configuration of the present modification, the balls stored in the storage device D710 (except for the first stored ball) can be easily made to flow into the right channel D711b. The stored balls can be easily made to enter the general ball entrance D63. Furthermore, in the configuration of the present modification, as in the fifth embodiment described above, when the storage device D 710 continues to be in the storage state, it is configured such that five or more spheres are not stored in the storage device. If, in the unlikely event more spheres flow down the third channel D 701 c to flow into the storage device D 710, the flow into the storage device D 710 is restricted by the sphere P 5 stored in the storage device D 710. . The restricted sphere is configured to flow downward toward the left flow passage D711a when the storage device D710 is in the released state. As a result, even if an unintended number of spheres flow into the storage device D 710 in the stored state, it is possible to suppress excessive entry of the spheres into the general ball entry port D 63.

Sixth Embodiment
Next, with reference to FIGS. 134 to 136, a pachinko machine 10 according to a sixth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment described above, the storage device C 710 is configured to be in the storage state corresponding to the period in which the first variable winning device 65 is opened during the jackpot game. On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of winning devices that can be opened in the big hit game are provided (first variable winning device (first attacher) E 65, second variable winning device (second attacker) E 650), By changing the termination condition of the variable winning device, the period in which one round game can be executed is made different.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the period in which the storage device C 710 is in the storage state depending on the winning jackpot, and when the player wins the jackpot, which jackpot game will be executed It can be expected.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 134 and FIG. 135, the configuration of the game board 13 of the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 134 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 135 is an enlarged view schematically showing the right side area of the sixth embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the sixth embodiment is different from the above-described fifth embodiment in that the configuration in the flow path unit E 720 is changed, and two variable winning devices in the lower right area (first The difference is that a variable winning device E65 and a second variable winning device E650) are provided. Next, differences between the sixth embodiment and the above-described fifth embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 135, in the sixth embodiment, when a new sphere flows in a state where four spheres are stored in the storage device E 710, the new sphere is made to flow out from the storage area E 710 b. A detour passage E802 is provided for flowing down toward the general entrance E63. Thereby, when a predetermined number (four) or more of the balls flow into the storage device E 710 in the storage state, the balls can be made to enter the general entrance E 63 with high probability.

  Here, the reason for providing the bypass passage E 802 described above in the sixth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment described above, balls are distributed to the second flow path D701b and the third flow path D701c at a ratio of 3: 1 by the distribution device D700, and the flow paths of the second flow path D701b flow downward. Most of the balls are configured to be able to enter the first variable winning device 65, and the storage state of the storage device D 710 is set corresponding to the period when the first variable winning device 65 is opened. Therefore, the number of balls flowing into the storage device E 710 during the storage state setting period is predetermined.

  On the other hand, in the sixth embodiment, a plurality of variable winning devices (the first variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 650) having different open operation end conditions are provided, and the second flow passage E 701b is further provided. The rate at which the dropped ball enters the second variable winning device 650 during opening is adjustable by the adjustment means (eg nail) EK1. By configuring in this way, the number of shots of the ball required to end one round game may be greatly mutated, and as a result, the number of balls flowing into the storage device E 710 in the stored state is also significantly mutated. It will be done.

  Therefore, when a situation occurs in which a large number of balls flow into the storage device E 710 in a stored state (a state in which one round game is difficult to finish), it is possible to give an advantage more advantageous to the player. For this purpose, a bypass passage E802 is provided. Thus, by adjusting the adjustment means EK1 so that the ball is difficult to enter the second variable winning device E650 during the jackpot game, the period until the end of one round game (the end condition of the round game is established Period until the number of balls to enter the ball can be extended, and the number of balls to be dropped toward the storage device E 710 during one round game (during the storage state being set continuously) Can be increased.

  In the sixth embodiment, the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball enters the general entrance E63 is set to “15”, and any variable winning device (first variable winning device E65, second) Since the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the variable winning device E650) is set to "10", the round game in the big hit game is continued without completion (round game takes 30 seconds) The state in which the round game continues is the most advantageous state for the player until the end condition is established.

Regarding Electrical Configuration in Sixth Embodiment
Next, the electrical configuration in the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 136 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection table 202b. The first hit type selection table 202b defined in the sixth embodiment is a type of special symbol (a first special symbol (special symbol 1), a second special symbol (special symbol 2)) which has won a jackpot, The jackpot type (jackpot AA to jackpot AC) is defined based on the acquired value of the first jackpot counter C2 (0 to 99), and the jackpot of special symbol (when jackpot, jackpot determined (jacket) Jackpot type) is selected on the basis of the prescribed contents of the first hit type selection table 202b).

  Specifically, at the time of big hit of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), when the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", the big hit AA is selected, and in the case of "50 to 89" The jackpot AB is selected, and in the case of "90 to 99", the jackpot AC is selected. In addition, at the time of big hit of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), the value of the first hit type counter C2, in the case of "0 to 19", the big hit AA is selected, and in the case of "20 to 39" the big hit AB The jackpot AC is selected in the case of "40 to 99".

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136 (b), the specifications of the first attacker (first variable winning device E65) and the second attacker (second variable winning device E650) will be described. FIG. 136 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining the specifications of each of the attackers (variable winning device). As shown in FIG. 136 (b), in the present embodiment, the closing condition (closing condition by opening time and closing condition by winning number), and the number of winning balls according to the type of the attacker (variable winning device) Each is set so that the number of award balls to be paid out during the jackpot game is different depending on the type of the attacker who is opened during the jackpot game.

  Specifically, the first attacker (first variable winning device) E65 satisfies the closing condition when the open state continues for 25 seconds, or when five balls enter during one opening. The number of winning balls is set to “10”. On the other hand, the second attacker (second variable winning prize apparatus) E650 is set so that the closing condition is satisfied when the open state continues for 30 seconds, or when five balls enter during one opening. It is set, and "10" is set as the number of winning balls for the winning balls.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 136 (c), the jackpot game contents executed by the jackpot type selected with reference to the first hit type selection table 202b will be described. FIG. 136 (c) is an explanatory diagram of an attacker operation of each jackpot type.

  As shown in FIG. 136 (c), in the present embodiment, depending on the selected jackpot type (big jack AA-AC), the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game and the jackpot is released during the jackpot game The relationship between the type of attacker and the number of rounds is specified to be different. Specifically, when the jackpot type is "AA", "10" is set as the number of rounds for the jackpot game, and the jackpot (first variable winning device E65) is opened in all the rounds. Is executed. When the jackpot type is "AB", "15" is set as the number of rounds for the jackpot game, and the first attacker (first variable winning device E65) is opened in all the rounds. A jackpot game is executed. . When the jackpot type is "AC", "15" is set as the number of rounds for the jackpot game, and in the first to fifth rounds of the rounds, the first attacker (the first variable winning device E65) is opened, and the sixth In the 15th round, the jackpot game in which the second attacker (the second variable winning device E650) is opened is executed.

  In the sixth embodiment configured as described above, when the storage device E 710 is set to the storage state corresponding to the period during which the round game is being performed, the storage state corresponds to the content of the jackpot game to be performed. It becomes possible to make the set period different.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the same number of rounds “15” is set in the case where the jackpot type is “AB” and the case where the jackpot type is “AC”, and the same attacker (first attacker) is set during the first five rounds. ) Is set to be open. Therefore, between the start of the jackpot game and the end of the fifth round game, it is difficult for the player to know which jackpot type this jackpot game corresponds to which jackpot type. Even after the jackpot game is started, the player can play the game while giving expectation.

  In this case, as a condition for displaying the specific display mode Dn10b in the pseudo effect, it may be a condition that the present big hit game is a big hit type (big hit AC) that is advantageous to the player.

  In the sixth embodiment, a round game period to be executed during the jackpot game is provided by providing a plurality of winning openings (attackers) to be opened during the jackpot game and changing the closing conditions (round end conditions) of each attacker. Differently, although the configuration in which the storage device E 710 is in the storage state is variable, other configurations may be used, for example, if different round end conditions of the same attacker are different based on the type of jackpot. It may be configured to

  In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, as the closing condition (round end condition) of the attacker, an elapsed time ending condition which is satisfied when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed while the attacker is open. Although the number-of-balls-number termination condition established by reaching the predetermined number (for example, 10) of the number of balls entered while the attacker is open is set, using other configurations Also, for example, the number-of-payouts termination condition established when the total number of prize balls paid out during the round game has reached a predetermined number (for example, 200), and whether or not to end the round game A lottery means is provided, and a lottery type termination condition established when it is determined that the round game is to be terminated by the lottery means, or an operation type termination condition satisfied by the player operating the operation means Etc. may be set.

  Also, in the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, the timing to set the storage device to the storage state is the timing when the round game is started, but it is possible to set the storage device to the storage state during the jackpot game For example, the storage device may be configured to be set to the storage state when a predetermined period has elapsed since the jackpot game was started, or the ball entered a specific area during the jackpot game. The storage device may be set to the storage state on the basis, or the storage device may be set to the storage state based on the fact that the player operates the operation means during the big hit game.

  Further, the storage device may be set to the storage state based on the end of the round game in the jackpot game (when the interval between rounds is executed). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to have an interest and to play a game even in a period in which the ball can not be inserted into the attacker during the jackpot game. In this case, the inter-round interval period may be configured to be variable based on the jackpot type and the gaming state when the jackpot is won. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the period in which the storage device is in the storage state during the jackpot game.

  In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, the storage device is set to the storage state every time the even-numbered round game is started during the jackpot game, but at least once during the jackpot game The storage device may be set to the storage state as long as it can set the storage device to the storage state only when a specific round game (for example, the sixth round) is started. Alternatively, the storage device may be set to the storage state. Moreover, when a plurality of attackers are provided, a configuration may be used in which the storage device is set to the storage state based on execution of a round game in which a specific one of the plurality of attackers is released.

  In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, although the storage device is configured to be changed from the storage state to the release state on condition of the end of the round game during the big hit game, the storage device is released from the storage state Other conditions may be set as conditions for changing the condition. For example, the storage device may be set on the condition that a predetermined number (for example, 5) of spheres have been stored, or storage may be performed based on a predetermined time elapsed since the storage device was set to the storage state. Control means may be provided to vary the apparatus from the storage state to the release state.

  In the fourth to sixth embodiments described above, the jackpot game is executed under both the conditions for setting the storage device in the storage state and the conditions for shifting the storage device for which the storage state is set to the release state. Are set to conditions established based on (for example, start condition of round game, end condition of round game), but one of the conditions is set as the condition established based on the jackpot game being executed, the other condition As the condition of, it may be configured to set other conditions, for example, the condition to set the storage device to the storage state as the start condition of the round game in the jackpot game, as a condition to set the release state, A condition may be set that a predetermined period (for example, one minute) has elapsed since the storage state was set. In addition, it may be a condition that the result of the determination of the special symbol has won a small hit is a part of the deviation, it may be a condition that the determination result of the normal symbol is a predetermined determination result.

  By configuring in this way, for example, when the player wins a jackpot with a small number of round games (for example, two rounds), the number of prize balls obtainable by the player by the jackpot game (open when jackpot game is executed) The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the ball stored in the storage device entering a general ball entry port, rather than the number of prize balls obtained by entering the ball in an attached attacker (variable winning opening) As a result, it is possible to increase the number of players, and to provide the player with new game characteristics which have never been seen before. When such a configuration is used, it is preferable to provide the bypass E802 (see FIG. 135) used in the sixth embodiment described above. Thereby, it is possible to further increase the number of winning balls to be paid out based on the balls stored in the storage device entering the general ball entrance.

  In each embodiment described above, as a storage device capable of storing a sphere, a storage area in which a storage space is formed and a bottom portion of the storage area are partitioned to form a storage valve that can be varied between a storage state and a release state Although the configuration having the variable means is used, any configuration having a function capable of temporarily storing (retaining) the sphere may be used, for example, a configuration in which the sphere is temporarily adsorbed using a magnet, or A configuration may be used in which a projecting piece capable of projecting to a flow lower surface where a ball can flow down is made variable between a protruding state (storage state) and a buried state (released state). Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, although the structure provided with only one ball entrance (general ball entrance) which the ball | bowl stored by the storage means can enter is used, a structure other than that may be sufficient, for example A plurality of ball entry ports having different numbers of winning balls may be provided, and the balls stored in the storage means may be configured to enter any of the ball entry ports.

  In 1st Embodiment-3rd Embodiment mentioned above, when entering into the 2nd entrance 640 during a specific period (during a time saving state), the reservation acquisition display which shows having acquired reservation of Toku 2 Is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and it is determined whether or not the ball can be inserted into the second ball entry port 640 (the winning of the normal symbol is made in the short time Then, it is configured to display to the player whether or not the electric role product 640a is in the long open state) by using the fluctuation display of the third symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the symbol normally.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player easily grasp the flow of the game, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the game and to enhance the rendering effect. However, in the case where the winning symbol is won during the short time and the timing when the motorized accessory 640a is in the long open state is immediately after entering the short time status, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the normal symbol There is a problem that the period for executing the command is short and a variable display which is hard to be understood by the player is displayed.

  In order to solve this problem, it is a period to execute an effect that suggests whether or not it will be possible to enter a ball into the second entrance 640 (a state where the electric combination 640a is released long). When it is determined that the motorized role object 640a is released long in a state where it is not possible to secure, it is configured not to execute the above-described suggestion effect, and it is assumed that the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 at that timing. Also, the hold acquisition display is configured not to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the special drawing 2 is held during the effect (the battle effect (see FIG. 19 (b))) indicating that the short time gaming state is ended. You may configure it to indicate that you have won.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the effect display that is difficult for the player to execute, and at the same time, in the effect that suggests that the short time gaming state ends, the effect of the pattern where the short time gaming state does not end (FIG. The reference (a) can be easily executed, and the player can have an expectation for the battle effect.

  In the first to third embodiments described above, the right-handed game is performed when the special figure 2 fluctuates in the first rotation after the end of the jackpot, which is a large hit, a short time, a small hit, or a normal state. Is configured to display the guidance display on the display screen, but as a timing other than that, during a special figure change when winning a big or a small hit, or during a popular figure change when a hit is won Alternatively, the guidance display of the right-handed game may be displayed on the display screen. By configuring in this manner, the player can be urged to perform the right-handed game in advance before the gaming state in which the right-handed game must be executed is set, so there is a situation in which the right-handed game is forgotten It can suppress that it occurs.

  In the case of using the configuration described above, for example, during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 in which the special figure 1 small hitting middle effect in the normal state described above using FIGS. 22 (a) and (b) is won. You can configure it to run from. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to use a part of the special figure 1 small hit middle effect as the variation effect of the special figure 1, for example. Therefore, for example, by using the special figure 1 fluctuation effect at the time of special figure 1 big hit, when the effect is started, it can be expected to either special figure 1 big hit or special figure 1 small hit, The presentation effect can be enhanced.

  In each embodiment described above, in the gaming state (time reduction state) that is advantageous to the player, a right-handed game aiming at the right area of the gaming board 13 is executed, and in the normal gaming state, the left area of the gaming board 13 It is configured to execute the left-handed game aiming at the left-handed game, but it is sufficient if the aiming area of the game board 13 is made different according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state You may make the game run right. Further, while aiming at the same area, the game in different gaming states may be configured to be executable.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition to make the special territory win the ball. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various types of gaming machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, gaming machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Feature A group> (A definite change in the special change period in the configuration of one kind and two kinds)
First acquisition means for acquiring first information based on establishment of first acquisition condition, first determination means for executing first determination based on the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and the first determination means First dynamic display means for dynamically displaying first identification information for indicating a first determination result by the first determination means, and the first identification information for indicating that the first determination result is a specific one A first benefit granting means for granting the first benefit to the player when the stop display is made, a second obtaining means for obtaining the second information based on the establishment of the second obtaining condition, and the second obtaining means A storage unit storing the acquired second information, and a second determination that is more likely to be determined by the player than the first determination is performed based on the second information stored in the storage unit 2 determination means and a state in which the establishment of the second acquisition condition is restricted A game machine comprising state setting means capable of switching and setting each of a first state and a second state in which the second acquisition condition is more easily established than the first state. A priority unit that causes the second determination corresponding to the second information being executed to be executed with priority over the first determination, and the first state is switched to the second state; A game machine A1 characterized in that the first determination is performed before the second determination is performed.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, is the state of the starting opening provided on the gaming board changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter? There is what performs the 1st lottery of no. In such a conventional game machine, the lottery performed by the game ball entering the start opening in a state easy to change to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed The gaming machine which sets up continuously is proposed (for example, JP, 2012-147965, A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the probability that the determination in which the lottery is in favor of the player is performed while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem of getting bored.

  According to the gaming machine A1, the dynamic display of the first identification information is executed even in the special state in which the second acquisition condition is easily established, and the second determination is performed during the dynamic display period. Since execution is restricted, at the start of the special state, the first judgment that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second judgment is executed for the player, and thereafter, the second judgment that is advantageous to the player is Since the second determination is executed with priority given to the second information stored in the storage means by the priority means over the first determination, the second determination that is advantageous to the player is continuous. By switching to a period in which the game is easy to be executed, it is possible to improve the interest of the player and to suppress the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

  In the gaming machine A1, when the game ball enters the first acquisition condition, the game ball enters the first acquisition condition, and when the game ball enters the game, the second acquisition condition is triggered. A second ball entry means, a variable member capable of changing into an open state in which game balls can enter the second ball entry means and a closed state in which ball entry is difficult, and the game balls pass through a predetermined passing area Dynamically displayed is a detection means capable of detecting the presence or absence, a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means, and lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means. When the lottery information dynamic display means and the lottery information for indicating the specific lottery result are stopped and displayed, the variable member is switched to the closed state or the open state in a variable pattern set in a predetermined rule. Variable control means for changing, wherein the lottery means Gaming machine 1 identification information or the second identification information is characterized in that which is configured to be able to execute the lottery in the period being dynamically displayed A2.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, a special state is set, and even during a period in which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, a lottery is made by passing the gaming ball to the passing area. It is possible to execute the second acquisition condition by entering the game ball into the second ball entry means, and therefore, the passage area as much as possible even during the period when the first identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that it is possible to make a player play a game so that the game ball passes.

  In the gaming machine A1 or A2, a variable winning means in which the gaming ball can enter the ball, and a variable winning means in which the gaming ball is changed to the difficulty of entering the ball, and a specific area through which the gaming ball entered in the variable winning means can pass When the game ball passes through the specific area, it is determined that the second determination means is a specific second determination result by the bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the game ball passes through the specific area. A game machine A3 comprising: variable game execution means for changing the variable entering means from the difficult-to-enter-ball state to the enterable state.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1 or A2, by executing the second determination, it is possible to shift to a game in which the gaming ball is caused to pass through the specific area. There is an effect that a game with change can be provided.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 and A3, the variable pattern varied by the variable control means is variably set corresponding to a period in which the special state is set. Gaming machine A4.

  According to the gaming machine A4, since the variable pattern is varied corresponding to the setting period of the special state, there is an effect that the variable pattern can be executed in accordance with the period in which the special state is set.

  In any one of the game machines A2 to A4, a first storage means for storing the first information acquired by the first acquisition means, and a first identification dynamically displayed by the first dynamic display means A first dynamic display period setting unit that determines a dynamic display period of information, wherein the first dynamic display period setting unit is configured to set the second state by the state setting unit. As the dynamic display period of the first identification information, at least the first dynamic display period shorter than the dynamic display period in which the lottery information is dynamically displayed by the lottery information dynamic display means, and the lottery information A game machine A5 characterized in that a second dynamic display period longer than a dynamic display period dynamically displayed can be set.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A4, the second state is entered as the second state depending on the length of the dynamic display period set by the first dynamic display period setting means. It is possible to set an advantageous state in which the game ball can easily enter the game ball in the ball means and a disadvantageous state in which the game ball can not easily enter the game ball in the second ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to make a player play a game so that the second state becomes an advantageous state.

  The gaming machine A5 includes display means capable of displaying predetermined information, and display control means for displaying state information for indicating the state of the game set by the state setting means on the display means, and the display The control means is characterized in that when the second dynamic display period is set by the first dynamic display period setting means, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed. Game machine A6.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the game ball is entered into the second ball entry means as a dynamic display period of the first identification information despite the second state being set. When the second dynamic display period which is difficult to be set is set, the state information for indicating the second state is not displayed, so that the information displayed on the display means is not good for the player's expectation. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, there is a game regulation means capable of regulating the game of the player based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition in the state where the first state is set. A game machine A7 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the player can obtain the second acquisition condition based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition in the first state in which the establishment of the second acquisition condition is restricted. Since it becomes possible to regulate the game, there is an effect that it can be suppressed that the second acquisition condition is illegally established.

  In the gaming machine A7, the gaming regulation means regulates the firing of gaming balls, and the gaming machine A8.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7, the firing of the gaming balls is regulated by the game regulation means, so that there is an effect that fraud can be effectively suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the first ball entering means can be a first flow path in which game balls are difficult to enter into the second ball entering means, and the game balls can be diverted into the second ball entering means The first ball entry means disposed in the second channel and in the second channel, the game ball enters the ball entry port disposed in the second channel. It is characterized in that the ball can enter the ball and the gaming ball can enter the difficult state by entering the game ball into the first ball entry means disposed in the second flow path. A game machine A9.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A2 to A8, the second state is set by entering the gaming ball into the ball entry port, and the gaming ball is entered into the second ball entry means Even when the game ball is made to flow down to the second flow path in order to cause the ball to flow, the game ball enters the first ball entry means easily by entering the game ball into the ball entrance, so the first There is an effect that the determination can be easily performed and configured.

  In the gaming machine A9, a holding means capable of holding the gaming ball at a position where the gaming ball can enter the ball entrance, and a holding releasing means for releasing the holding by the holding means based on the establishment of the release condition. And a game machine A10 characterized in that.

  According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A9, there is an effect that it is possible to control the timing at which the game ball is caused to enter the first entering means according to the release condition.

  In the gaming machine A10, the releasing condition is released based on the provision of the first benefit by the first benefit applying means.

  According to the gaming machine A11, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A10, the release condition is satisfied at the timing when the first benefit is given, so the first acquisition condition is easily satisfied after the first benefit is given. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature B Group> (Normal 1 Special Prize Regulations)
A first flow path through which gaming balls can flow down, a second flow path through which gaming balls flowing down the first flow path are difficult to flow, and a position where gaming balls flow down the first flow path can enter The game ball enters the first ball entering means, the second ball entering means disposed in the second channel, and the game ball can enter, and the game ball enters the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means Dynamically acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on sphere, judgment means for executing judgment based on the information acquired by the acquisition means, and identification information for indicating judgment results by the judgment means are dynamic A gaming machine comprising: a dynamic display means to be displayed; and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In the first flow path, the game ball is caused to flow down the second flow path to execute the game. A state setting unit capable of setting a special state that is advantageous to the player than allowing the technical ball to flow and execute the game, and the special state is not set by the state setting unit, In the case where a game is performed by causing a game ball to flow down the second flow path, the control means makes it more difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means more difficultly than the first ball entry means. A game machine B1 characterized by being.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, is the state of the starting opening provided on the gaming board changed from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter into the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter? There is what performs the 1st lottery of no. In such a conventional game machine, the lottery performed by the game ball entering the start opening in a state easy to change to the second state is executed a predetermined number of times, and the lottery result of the predetermined number of times is displayed The gaming machine which sets up continuously is proposed (for example, JP, 2012-147965, A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the probability that the determination in which the lottery is in favor of the player is performed while the lottery is performed a predetermined number of times is constant, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem of getting bored. In addition, if it is configured to change the flow route of the game ball to play the game in order to change the game, the game ball is illegally benefited by flowing the game ball to a route different from the assumed flow route. There was a problem that was given.

  According to the gaming machine B1, it is possible to change the game by letting the second channel flow down and play a game when the special state is set, while the special state is set. If not, the game ball is restricted so that it is difficult to enter the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means, so when the special state ends, the first channel is allowed to flow down to play the game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect such as an irregularity by sending the player inevitably so that the player can play the game.

  In the gaming machine B1, at least a third flow path through which gaming balls can flow down and a fourth flow path through which gaming balls that flow down the third flow path are difficult to be formed are formed in the second flow path. And the sorting means capable of sorting the gaming balls having flowed down the second flow path into the third flow path and the fourth flow path, respectively, and the second ball entering the fourth flow path A game machine B2 characterized in that the means is arranged.

  According to the gaming machine B2, among the gaming balls flowed down to the second flow path, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B1, the gaming balls distributed to the third flow path can enter the second ball entry means Therefore, the amount of gaming balls that can enter the second ball entry means can be reduced compared to the first ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine B2, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is disposed in the third flow path, and the third ball entry means is arranged based on the game ball entering the third ball entry means. Information is acquired by the acquisition means, and the advantage determination means performs an advantage determination that is advantageous to the player based on the information based on the information obtained by the game ball entering the third ball entering means And the variable control means for changing the third ball entering means from a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the ball to a state in which it is easy to enter the ball by setting the special state. Gaming machine B3.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B2, the special state is a state in which the third ball entry means is likely to enter, so the player lets the game ball flow down to the second channel There is an effect that it can urge to play a game.

  In the gaming machine B2 or B3, the sorting means is for sorting the gaming balls alternately to the third flow path and the fourth flow path.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2 or B3, by alternately allocating, it is possible to cause half of the gaming balls having flowed down to the second flow path to flow down effectively, the second ball entering means There is an effect that it is possible to reduce the number of game balls entering the ball.

  In the gaming machines B1 to B4, the holding means capable of holding the gaming balls having flowed down the first flow path or the second flow path, and the gaming balls held by the holding means are switched to the state of flowing downward An opening through which the game ball which has flowed down by being switched to the flow-down state by the switching means and the switching means, and the game ball entering the opening, the second ball entering the second ball A game machine B5, characterized in that the game machine has a variable means for making the game ball enter the ball.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B1 to B4, the entering of the gaming ball into the second entering means is restricted by the holding means and the switching means, so at unintended timing There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the game ball enters the second ball entry means.

  In the gaming machine B5, the switching means is configured to switch to a state capable of holding the gaming ball when a predetermined period has elapsed after switching to the flow-down state.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine B5, since it is possible to define a period during which the gaming ball can enter the second ball entry means, the ball entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means Has the effect of being able to regulate the

  In the game machine B5 or B6, the second ball entering means is variable by the variable means to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball based on the fact that the game ball enters the ball. Gaming machine B7.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5 or B6, the gaming ball enters the second ball entry means even during the period in which the switching means is switched to the above-mentioned state of sulfurization. In this case, since the second ball entry means is changed to a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the ball, it is possible to suppress the plurality of game balls from entering the ball continuously in the second ball entry means. . Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving an excessive privilege to the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7, a first position where the gaming ball held by the holding means is provided in an area where it can flow down, and the gaming ball which has flowed down can be guided to the first flow path; Variable induction means that can be changed to a second position that is difficult to guide in the flow path, and variable induction member variable control that variably controls the variable induction means to the first position and the second position at predetermined predetermined intervals A game machine B8 characterized in that the opening portion is disposed in an area where the game ball which has flowed down the first flow path can enter.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the timing at which the gaming ball held by the holding means can be flowed downstream by the switching means, the variable induction means is at the first position It is possible to make the game ball enter the opening only when the timing at which the variable is changed satisfies the predetermined condition, so that the player is motivated to play the game, conscious of the timing of the game. There is an effect that it can be done.

  In any one of the gaming machines B1 to B8, when the special state is set by the state setting means, the identification information is dynamically displayed so that the remaining period of the special state becomes short. A game machine B9 characterized by having variable means.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B8, the remaining period of the special state is shortened by the dynamic display of the identification information, so the player can dynamically display the identification information. There is an effect that it is possible to be interested in the period and to improve the interest of the game. The longer the dynamic display period is executed, the longer the special state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can be expected to have a long dynamic display period.

<Feature C group> (control to connect one game)
The first flow path where the gaming ball can flow down, the second flow path where the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the position where the gaming ball flowed down the first flow path can enter the ball The first ball entering means disposed, the second ball entering means disposed in the second flow path and capable of entering game balls, and the game balls are provided to the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means The acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on entering the ball, the judging means for executing the judgment based on the information acquired by the acquiring means, and the identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judging means are dynamic A gaming machine comprising: a dynamic display means to be displayed; and a privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. 2 The first state where the game ball can enter the ball into the ball entry means, and it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state Variable means for changing to the second state, variable execution means for changing the variable means from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of the variable condition, and the above-mentioned based on the establishment of the specific condition Special state setting means for setting a special state that makes it easy to execute a bonus game which is advantageous to the player by causing the game ball to flow down to the second flow path rather than the first flow path to execute the game; After the bonus game is executed, the identification information is dynamically displayed, and a releasing unit that releases the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period, and the bonus game is executed when the bonus game is executed. A game machine C1 comprising: variable condition determination means for determining establishment of a variable condition.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that the game is executed, and the game is configured to be made easier to be played continuously in a high probability state of increasing the lottery probability after the game depending on the type of the game. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, it is difficult for the player to check whether the lottery is actually performed in a high probability state to play a game, and there is a problem that the interest is likely to be reduced.

  According to the gaming machine C1, it is determined whether the variable condition for determining whether to change the variable means to the first state is established when the bonus game is executed, so that the bonus game is executed. By changing the variable means to the first state, it is easy to dynamically display identification information, it is easy to release the special state, and it is difficult to dynamically display the identification information if the variable means is not changed. The special state can be easily set continuously, and there is an effect that the interest can be improved depending on whether or not the variable condition is satisfied when the bonus game is performed.

  The gaming machine C1 includes type determination means for determining the type of the bonus game when the bonus game is executed, and the variable condition determination means is for the type of the bonus game determined by the type determination means. It is a game machine C2 characterized by judging establishment of the variable condition based on it.

  According to the gaming machine C2, the establishment of the variable condition is determined based on the type of the bonus game to be executed, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the establishment of the variable condition is determined by the ratio at which the type of bonus game is determined. The ratio can also be set, and there is an effect that stable game contents can be set.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the benefit granting means executes the bonus game as one of the benefits, and the type determination means decides the type of the bonus game to be executed by the benefit granting means. A gaming machine C3 characterized in that the special state is set based on a type of the bonus game executed by the bonus giving means.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the ratio in which the special state is set can be varied by the setting of the type of bonus game, and design is made by easily adjusting the inj Has the effect of

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C3, a third ball entry means capable of entering a game ball is disposed in the second flow path, and the acquisition means comprises a game ball in the third ball entry means. The information is acquired based on the fact that the ball enters the ball, and the determination means is more than the determination based on the information obtained by the game ball entering the third ball entering means than the determination. Perform an advantage determination that is advantageous to the user, and has a control means that can be changed between a state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the third ball entry means and a state in which the ball is allowed to enter A game machine C4 characterized in that the restriction means is configured to be easily changed to a state in which the ball is allowed to be set by setting the special state.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, it is easy for the gaming ball to enter the third ball entry means in which the advantage determination that is advantageous to the player is executed in the special state. Since this can be performed, there is an effect that it is possible to urge the game balls to flow down to the second flow path to play a game.

  In the gaming machine C4, a variable ball entry means capable of changing between an open state in which the game ball can enter and a closed state in which the ball does not enter, and a specific area where the game ball entered into the variable ball entry means can pass. The bonus game executing means for executing the bonus game when the game ball passes through the specific area, and the variable ball entering means is closed from the closed state when it is determined as the specific result by the advantage determination. A game machine C5 characterized in that the game machine can be changed to the open state.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, a bonus game is executed by passing the gaming ball to the specific area, so that the player can be made interested in the ball flow. The effect is that it can improve the interest of

  In any one of the gaming machines C2 to C5, a first storage means capable of storing the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the information stored in the first memory means Determining means for determining the information to be determined by the determining means based on the information, the type determining means including at least the information stored in the storage means during the bonus game The first type corresponding to the first bonus game that is easy to store and the second type corresponding to the second bonus game that makes it more difficult to store the information in the storage means than the first type The game machine C6 which features.

  According to the gaming machine C6, it is possible to execute a bonus game that makes it easy to store information in the first storage unit during a bonus game and a bonus game that is difficult to store according to the type determined by the type determination unit. Thereby, when the special state is given after the end of the bonus game, it is possible to set a state in which identification information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is dynamically displayed and a state in which the identification information is not displayed. It becomes possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to dynamically display identification information based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means during the special state, and it is possible to diversify the game executed during the special state.

  In the gaming machine C6, the special state setting means is a first special state in which identification information is dynamically displayed based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means during the special state. The second special state in which the identification information based on the game ball entering the ball is dynamically displayed in 2 ball entering means is set, and the second special state is more played than the first special state. A game machine C7 characterized in that a bonus game advantageous to a player is easy to be executed.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the degree of advantage provided to the player can be made different depending on the type of identification information dynamically displayed during the special state. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game with enthusiasm.

<Feature D group> (rendering mode end production effect)
The first determination based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means Determining means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination result by the determination means A dynamic display means in which identification information for indicating is displayed dynamically, and a second state in which gaming balls are difficult to enter in the second ball entering means are changed from a first state in which gaming balls are difficult to enter Variable means for setting the special state that can change the second ball entering means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special state setting means for setting the special state. Dynamic display of the identification information is performed when a state is set, and the dynamic display period thereof When the special state is set, the dynamic display of the identification information is started when the special state is set, and the identification is performed based on the remaining dynamic display period. A game machine D1 comprising: an effect execution means for executing an effect based on information determined that the condition has been established.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that the game is executed, and the game is configured to be made easier to be played continuously in a high probability state of increasing the lottery probability after the game depending on the type of the game. In such a gaming machine, after a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping display with the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If the player wins, a player who executes a hit game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early by repeating the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine D1, since the remaining period of the special state varies with the elapse of the dynamic display period of the identification information to be executed when the special state is set, it is specified by the effect performed by the effect executing means It is possible to recognize the establishment of the condition and the remaining period of the special state, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  The gaming machine D1 includes: detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the passage area; and determination means for judging establishment of the specific condition when passage of the game ball is detected by the detection means A game machine D2 characterized in that the effect executing means executes an effect for indicating the determination result based on the fact that the determination is performed by the determining means.

  According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D1, even when the identification information is displayed in the special state, the determination of the establishment of the specific condition is executed by causing the passing area to pass the gaming ball. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved.

  In the gaming machine D1 or D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the effect executing means executes a specific effect based on the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information becoming equal to or less than a predetermined period. .

  According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, by performing the specific effect, it is possible to determine that the remaining period of the special state is equal to or less than the predetermined period. .

  In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second determination is executed by the determination unit among the information acquired by the acquisition unit based on the game ball entering the second ball entry unit. Storage means for storing up to a predetermined number of the information before the game, and the effect executing means, when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information becomes equal to or less than the A gaming machine D4 characterized in that the specific effect is not executed on condition of being stored.

  According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the information is stored in the storage unit, and even if the special state is ended, the information stored in the storage unit is used. Since it is in a state in which an advantageous determination is easily made, it is possible to suppress giving extra anxiety to the player by executing the specific effect.

  Second dynamic display means for causing the display to be stopped after dynamically displaying the result information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means in any one of the game machines D2 to D4 and the second dynamic display means Period determination means for determining the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed, and the effect execution means determines that the determination result by the period determination means is a predetermined period condition The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the stop display mode of the result information is switched to the stop display mode based on the determination result of the identification information when the above condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D2 to D4, the stop display mode can be switched when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information satisfies the period condition. It is possible to provide a person with unexpected rendition and enhance the rendition effect.

  In the gaming machine D5, the period condition is satisfied when the remaining dynamic display period of the identification information at the time when the result information is stopped and displayed by the second dynamic display means is within a predetermined period. A game machine D6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine D5, it is possible to suppress the problem that the result information and the identification information are stopped and displayed at short intervals, making it difficult for the player to grasp the displayed content. There is an effect that the player can be provided with an easy-to-understand game.

<Feature E group> (change time of generalization fluctuation period in time saving condition)
The first determination based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means Determining means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination result by the determination means Dynamic display means in which identification information for indicating is dynamically displayed, and entry of gaming balls becomes easier than in the first state from the first state in which gaming balls are difficult to enter in the second ball entry means Variable means for changing to a second state, state setting means capable of setting a special state that can be changed to the second state by the variable means when a specific condition is satisfied, and state setting Means for dynamically displaying the identification information when the special state is set. And, based on the end of the dynamic display period, a lottery for deciding whether to release the special state and to change the variable means from the first state to the second state. Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating lottery results by the lottery means, and dynamic display for determining a dynamic display period for dynamically displaying the lottery information A period determining means, a storage means storing a plurality of dynamic display period groups in which a plurality of dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determining means are set, and the special set by the state setting means The dynamic display period group for which the dynamic display period determination means determines the dynamic display period based on the selection means for selecting the type of state and the special state type set by the state setting means Configuration Gaming machine E1, wherein the one having a dynamic display period group setting unit that, the.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that the game is executed, and the game is configured to be made easier to be played continuously in a high probability state of increasing the lottery probability after the game depending on the type of the game. In such a gaming machine, after a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping display with the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If the player wins, a player who executes a hit game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early by repeating the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine E1, if it is determined that the dynamic display period of the lottery information is short, the lottery can be executed in the special state period, and the interest of the game can be improved by the determined dynamic display period group There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored early.

  In the gaming machine E1, an acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the information acquired by the acquiring means are stored. A storage unit, and the determination unit is configured to execute the first determination or the second determination based on the information stored in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the information acquired by the acquiring means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, the game machine E2 continues to the player regardless of the determination status of the determination means. It is possible to play a game and improve the efficiency of the game.

  In the gaming machine E1 or E2, in the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, the determination means also performs the first determination or the second determination when the information is stored in the storage means. A game machine E3 characterized by waiting for execution.

  According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, while the identification information is dynamically displayed, the execution of the determination based on the information stored in the storage means is awaited, so storage Multiple determinations based on the information stored in the means are not simultaneously performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

  In any of the game machines E1 to E3, the game machine has a detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through a passage area through which the game ball can pass, and the lottery means detects the passage of the game ball by the detection means. A game machine E4 characterized in that the lottery is executed based on what has been done.

  According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the lottery by the lottery means is executed when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed the passage area. There is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game using the game ball with desire.

  In any one of the gaming machines E1 to E4, in the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means, a short dynamic display period is set as the dynamic display period is easily determined. A gaming machine characterized by at least a display period group and a long dynamic display period group in which the short dynamic display period is set to be difficult to determine than the short dynamic display period group. E5.

  According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines E1 to E4, the length of the dynamic display period set by the dynamic display period group set by the dynamic display period group setting means It can be made variable. Therefore, it is possible to make the number of times of lottery performed by the lottery means different in the special state which is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the game machines E2 to E5, the dynamic display period determining means is based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on entering the second ball entering means stored in the storage means. A game machine E6 characterized in that one dynamic display period is determined from the determined dynamic display period group.

  According to the gaming machine E6, the dynamic display period is determined based on the number of pieces of information acquired based on entering the second ball entry means, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines E2 to E5. Therefore, it becomes possible to associate the game in which the game ball is made to enter the second ball entry means with the number of times of lottery performed by the lottery means. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  The gaming machines E1 to E6 have notifying means for notifying that the special state is set, and the notifying means dynamically displays the lottery information determined by the dynamic display period determining means. A game machine E7 characterized in that notification is performed only when the period is shorter than the remaining period of the special state set by the state setting means.

  According to the gaming machine E7, the notification means notifies that the current state is the special state only when the dynamic display of the lottery information ends in the state where the special state is set. Therefore, even in the special state, the player is distrusted by notifying that the variable means is in the special state during the remaining period of the special state which is not changed from the first state to the second state. There is an effect that it can control giving a feeling.

<Feature F group> (special performance per hour and day)
The first determination based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means Determining means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination result by the determination means Performs a bonus game that is advantageous to the player when the dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating and the identification information for indicating that the determination result is the specific one is stopped and displayed Game machine having a bonus game execution means for changing the variable state to change from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means to the second state in which the game ball can enter the ball And lottery means for executing the lottery based on the establishment of the lottery conditions, and the lottery by the lottery means. A lottery information dynamic display means in which lottery information for showing a result is dynamically displayed, and a case where the lottery information for showing that the lottery result is a specific one is stopped and displayed by the variable means Dynamically displaying the identification information is executed when the special state is set by the state setting means capable of setting a special state that can be changed to the state, and the state setting means. A releasing means for releasing the special state based on the end of the dynamic display period, and when the special state is not set, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the identification information is performed, and the special state is performed. The effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information based on the setting of the lottery information, and the effect executing means selects the lottery when the special state is set. Of information Gaming machine F1, characterized in that the state of executing an effect corresponding to the representation in which the dynamic display specific conditions to effect corresponding to the identification information is performed by switching based on the satisfied.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that the game is executed, and the game is configured to be made easier to be played continuously in a high probability state of increasing the lottery probability after the game depending on the type of the game. In such a gaming machine, after a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping display with the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If the player wins, a player who executes a hit game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early by repeating the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine F1, since it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means in the special state, it becomes easy to enter the second ball entry means. Since it is possible to provide the player with an effect corresponding to different information in the special state and other than the special state since the effect is switched to the effect corresponding to whether or not the game can be changed, the player is early There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored.

  In the gaming machine F1, an information acquisition means for acquiring information determined by the determination means based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the information acquiring means A storage unit in which the acquired information is stored, and a game machine F2.

  According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine F1, the information acquired to the storage means even when many game balls enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means Since the is stored, there is an effect that the player can be given many opportunities to be determined.

  In the gaming machine F2, the determination means is based on the information acquired based on entering the second ball entry means stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the determination condition. A game machine F3 characterized in that the determination is executed with priority over the information acquired based on having entered the first ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, when there are a plurality of pieces of information acquired based on having entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of pieces of information are continuously determined Can. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the determination that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, when the special condition is set as the specific condition, the remaining period of the dynamic display period of the identification information for which dynamic display has been started is equal to or less than a predetermined period. A game machine F4 characterized in that one of the conditions is established as at least one of the establishment conditions.

  According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of identification information executed when the special state is canceled before the special state is cancelled. There is an effect that it is possible to switch to, and to switch the effect when it is canceled smoothly.

  In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, in the specific condition, the identification information whose dynamic display is started when the special state is set is a stop display with identification information for indicating the specific determination result. A gaming machine F5 characterized in that it is set as at least one of the conditions that it is set to be set.

  According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, when the identification information dynamically displayed is stopped and displayed by the identification information for indicating that it is a specific determination result, At first, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of the lottery information is given, and it is informed to the player whether or not the game ball is likely to enter the second ball entry means, and then it is a specific judgment result Since it is possible to notify the player by the effect, it is possible to provide the player with the effect of effectively using the dynamic display period of the identification information.

<Feature G group> (game support)
A ball entering means having an opening through which the game ball can enter, an open state in which the game ball can enter into the opening of the ball entering means, and a closed state in which the ball entering of the game ball is restricted. The variable member is changed from the closed state to the open state when the variable member, the determination means for performing the determination based on the passage of the game ball, and the determination result by the determination means is a specific determination result And variable control means for changing the variable pattern in a specific variable pattern, the variable pattern being in the open state through the closing pattern being in the closed state for a predetermined period after the first open pattern in the open state A game machine G1 characterized by at least a second opening pattern.

  Here, a game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a passage area through which game balls can pass, and when the game ball passes through the passage area, a predetermined first lottery is executed, and the lottery result is It has been proposed to make variable members variable so that a ball can easily enter a specific entrance. In such a gaming machine, when a ball enters a specific entrance, a second lottery different from a predetermined lottery is executed, and a liquid crystal display device is used to notify a player of the lottery result. It is known that the lottery result is notified by displaying the lottery result in a stopped state after being variably displayed, etc. and the lottery result is a hit, and if the lottery result is a hit (for example, JP-A 2012-147965 gazette).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the player may miss the result of the first lottery since the fluctuation display of the symbol based on the second lottery result is displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like. The

  According to the gaming machine G1, since the first opening pattern and the second opening pattern are configured, the player who notices that the variable member is variably controlled is executed by the execution of the first opening pattern. In contrast, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the ball entering means during the second opening pattern. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game to the player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machine G1, of the variable patterns, a closing determination means for determining that the closing pattern has been executed, and a predetermined first one when it is determined that the closing pattern has been executed by the closing determination means. And a notification performing means for performing a notification.

  According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, since the notification execution means executes the first notification based on the execution of the first opening pattern ending and the closing pattern being performed, It is possible to make the player easily grasp that the variable control of the variable member is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game to the player who does not understand the game content.

  The gaming machine G2 has a gaming area in which the variable member is provided, and an operating means for firing a gaming ball in the gaming area, and a period set as the closing pattern among the variable patterns, A game machine G3 characterized by being set to be longer than a period until the ball fired by the operation means reaches the variable member.

  According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G2, the period set as the closing pattern is set longer than the period until the ball fired by the operating means reaches the variable member, Even if the player who recognizes that the variable control of the variable member is being executed by the first notification by the notification execution means starts the operation of the operation means, the means for entering the ball while the second opening pattern is being executed It is possible to make the ball enter the Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game to the player who does not understand the game content.

  In any one of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the variable control means has an end condition judging means for judging that an end condition for ending the operation of changing the variable member is satisfied, and the end condition judging means previously A game machine G4 that determines that the termination condition is satisfied when a predetermined variable pattern is executed or when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the termination condition is satisfied when a predetermined number of balls enter the ball entry means, so the predetermined number during the first opening pattern By causing the ball to enter the ball entering means, it is possible to end variable control of the variable member by the variable control means without executing the closing pattern. As a result, since one variable control period can be shortened, the player can play the game eagerly. In addition, even if the closing pattern is set for a long period of time, it is possible for the player who is performing a normal game by enabling the end condition of the variable control to be established during the period when the first variable pattern is being executed. There is an effect that the dissatisfaction caused by the execution of the long-term closing pattern can be suppressed.

  In the gaming machine G4, of the variable patterns, the period set as the first opening pattern is set longer than the period until the predetermined number of balls fired by the operation means reach the variable member. A game machine G5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4, it is possible to cause the ball entry means to enter a predetermined number of balls during the period in which the first opening pattern is executed. Therefore, for the player who is playing a normal game, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a feeling of dissatisfaction caused by the execution of the closing pattern for a long period of time.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G5, when the ball enters the ball entering means while the second opening pattern is being executed among the variable patterns, the predetermined second information A game machine G6 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, the second notification is executed when the ball enters the ball entry means while the second opening pattern is being executed. Therefore, the player can correct the operating method of the operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game to the player who does not understand the game content.

  In the gaming machines G1 to G6, of the variable patterns, a period set as the first opening pattern is shorter than a period set as the second opening pattern. A gaming machine G7.

  According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, it is possible to make the ball easily enter the ball entering means during the period when the variable pattern is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to support the game to the player who does not understand the game content.

<Feature H group> (demonstration near the end of time saving game)
The first determination based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means Determining means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination result by the determination means A bonus game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the dynamic display means in which identification information for showing is dynamically displayed and the identification information for showing that it is a specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a bonus game execution means, lottery information dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means and lottery means for executing a lottery based on establishment of the lottery conditions The first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the display means and the second ball entering means The variable member is changed to a second state in which the game ball can enter the ball, and the variable member is displayed when the lottery information for indicating that the lottery result is a specific one is stopped and displayed. Dynamically displaying the identification information is executed a predetermined number of times when the special state is set by the state setting means capable of setting a special state that can be varied into two states and the state setting means Release means for releasing the special state based on the end of the predetermined number of dynamic display periods, and when the dynamic display of the lottery information is started during the special state, the lottery information is A game machine H1 comprising: an effect execution means for executing an effect based on information corresponding to a period in which the stop display is set in the special state.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that the game is executed, and the game is configured to be made easier to be played continuously in a high probability state of increasing the lottery probability after the game depending on the type of the game. In such a gaming machine, after a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping display with the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If the player wins, a player who executes a hit game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early by repeating the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine H1, since the effect is executed based on the state set to the stop display timing of the lottery information for which dynamic display is started during the special state, when the lottery information is stopped and displayed from the effect It is possible to recognize the timing of the game, and to make the player interested in the state when the lottery information is stopped and displayed, and it is possible to suppress the problem of getting bored early in the game.

  In the gaming machine H1, in the state in which the special state is not set, the effect execution means executes the effect corresponding to the dynamic display period of the identification information, and based on the setting of the special state. A game machine H2 characterized by switching to an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of lottery information and executing it.

  According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H1, the effects are executed by switching the corresponding dynamic display period between the special state and the non-special state, so providing the player with different effects, The effect is that it can improve the interest of

  In the gaming machine H1 or H2, acquisition means capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means, and the information acquired by the acquisition means Storage means for storing, the determination means, based on the fact that the predetermined determination condition is satisfied, the game ball to the second entering means among the information stored in the storage means The game machine H3 is characterized in that the determination is preferentially performed on the information acquired based on entering the ball.

  According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of playing the gaming machine H1 or H2, when there is a plurality of pieces of information acquired based on having entered the second ball entry means, the plurality of pieces of information are judged continuously can do. Therefore, it is possible to continuously execute the determination that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the player's willingness to play the game.

  In the gaming machine H3, in the determination condition, the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped and displayed with the identification information for indicating the specific determination result, and the undetermined information is stored in the storage unit. The game machine H4 characterized in that at least the condition is set.

  According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, since the determination condition is difficult to be established during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, storage is performed in the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. There is an effect that the player can be given the opportunity to store information in the means, and the game can be played efficiently.

  In the gaming machine H4, when the special state is set, a restricting means for restricting that the information acquired based on entering the second ball entering means is stored in the storage means is provided. A game machine H5 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H4, when the special state is set, the information acquired based on entering the second ball entry means is restricted from being stored. Therefore, at the timing when the special state is set, identification information for indicating the determination result based on the information acquired by entering the first ball entry means can be easily displayed dynamically, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to delay the execution of such judgments and to increase the interest of the player.

  In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the variable member indicates that the lottery information indicating that the specific lottery result is the stop, if the special state is set in the period drawn by the lottery means. A game machine H6 characterized in that the game machine can be changed to the second state when being operated.

  According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H5, it can be changed to the second state based on the setting status of the special state in the lottery period, which is advantageous for the player It is possible to make it easy to provide such a state and to increase the interest of the player.

<Feature I group> (Yamato specification)
A game ball enters the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, a second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means Information acquisition means for acquiring information based on the information, and the first determination based on the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means by the information acquisition means, Determination means for executing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating a determination result by the user, and a privilege giving a benefit when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is a specific one is stopped and displayed Means, and a game machine having a means, before the second ball entering means Set at least by switching at least the normal state where the game ball easily enters the first ball entry means and the special state where the game ball easily enters the second ball entry means than the first ball entry means State setting means capable of setting the identification information corresponding to the first determination as a release condition for releasing the special state when the special state is set by the state setting means A game machine I1, which is configured to be able to individually set the number of times of dynamic display of and the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that the game is executed, and the game is configured to be made easier to be played continuously in a high probability state of increasing the lottery probability after the game depending on the type of the game. In such a gaming machine, after a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping display with the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If the player wins, a player who executes a hit game is known (for example, JP 2012-147965 A).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the game is monotonous and the player gets bored early by repeating the variable display of the symbols based on the lottery result.

  According to the gaming machine I1, the dynamic display count of the identification information corresponding to the first determination and the dynamic display count of the identification information corresponding to the second determination can be set as the condition for canceling the special state. The sense of expectation for the second determination to be performed can be varied and set. That is, if the number of times of the dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is set large, the player can be given many opportunities for the second determination to be executed, and conversely, the identification information corresponding to the first determination If the number of times of dynamic display is set to a large number, it is possible to set a small opportunity for the second determination to be performed, and it is possible to vary the interest of the player.

  The gaming machine I1 includes storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination means enters the second ball entering means among the information stored in the storage means. A gaming machine I2 characterized by prioritizing the information acquired by the information acquiring means on the basis of the information.

  According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I1, the determination is preferentially executed on the information for which the determination that is advantageous to the player is executed, so that the advantageous determination is continuously executed to the player There is an effect that it is easy to be done and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I1 or I2, when the special state is set, a restricting means for making it difficult to store information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means in the memory means A game machine I3 characterized by having.

  According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, identification information based on the first determination can be easily displayed dynamically in the special state, and the second display is performed during the dynamic display period. The game ball is made to enter the ball means, more information is stored, and after the dynamic display of the first determination is finished, advantageous determination can be easily performed continuously.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the release condition is configured such that the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the first determination is larger than the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination. A game machine I4 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, it is possible to suppress that the special state is canceled by the execution of only the first determination which is disadvantageous to the player. There is an effect that it is possible to make the second determination that is advantageous to the player easy to execute during the state.

  In the gaming machine I4, a gaming machine I5, wherein the cancellation condition is set by setting the number of times of dynamic display of the identification information corresponding to the second determination as one.

  According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4, the number of times the second determination advantageous to the player can be executed during the special state can be limited to one. There is an effect that it can control that it gives to.

  In any one of the game machines I2 to I5, a game machine I6 characterized in that the storage means is configured to be able to store the information up to the upper limit number.

  According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I2 to I5, the information for executing the second determination advantageous to the player can be stored up to the upper limit number, so the special state ends. It is possible to execute the second determination even after the Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be expected even after the special state ends.

  In the gaming machine I6, the upper limit number is the first upper limit number for the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball enters the second ball entry means A game machine I7 characterized in that a second upper limit number for the information acquired based on the information has been set.

  According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine I6, the information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means and the game ball entering the second ball entry means Because the upper limit number that can be stored can be set with the information acquired based on the information, regardless of the number of stored information acquired based on the game ball entering the first ball entry means The information acquired based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means can be stored up to the upper limit number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly to cause the game ball to enter the second ball entry means during the special state.

  In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I7, variable ball entering means capable of changing into a state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball A gaming machine I8 characterized in that the bonus giving means is capable of giving a bonus when the game ball passes through the specific area.

  According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I1 to I7, a bonus is given by passing the gaming ball to the specific area, thus giving the player an interest in the ball flow There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I8, the special state is set by the state setting means after the privilege is given by the privilege giving means.

  According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I8, the special state is set after the privilege is given, so that it is possible to enhance the playability by passing the gaming ball in the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine I9, the state setting means has setting determination means for determining whether or not to set the special state, and the setting determination means determines whether the first determination or the second determination is made by the determination means. It is determined whether or not to set the special state based on being executed. A gaming machine I10.

  According to the gaming machine I10, it is determined at the timing when the determination by the determination means is performed whether or not the special state is to be set after the benefit is given, so depending on the timing of passing the gaming ball in the specific area Whether or not the special state is set is variable. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of selecting the timing of passing the gaming ball to the specific area.

  A gaming machine I11 characterized in that the gaming machine I10 includes suggestion means for suggesting the determination information determined by the setting determination means during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed.

  According to the gaming machine I11, it is possible to recognize whether the special state is set after the benefit is given by the suggestion means, so it is possible to play the game ball to the specific area or to the specific area There is an effect that the player can decide with reference to the contents of the suggestion whether to play the game so that the game ball does not pass.

  In any one of the gaming machines I7 to I11, the number of times of dynamic display with respect to the first identification information which is larger than the first upper limit number is set as the cancellation condition.

  According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines I7 to I11, the information acquired for entering the ball into the first ball entry means is the first information when the special state is entered. Even when the upper limit number is stored, the special status is not canceled even if all the information is first determined and the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, so the opportunity for the second determination in the special status is There is an effect that it can be given by the player and the value of the special state can be increased for the player.

<Feature J group> (big hit presentation in consecutive chan)
The first determination based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means Determining means for performing a second determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and the determination result by the determination means A dynamic display means in which identification information for indicating is displayed dynamically, and a second state in which gaming balls are difficult to enter in the second ball entering means are changed from a first state in which gaming balls are difficult to enter Variable means for setting the special state that can change the second ball entering means to the second state when a specific condition is satisfied, and the special state setting means for setting the special state. Dynamic display of the identification information is performed when a state is set, and the dynamic display period thereof The special state is released before the dynamic display of the identification information is started after the special state is released by the releasing means for releasing the special state and the releasing means based on the termination. It has a determination means for determining whether or not it is set by the state setting means, and an effect execution means capable of changing and performing an effect based on the determination result of the determination means. Gaming machine J1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and if the lottery result is a win, it will be advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that the game is executed, and the game is configured to be made easier to be played continuously in a high probability state of increasing the lottery probability after the game depending on the type of the game. In such a gaming machine, after a symbol for notifying the player of the lottery result is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device or the like, the lottery result is notified by stopping display with the symbol indicating the lottery result, and the lottery result If it is a hit, it is known to execute a hit game and to execute an effect during the hit game (e.g., JP-A-2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the interest of the game has been further improved.

  According to the gaming machine J1, even when the special state is canceled, the effect can be changed based on the information as to whether the special state is set again before the identification information is dynamically displayed. It is possible to identify from the effect whether or not the special state is set continuously, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine J1, the effect execution means executes an effect corresponding to a dynamic display of the identification information for indicating a determination result based on the second determination.

  According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J1, an effect corresponding to the dynamic display of identification information for indicating the determination result based on the second determination advantageous to the player is executed. The second embodiment has an effect of being able to increase the expectation for the determination result of the second determination.

  In the gaming machine J1 or J2, the effect executing means is configured to be able to execute an effect capable of identifying information based on the number of times the special state is continuously set by the judging means. A gaming machine J3.

  According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine J1 or J2, the number of times the special state is continuously set is made distinguishable by the effect, so the player hits not only the game but also the special state is set. There is an effect that it is possible to give interest to the number of times the game is played, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machines J1 to J3, when the game ball enters the first ball entry means, information is obtained to execute the first determination, and the game ball enters the second ball entry means A gaming machine characterized by comprising information acquisition means for acquiring information for executing the second determination, and information storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means. J4.

  According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines J1 to J3, information is acquired at the timing when the gaming ball enters the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, and the information is stored in the information storage means Since it is stored, it is possible to save the opportunity determined by the determination means, and it is possible to provide the player with many benefits.

  In the gaming machine J4, the effect execution means is configured to be able to vary the effect based on the number of pieces of information for performing the second determination stored in the storage means. A game machine J5 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine J4, the effect is variable according to the number of pieces of information for which the second determination that is advantageous to the player is executed, so information which is easily reserved by the player There is an effect that it is possible to inform the number of objects and to increase the interest in the effect.

<Feature K group>
The first determination based on the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, and the game ball entering the first ball entering means Motion that is dynamically displayed on the determination means for performing the second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means Gaming machine having an intentional display means and a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game which is advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating that the determination result is the specific one is stopped and displayed A game machine K1 comprising state setting means for setting a game state advantageous to a player during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed based on establishment of a specific condition.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by the game ball entering the starting opening provided on the gaming board, and a symbol for indicating the lottery result is moved to a liquid crystal display device or the like. The symbol display is stopped and displayed in a manner in which the lottery result is notified at the timing when the dynamic display period ends. A hit game that is advantageous to the player is executed when the notification mode indicated by the symbol is a hit, and the hit game is continuously performed with a high probability state of increasing the lottery probability after the hit according to the type of the hit game. It is proposed to be configured to be easy to implement. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2012-147965).

  However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the dynamic display period for showing the lottery result is long, the number of times for the player to draw will be small and disadvantageous, and the longer the dynamic display period, the more boring the player And there is a problem that you get bored with the game. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a problem that a player is bored with a game.

  According to the gaming machine K1, since the player is in an advantageous state during the period in which the dynamic display of the identification information is being performed, the player is expected to perform the dynamic display having a long dynamic display period. It has the effect of being able to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine K1, the determination means executes a determination that is more advantageous to the player than the first determination in the second determination, and that the game ball enters the first entering means. Information acquiring means for acquiring information for executing the first determination based on the information acquiring means for acquiring information for performing the second determination based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means; And storage means for storing the information acquired by the information acquisition means, wherein the determination means is stored in the storage means based on the end of the dynamic display of the identification information. A game machine K2 characterized by performing judgment on the information.

  According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine K1, even if information is acquired during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, it is stored in the storage means, thus making more decision opportunities by the decision means It has the effect of being able to

  In the game machine K1 or K2, the variable means for changing from the first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the second ball entering means to the second state in which the game ball can enter the ball and the establishment of the lottery condition And a lottery information dynamic display means for dynamically displaying lottery information for indicating a lottery result by the lottery means, wherein the state setting means As an advantageous gaming state, when the lottery information for indicating that it is a specific lottery result is stopped and displayed, it is possible to be changed to the second state by the variable means. A game machine K3 characterized by a certain feature.

  According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects of playing the gaming machine K1 or K2, in the special state, it is easy to enter the gaming ball into the second ball entry means, and the game characteristics can be varied, the fun of the game Has the effect of being able to

  In the gaming machine K3, when the gaming state advantageous to the player is set by the state setting means, the dynamic display of the identification information is executed, and based on the end of the dynamic display period, A game machine K4 characterized by having releasing means for releasing a gaming state advantageous to a player.

  According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, it is advantageous for the player based on the end of the dynamic display of the identification information executed when the gaming state advantageous to the player is set. It is possible to give the player an interest as to the end timing of the dynamic display of the identification information because the normal gaming state is canceled, and it is possible to suppress the trouble that the player bores even if a long dynamic display period is set. It has the effect of

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, it has a first flow path through which gaming balls can flow down, and a second flow path through which the gaming balls flowing down the first flow path are difficult to flow down; The means are respectively disposed at the second flow path and at a position where the gaming ball which has flowed down at least the first flow path can enter the ball, and the second ball entry means is disposed at the second flow path Game machine K5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the gaming ball is moved to the first ball-closing means even if a game is performed to bring the game ball into the second ball-closing means. It becomes an arrangement to enter a ball, and there is an effect that it is possible to restrict a state in which it is easy for the player to easily execute the determination.

  In any one of the gaming machines K1 to K5, there is an effect executing means for executing an effect corresponding to a dynamic display period of the identification information when a game state advantageous to the player is set. A game machine K6 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines K1 to K5, effects corresponding to the dynamic display period are executed when a gaming state advantageous to the player is set, so There is an effect that the interest can be improved.

  In the gaming machine K6, the effect executed by the effect executing means includes an effect for prompting the game ball to enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means. A gaming machine K7.

  According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K6, the gaming ball is made to enter the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means during the game state advantageous to the player, and the first judgment or the second Since it is easy to give an opportunity to execute the determination, there is an effect that it is possible to play the game efficiently.

<Characteristic L group> (The storage device is released every big hit round and the extra balls increase)
A first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, a judging means for executing the judgment when a judgment condition based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the judgment means A display means on which identification information for indicating a determination result is dynamically displayed, and a bonus game execution for executing a bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means is stopped and displayed Means, second ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, benefit providing means for providing a player with a benefit based on the game ball entering the second ball entering means, and storing the game ball A gaming machine comprising: storage means capable of being stored; and release means for releasing storage so that game balls stored in the storage means can enter the second ball entry means and flowing down. The release means is in the storage state during execution of the bonus game Gaming machine L1, characterized in that it is intended to cancel.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game ball will win on the basis of winning in the winning opening, and when the winning is won, the winning game is opened the specific winning opening. There is something to be done. In addition, a storage means capable of temporarily storing gaming balls is provided, and when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the storage state of the storage means is released and the ball stored in the storage means is released. Is allowed to flow toward the general prize winning opening (e.g., JP-A-2006-180950).

  However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the winning game and the game using the storage means are executed independently, respectively, during the hit game, a game is performed to aim at the specific winning opening, and the balls are stored in the storage means In the case of being played, it was only to play a game using the storage means. Therefore, there is a problem that each game becomes monotonous and the player gets bored with the game early.

  According to the gaming machine L1, the storage state is released during the bonus game, and the bonus game is executed by the bonus granting means so that the benefit is more easily granted, and the value in the bonus game is enhanced to entertain the player Has the effect of improving

  The gaming machine L1 has variable ball entry means that can be varied between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which the ball is difficult to enter from the first state, and the bonus game execution means As the bonus game, the variable ball entering means is varied from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the bonus giving means is a game ball entering the variable ball entering means. A gaming machine L2 characterized by giving a privilege based on having a ball.

  According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine L1, in addition to the benefits provided by entering the variable entering means, the gaming ball released from the storing means enters the second entering means Since the privilege given by doing is also granted, there is an effect that the improvement of the interest can be further enhanced by the start of the bonus game.

  In the gaming machine L2, the bonus game is executed a predetermined number of small bonus games for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state until the predetermined condition is satisfied, the cancellation A gaming machine L3 characterized in that the means changes the released state every time the small bonus game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine L 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L 2, the small bonus game is changed to the release state, so whether or not the gaming ball is stored in the storage means even during the small bonus game period It has the effect of being able to enjoy it.

  In any one of the gaming machines L2 and L3, a guiding channel capable of guiding the gaming ball to the storage means and a first flow capable of guiding the gaming ball flowing down the guiding channel to the storage means A game machine L4 characterized by including distribution means for distributing a path and a second flow path that can be guided to the variable ball entry means.

  According to the gaming machine L4, in addition to the effects of either the gaming machine L2 or L3, the gaming ball is distributed so as to be able to enter the storage means and the variable ball entering means by causing the gaming ball to flow down the induction channel. Since the game ball is guided to the storage means during the bonus game, the game ball can be stored in the storage state.

  A gaming machine L5 according to any one of the gaming machines L3 and L4, wherein the sorting unit sorts the proportion of the second flow path to the first flow path lower than the second flow path.

  According to the gaming machine L5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine L3 or L4, it is possible to guide the gaming ball to the storage means while increasing the percentage of entering the variable ball entering means in the bonus game, There is an effect that it is possible to increase the value of the bonus game while suppressing the loss of the game value.

  In any one of game machines L1 to L5, the storage means is variably changed from the release state to the storage state based on execution of the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine L6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines L1 to L5, the gaming state is stored during a period in which the bonus game is not being executed by being changed to the storage state based on the execution of the bonus game. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the trouble that the damage on the gaming shop side occurs by being done.

<Feature M group> (normal right-handed regulation)
The first flow path in which the game ball can flow down, and the second flow path in which the game ball in which the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow can flow, and the firing intensity of the game ball is varied. Game ball firing means capable of striking and firing a game ball in the first flow path and the second flow path, and playing a game by firing the game ball in the first flow path To switch between the first gaming state, which is the gaming state suggested to the player, and the second gaming state, which is the gaming state suggested to the player, so as to play the game by firing the gaming ball in the second flow path Based on the possible setting means, the first ball entering means into which the game ball having flowed down the second flow path can enter and the first ball entering means, the first benefit is awarded based on the ball entering the first ball entering means First benefit giving means, a first state where game balls can enter the ball and a second state where it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state Variable bonus means capable of changing to the second game, second benefit giving means for granting a second benefit based on the game ball entering the variable flash means, and the game ball flowing down the second flow path It is possible to distribute at a predetermined ratio between the first guiding path where game balls can enter the first ball entering means and the second guiding path where game balls can enter the variable ball entering means. A distribution means, and the distribution means is a game for the game ball distributed to the second guiding path rather than the first benefit provided by the game ball distributed to the first flow path at the predetermined ratio A game machine M1 characterized by distributing game balls so as to be equal to or less than a value.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game ball will win on the basis of winning in the winning opening, and when the winning is won, the winning game is opened the specific winning opening. There is something to be done. In addition, there is a system that allows a player to execute an advantageous game by performing a right-handed game in which the game ball is shot by aiming at the right area of the gaming machine when the special state is set as the gaming state (for example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2015-1150303).

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, while the specific state is set, it is possible to cause the player to execute an advantageous game by performing the right-handed game, but the specific state is set as the gaming state. In the case where the right-handed game is played, there is a possibility that the player is given an advantageous benefit to the player illegally.

  In addition to the above-mentioned prior art, there are also a gaming machine which executes a right-handed game during a big hit game and a gaming machine etc. where a right-handed game is executed during a time saving state. If the game is to be played, that is, in the gaming state where the left-handed game should be executed, the right-handed game may be excessively provided to the player by providing the right-handed game.

  According to the gaming machine M1, even when a game is performed by letting the gaming ball flow down to the second flow path in the first gaming state, an advantageous game is obtained by the gaming ball entering the first ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that the profit on the gaming shop side is lost by being executed.

  In the gaming machine M1, the first induction passage has a first passage through which game balls can pass, and a second passage through which the ball passing through the first passage is difficult to pass unlike the first passage. The first induction passage is configured to allow the game ball to pass through the first passage more easily than the second passage, and the first ball entry means is disposed in the first passage. The game machine M2 which features.

  According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, it is difficult to enter the first ball entry means even if the gaming ball is allowed to flow down the first induction route, so the first ball entry means An advantageous game is executed by entering the game ball into the means, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a disadvantage that the profit on the gaming shop side is lost.

  In the gaming machine M2, the storage means capable of storing gaming balls flowing down the first induction passage, and the gaming balls stored in the storage means release storage so as to be able to pass through the second passage and flow down. A game machine M3 having a releasing means.

  According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M2, when the gaming ball is stored in the storage means, the gaming ball flowing down the first guiding path is made easy to enter the first ball entering means be able to. As a result, it is possible to provide the first ball entry means with a state in which it is easy to enter the game ball and a state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine M3, the bonus game is executed by a bonus game execution unit that executes a bonus game that causes the variable ball entry unit to be in the first state based on satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the bonus game execution unit And a storage control unit configured to set a storage state capable of storing game balls in the storage unit.

  According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine M3, since the gaming balls are stored in the storage means based on the execution of the bonus game, storage is performed when the bonus game is not executed. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the game ball from being stored in the means. Further, since the state in which the bonus game is being executed can be made easy to cause the ball to enter the first ball entry means, there is an effect that it is possible to grant the player further bonus.

  In the gaming machine M3 or M4, the releasing means has a variable member capable of changing the storing means into a storage state in which the game ball can store and a release state in which the game ball can not store the game ball in a difficult manner. The game ball stored first in the storage means is stored in the first position, and the game balls stored thereafter are stored in the second position other than the first position, and the variable member is configured to be stored. The game ball characterized in that the game ball stored in the second position is more likely to pass through the second passage than the game ball stored in the first position when in the released state. Machine M5.

  According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M3 or M4, the direction in which a large number of gaming balls are stored in the storage means can make it easier for the ball to enter the first ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to continuously play the game in order to make the player eagerly store the game ball.

<Feature N group> (pseudo storage using a prized ball)
The first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means for executing the judgment based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the identification for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means A game comprising: display means for dynamically displaying information; and bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means Machine, detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area, benefit giving means for giving a benefit based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the detection means, and the specific area has passed Storage means capable of storing game balls; variable control means for varying between a storage state capable of storing game balls in the storage means; and a release state in which the stored game balls are allowed to flow down; Changed to the release state It is something which has the second ball entry means which can enter the game ball which flowed down and the effect execution means which executes the effect based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. A game machine N1 characterized by.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game ball will win on the basis of winning in the winning opening, and when the winning is won, the winning game is opened the specific winning opening. There is something to be done. In addition, a storage means capable of temporarily storing gaming balls is provided, and when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the storage state of the storage means is released and the ball stored in the storage means is released. Is allowed to flow toward the general prize winning opening (e.g., JP-A-2006-180950). In such a gaming machine, a ball after winning a prize at each winning opening flows down a passage invisible to the player and is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

  However, in the conventional game machine described above, although effects using the game balls before entering the respective winning openings are performed, the gaming balls after winning in the respective winning openings may be used for effect Instead, it is difficult to increase the variation of the presentation because it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine as it is.

  According to the gaming machine N1, the gaming ball which is the trigger for giving the benefit is stored in the storage means, the storage of the game balls stored in the storage means is canceled, and the second ball entering means is entered. Since the effect is executed, it is possible to improve the player's interest by the effect even after the privilege is given, and it is possible to suppress the player from being bored early.

  In the gaming machine N1, a gaming machine N2 characterized in that the variable control means varies the storage means from the storage state to the release state during the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1, there is an effect that it is possible to enjoy not only the bonus game but also the effect by being changed to the released state during the bonus game.

  The game machine N1 or N2 has variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The bonus granting means grants a bonus based on the game ball entering the variable ball entering means, and the bonus game executing means executes the variable ball entering means as the second bonus game as the bonus game. A game machine N3 characterized in that it is variable from a state to the first state until a predetermined condition is established.

  According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine N1 or N2, the variable ball entry means is variably changed to the first state as a bonus game, so that the game ball can be easily entered into the variable ball entry means There is an effect that it is possible to play a game combined with a game in which the game ball is made to enter from the storage means to the second ball entry means.

  In any one of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the variable control means is configured to vary from the release state to the storage state based on the execution of the bonus game.

  According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines N1 to N3, the storage state is changed based on the execution of the bonus game, whereby the bonus game is stored for a period when it is not being executed. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate being played and to limit storage of the game balls.

<Feature O group> (pseudo storage effect control)
The first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, the judging means for executing the judgment based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the identification for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means A game comprising: display means for dynamically displaying information; and bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means Machine, detection means for detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area, benefit giving means for giving a benefit based on the detection of the passage of the game ball in the detection means, and the specific area has passed Storage means capable of storing game balls; variable control means for varying between a storage state capable of storing game balls in the storage means; and a release state in which the stored game balls are allowed to flow down; Changed to the release state It is characterized by having a second ball entering means capable of entering a game ball which has flowed down, and an effect executing means for executing a specific effect based on the game ball being stored in the storage means. With gaming machine O1.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game ball will win on the basis of winning in the winning opening, and when the winning is won, the winning game is opened the specific winning opening. There is something to be done. In addition, a storage means capable of temporarily storing gaming balls is provided, and when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the storage state of the storage means is released and the ball stored in the storage means is released. Is allowed to flow toward the general prize winning opening (e.g., JP-A-2006-180950). In such a gaming machine, a ball after winning a prize at each winning opening flows down a passage invisible to the player and is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

  However, in the conventional game machine described above, although effects using the game balls before entering the respective winning openings are performed, the gaming balls after winning in the respective winning openings may be used for effect Instead, it is difficult to increase the variation of the presentation because it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine as it is.

  According to the gaming machine O1, since the effect is executed by storing the gaming balls in the storage means, the amusement of the game is improved even if it is the gaming ball after passing the specific area and the privilege is given There is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by making use of

  In the gaming machine O1, when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing unit, the effect executing unit executes a bonus game effect, and the variable control unit executes the bonus game executing unit by the bonus game executing unit. A gaming machine O2 characterized in that the storage means is changed to a storage state when a storage condition that can be satisfied is established in a state where a bonus game is being performed.

  According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine O1, since the effect is executed by the effect executing means when the bonus game is being executed, the bonus game effect and the specific effect are integrated and executed. It is possible to enhance the stage effect.

  In the gaming machine O1 or O2, when the bonus game is executed by the bonus game executing unit, the effect executing unit executes a bonus game effect, and the variable control unit is the bonus game executing unit Thus, the game machine O3 changes the storage means to the release state when a release condition that can be satisfied is established in a state where the bonus game is being performed.

  According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine O1 or O2, it is possible to cause the second ball entry means to enter the gaming ball while the bonus game is being executed, so it is executed during the bonus game Can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines O1 to O3, the game execution means includes bonus summarizing means for summing up the privileges given by the privilege giving means within a predetermined period, and the effect execution means enters the second ball entry means into the game ball A game machine O4 for executing an effect for displaying a combined benefit mode for indicating a combined benefit added by the benefit combining means, based on having a ball.

  According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, an effect for displaying a combined benefit mode is executed based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that the bonus is given based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second entering means. Moreover, since the privilege given within the predetermined period is added and displayed, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine O4, variable ball entry means that can be changed to a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which ball entry is difficult from the first state, and the game ball in the variable ball entry means The second bonus granting means for granting the second bonus based on the fact that the ball enters the ball, and the bonus game executing means is configured to select the variable entering means from the second state from the second state as the bonus game. The small bonus game to be varied until a predetermined condition is established in one state is executed a plurality of times, and the storage condition is that the first small bonus game is executed during a period in which the bonus game is being executed. A game machine O5 characterized by being established in a period other than the period in which the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine O4, a benefit can be provided during a period in which the second benefit is provided, so it is possible to give the player that the benefit is provided by the benefit giving means. It can be hard to notice. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that a benefit is given based on the game ball entering the second ball entry means, and it is possible to enhance the rendering effect.

<Feature P group> (effect according to the state of the ball stored in the jackpot)
A first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, a judging means for executing the judgment when a judgment condition based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and the judgment means A display means on which identification information for indicating a determination result is dynamically displayed, and a bonus game execution for executing a bonus game when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means is stopped and displayed Means, second ball entering means capable of entering the game ball, benefit providing means for providing a bonus to the player based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means, and storing the game ball A gaming machine comprising: storage means capable of being stored; and release means for releasing storage so that game balls stored in the storage means can enter the second ball entry means and flowing down. The storage means is configured to play the game until the bonus game is performed. It is set to the storage state which can store a ball, and the production execution means which performs specific effect, when the game ball is stored by the above-mentioned storage means based on the fact that the above-mentioned bonus game is performed A game machine P1 characterized by having:

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game ball will win on the basis of winning in the winning opening, and when the winning is won, the winning game is opened the specific winning opening. There is something to be done. In addition, a storage means capable of temporarily storing gaming balls is provided, and when the player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means, the storage state of the storage means is released and the ball stored in the storage means is released. Is allowed to flow toward the general prize winning opening (e.g., JP-A-2006-180950). In such a gaming machine, a ball after winning a prize at each winning opening flows down a passage invisible to the player and is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

  However, in the conventional game machine described above, although effects using the game balls before entering the respective winning openings are performed, the gaming balls after winning in the respective winning openings may be used for effect Instead, it is difficult to increase the variation of the presentation because it is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine as it is.

  According to the gaming machine P1, when the game balls are stored in the storage means, the specific effect is executed based on the execution of the bonus game, so the game balls stored in the storage means during the bonus game are It is possible to easily recognize that the game is released and to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine P1 has a determination means capable of determining the number of game balls stored in the storage means, and the effect execution means is based on the number of game balls determined by the determination means. A game machine P2 characterized in that the type of the specific effect is determined.

  According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine P1, the type of the specific effect is determined by the number of storages, so that different specific effects can be executed depending on the number of storages, and a bonus is given to the player There is an effect that it is possible to notify of the height of the expectation to be made by the type of specific effect.

  The game machine P1 or P2 has variable ball entry means that can be varied between a first state in which the game ball can enter the ball and a second state in which it is difficult to enter the ball from the first state, and the bonus game is executed The means performs, as the bonus game, a small bonus game that changes the variable entering means from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is established, and the variable control means is configured to: When the release condition is satisfied based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the storage means is made variable to the release state, and the effect executing unit takes a period until the predetermined condition is met. A game machine P3 characterized by displaying information indicative of a suggested period.

  According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1 or P2, displaying the period information by the effect executing means causes the player to predict the period until the storage means is changed to the release state. it can. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly in order to store many game balls while the storage means is in the storage state.

  The game machine P2 or P3 has effect type suggesting means for suggesting a type of specific effect which can be executed by the effect executing means, and the effect executing means is for the specific effect suggested by the effect type suggesting means The type of benefit effect is determined from the type, and the effect type suggesting means determines the type of the specific effect to be suggested based on the number of gaming balls determined by the determining means. A game machine P4 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P2 or P3, the type of the specific effect to be executed by the effect executing means can be suggested to the player before the specific effect is executed. . Thereby, the player can play the game while expecting the specific effect to be executed by the effect executing means when the type of the desired specific effect is suggested. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines P2 to P4, the determination information for which the determination is performed by the determination means is stored in the storage means capable of storing a plurality of information until the determination condition is satisfied, and the determination information stored in the storage means Correspondingly, it has a prior discrimination means for performing prior discrimination before the judgment is carried out by the judgment means, and the type of the specific effect to be executed by the effect execution means is the prior discrimination means A game machine P5 characterized by being determined based on the determination result of the above.

  According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P2 to P4, it becomes possible to predict the contents of the game to be executed in the future, depending on the type of benefit effect executed by the effect executing means. As a result, the player can be made to gaze at the content of the effect content to be executed by the effect executing means, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

<Feature Q group> (A configuration in which the longer the round time during the jackpot, the more advantageous)
The first flow path in which the game ball can flow down, and the second flow path in which the game ball in which the game ball that has flowed down the first flow path is difficult to flow can flow, and the firing intensity of the game ball is varied. Game ball firing means capable of striking and firing a game ball in the first flow path and the second flow path, and playing a game by firing the game ball in the first flow path To switch between the first gaming state, which is the gaming state suggested to the player, and the second gaming state, which is the gaming state suggested to the player, so as to play the game by firing the gaming ball in the second flow path Possible setting means, variable ball entering means capable of changing between a first state in which the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path can enter the ball and a second state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the first state; In the ball entering means where the game ball which has flowed down the second flow path can enter the ball and the game ball entered the variable ball entering means Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second ball on the basis of the game ball having entered the first ball, the game ball having flowed down the second flow path, and Sorting means that can be distributed at a predetermined ratio between a first guideway guiding so that it can enter the means and a second guideway that guides the game ball so that it can enter the ball entering means And storage means capable of storing the game balls distributed to the second guiding path before being guided to the ball entering means, a storage state capable of storing the storage means, and the storage state released. And a variable control means capable of changing to a released state, wherein the gaming machine stores the stored state in the storage means in the released state more than when the gaming ball stored in the storage means is released. It is difficult to enter the ball into the ball entry means when the Gaming machine Q1, wherein those which are configured such that.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game ball will win on the basis of winning in the winning opening, and when the winning is won, the winning game is opened the specific winning opening. There is something to be done. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-180950). In such a gaming machine, a large number of winning balls can be obtained because the opening state of the specific winning opening is continued until a predetermined number of balls enter the specific winning opening opened during the winning game.

  However, in the above-described conventional game machine, for example, when the ball is set so that it is difficult to enter the specific winning opening, only the number of balls used to enter the predetermined number of balls in the specific winning opening is set. There is a problem that it increases and the player's willingness to play decreases. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous because only the game in which the game ball is made to enter the specific winning combination is executed during the winning game.

  According to the gaming machine Q1, entering the ball into the ball entering means differs in difficulty for the game ball released from the state stored in the storage means and flowing down and the game ball flowing down without being stored in the released state The longer the storage period, the more advantageous the player can be.

  The gaming machine Q1 has a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the bonus game execution means is: As the bonus game, a small bonus game in which the variable ball entering means is varied from the second state to the first state until a predetermined condition is established is executed a plurality of times, and the variable control means is configured to perform the predetermined condition A game machine Q2 characterized in that the storage means is made variable to the release state when a release condition is established based on the fact that the condition is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine Q1, the storage means is changed to the release state based on the content of the bonus game, so the game ball stored in the storage means during the bonus game There is an effect that it is possible to enter the game, and the interest of the game during the bonus game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine Q2, a bonus game type storing means for storing a plurality of bonus game types having different predetermined conditions and a type of one bonus game from types of the plurality of bonus games stored in the bonus game type storing means It has a bonus game type determining means for determining the type, and the bonus game executing means executes the bonus game based on the type of the one bonus game determined by the bonus game type determining means. A game machine Q3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the period until the storage means is changed to the release state can be made different depending on the type of the bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to give an interest to the type of bonus game to be executed.

  In the gaming machine Q3, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the number of ball entry into the variable ball entry means, and among the plurality of types of bonus games stored in the bonus game type storage means A game machine Q4 characterized in that at least one bonus game type is set such that the number of ball entry for which the predetermined condition is satisfied is set larger than that of other bonus game types.

  According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q3, storing a large number of gaming balls in the storage means when a bonus game in which the number of balls entered into the variable ball entering means is set is executed. Therefore, when many first benefits are given to the player, many second benefits can be given. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to cause the player to actively play the game.

  In the gaming machine Q3 or Q4, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the passage of a period in which the variable entering means continues to be in the first state, and a plurality of items stored in the bonus game type storing means Of the types of bonus games, at least one type of bonus game is characterized in that the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than the types of other bonus games. Q5.

  According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine Q3 or Q4, when the period in which the variable ball entry means is in the first state is set long, it is possible to store many gaming balls in the storage means Therefore, when many first benefits can be given to the player, many second benefits can be given. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to cause the player to actively play the game.

  In any one of the game machines Q3 to Q5, the variable ball entering means comprises a first variable ball entering means and a second variable ball entering means different from the first variable ball entering means. The bonus game execution means changes the variable entering means to be varied in the small bonus game based on the type of the bonus game determined by the bonus game type determination means, the first variable entering means or the first variable entering means A game machine Q6 characterized by being selected from the second variable ball entry means and executed.

  According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects played by any of the gaming machines Q3 to Q5, the type of the bonus game can be grasped by the variable ball entry means which is variable in the small bonus game. There is an effect that it is possible to enjoy the bonus game while predicting whether the ball entry means is changed to the first state.

  In the gaming machine Q6, the first variable ball entry means is characterized in that the game ball is more difficult to enter when the first state is changed than the second variable ball entry means. Machine Q7.

  According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q6, the ease of entering the gaming balls is made different between the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to enjoy the bonus game while predicting which variable ball entry means is variable to the first state.

  In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a slot machine. A gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, operation lever) The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z2. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display means may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

In any one of the above-mentioned gaming machines, the gaming machine Z3 is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.
<Others>
Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not the game ball will win on the basis of the winning on the winning opening, and when the win is won, the specific game is executed Machines have been proposed (e.g., Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).
However, further improvement of interest is required.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-described problems and the like, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 is capable of flowing the first flow path through which the gaming ball can flow down, and the gaming ball configured such that the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow A game ball launcher capable of striking and firing the game ball in the first channel and the second channel by varying the second channel and the launch intensity of the game ball; In order to play a game by firing a game ball in one flow path, the player is instructed to play a game by firing a game ball in the first gaming state and the second flow path, which are gaming states suggested to the player to play a game It is more difficult to enter than the first state in which the game ball which has flowed down the second flow path can enter the first setting and its first state which can be set by switching to the second gaming state which is the suggested gaming state Variable ball entry means that can be changed to the second state, and the ball entering ball into which the game ball flowing down the second flow path can enter Privilege granting means for granting a first benefit based on the game ball entering the stage and the variable ball entry means, and giving a second bonus based on the game ball entering the ball entry means And guiding the game ball having flowed down the second flow path to the variable ball entry means and guiding the game ball to the ball entry means. Sorting means that can be assigned to the second guiding path at a predetermined ratio, and storage means that can be stored before guiding the gaming balls distributed to the second guiding path to the ball entry means The variable control means capable of changing the storage means into a storage state capable of storing and a release state releasing the storage state; and the game ball stored in the storage means is released It flows down without being stored in the storage means in the released state more than in the case In which entrance spheres Previous entry ball means is configured so as to be difficult when the.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1, a bonus game wherein the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied. It has a game execution means, and the bonus game execution means executes a small bonus game a plurality of times until the predetermined condition is established from the second state to the first state as the bonus game, until the predetermined condition is established. The variable control means changes the storage means to the release state when a release condition is established based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 2, the bonus game type storing means for storing the plurality of types of bonus games having different predetermined conditions is stored in the bonus game type storing means The bonus game type determining means for determining the type of one bonus game from the plurality of bonus game types, and the bonus game execution means includes the one bonus game determined by the bonus game type determining means The bonus game is executed based on the type.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 4, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the number of ball entry into the variable ball entry means, and the bonus game type Among the plurality of types of bonus games stored in the storage means, the type of at least one bonus game is set such that the number of balls in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is greater than the type of other bonus games It is.
In the gaming machine according to the technical idea 5, in the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 or 4, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the passage of a period in which the variable ball entry means continues to be in the first state. Among the plurality of bonus game types stored in the bonus game type storage means, the type of at least one bonus game is the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied than the type of other bonus games. It has been set long.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first flow path in which the gaming ball can flow down, and the second flow in which the gaming ball configured to have difficulty in flowing the game ball which has flowed down the first flow path can flow A game ball launcher capable of striking and firing a game ball in the first flow path and the second flow path by varying the path and the firing strength of the game ball, and in the first flow path A game suggested to the player to play the game by firing the game ball in the first gaming state and the second flow path, which is a game state suggested to the player to play the game by firing the game ball The setting means which can be set by switching to the second gaming state which is the state, and the second state in which the gaming ball having flowed down the second flow path is more difficult to enter than the first state in which the ball can enter A variable ball entry means that can be changed to a state, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball having flowed down the second flow path, and A privilege giving means for providing a first benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and a second benefit based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, and the second A first guiding path for guiding the game ball having flowed down into the variable ball entry means to be capable of entering the variable ball entry means, and a second guide path for guiding the game ball to be enterable for the ball entry means Storage means capable of storing the game balls distributed to the second guideway before being guided to the ball entry means, and storage means capable of It has variable control means that can be varied between a storage state that can be stored and a release state that releases the storage state, and the release is more than when the gaming ball stored in the storage means is released If the fluid flows down without being stored in the storage means in the state In which entrance ball to ball means is configured to be difficult.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the following effect is exerted. That is, it has a bonus game execution means for executing a bonus game in which the variable ball entering means is changed to the first state when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the bonus game execution means comprises the bonus game execution means The small bonus game is executed a plurality of times to make the variable ball entry means variable from the second state to the first state until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the variable control means satisfies the predetermined condition. The storage means is made variable to the release state when a release condition that is satisfied based on the condition is satisfied.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, the following effect is exerted. That is, the type of one bonus game is determined from the bonus game type storage means in which the plurality of bonus game types having different predetermined conditions are stored and the type of the plurality of bonus games stored in the bonus game type storage means The bonus game type determining means performs the bonus game based on the type of the one bonus game determined by the bonus game type determining means.
Therefore, there is an effect that the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, the following effect is exerted. That is, the predetermined condition is established based on the number of ball entry into the variable entry means, and at least one of the plurality of types of benefit games stored in the benefit game type storage means. The type of one bonus game is such that the number of ball entry for which the predetermined condition is satisfied is set larger than that of other bonus game types.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 or 4, the following effect is exerted. That is, the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the passage of a period in which the variable entering means continues to be in the first state, and the types of a plurality of bonus games stored in the bonus game type storage unit Among the types of at least one bonus game, the period in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is set longer than the category of other bonus games.
Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
111 Payout control device (benefit granting means)
112 launch control device (game ball launch means)
C63 General Entry ( 2nd Entry Means)
65 first variable winning device (first ball entrance means)
C710a Storage valve (regulating member)
S7203, S7302 Variable control means 51 Operation handle (operation means)

Claims (2)

A first flow path through which the game balls can flow, and a second flow path through which the game balls configured to make it difficult for the game balls flowing down the first flow path to flow
Game ball launching means capable of striking and firing the game ball in the first flow path and the second flow path by varying the firing strength of the game ball;
First ball entry means capable of entering game balls that have flowed down the second flow path;
Second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means capable of entering game balls that have flowed down the second flow path;
It is possible to grant the first benefit based on the game ball having entered the first ball entry means, and to provide the second benefit based on the game ball having entered the second ball entry means. In a gaming machine having
A restricting member capable of receiving the game ball on the upper surface above the second ball entry means and capable of restricting the flow downward;
It has a variable control means capable of changing the restriction member between a restricted state in which the game ball can be restricted on the upper surface and a released state in which the restricted state is released,
The game machine,
When the restriction member is changed from the restriction state to the release state, a plurality of game balls which are restricted by causing the game ball which is restricted by the restriction member to flow may flow into a specific area It is possible, when the restriction member is in the release state, it is possible to flow the game ball into the specific area one ball at a time when the game ball flows down without being restricted by the restriction member. And
In the case of being changed from the restricted state to the released state, among the gaming balls restricted by the restricting member, the restricting member restricts later than the gaming balls previously restricted by the restricting member. A game machine characterized in that the game ball is configured to easily enter the second ball entry means .   2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game ball emission means is configured to change the emission intensity by operating an operation means operable by a player.

Images